AccessCat Iss 2 12

Access Control Catalogue - Issue 2.
12
a vital part of your world
Introduction
Welcome to the 2nd Issue of the new ADT European Access Control Catalogue containing the wide range of products available from our distribution centre in Letchworth. This catalgoue combines the Kantech & CCure 800 ranges and also now includes CCure 9000 for the first time. In addition we have added the standard product range and a new chapter for the Honeywell Dimension Non PC Networked Access Control Solution. We aim to make your product range as comprehensive as possible to ensure you never need go anywhere else. To meet this goal, our product specialists, with your help, have selected the most appropriate, cost effective product range available on the market. In line with our ISO 9000 accreditation, only those products that meet the highest quality criteria have been included. Our goal is to despatch product on the same day as we receive your order. Our warranty and service returns policy is second to none. We recognise that your business is highly dependent on excellence in customer service and to help achieve this we offer extended warranty from many of our suppliers. Full credit is also available on a No Question No Fuss basis for any new in-warranty product returned to the distribution centre. Our standard duration for warranty is a minimum of 12 months credit. Tyco Fire & Security Web site contains an endless supply of product related information available in multiple languages - English, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Polish and Spanish. It is regularly updated and features many aids to the selling process including presentation material, independent product test results and detailed technical information. To enhance customer specifications and quotations we also provide a series of product datasheets which can give our clients an opportunity to read more about the product. We are positive that together we can help grow your business and we look forward to working with you in the future.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT & PRE-SALES CALL CENTRE
CONTACT INFORMATION
TYCO International EMEA Voltaweg 20 6101 XK Echt - The Netherlands Fax: +31 475 352 725 For Technical Services: Hours: 8:00 to 18:00 EET, CET, GMT: (Toll Free): +800CALLTYCO OR +800 2255 8926 UK: 08081 013 73 OR 08701 238 787 For Technical Pre-sales Inquiries: tfsemea.presales@tycoint.com For Technical Training Enquiries: tfsemea.training@tycoint.com http://www.tycoemea.com/English/Training.asp For SSA/dongle Requests: http://www.tycoemea.com/Dongle/index.htm
For Technical Post-Sales Enquiries: tfsemea.support@tycoint.com www.tycoemea.com www.calltyco.com Hours: 8:00 to 18:00 EET, CET, GMT: (Toll Free): +800CALLTYCO OR +800 2255 8926 UK: 08081 01373 OR 08701 238787
Access Catalogue Issue 2 - 2011
Page 1
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3.1 Chapter 3.2 Chapter 3.3 Chapter 4.1 Chapter 4.2 Chapter 4.3 Chapter 4.4 Chapter 5.1 Chapter 5.2 Chapter 6.1 Chapter 7.1 Chapter 7.2 Chapter 7.3 Standalone io99 1 ioPass 2 io200 5 Non PC Network Access Control Kantech Software EntraPass Special Edition 1 EntraPass Corparate Edition 3 EntraPass Global Edition 6 Kantech Communications and cable Katech Controllers KT-100 1 KT-300EU 2 KT-400EU 5 CCure 800 Software CCure800/8000 Security Managment Solutions 1 Software Enhancements System Redundancy 1 ID Badging Software 9 Netvue Software 12 Software Options 14 CCure 800/8000 Enterprise Integration Options Imprivata Onesign 2 CCure Central v 2.2 CCure 9000 CCure application software 1 Application upgrades 6 Video Integration and System Options 7 CCure 9000 Application Server 8 CCure 9000 Migration Utility 10 CCure 9000 Web Client 11 CCure Mobile CCure 9000 Siteserver CCure Hardware & Common Devices CCure Common Parts apC Controllers 5 iSTAR Pro 10 iSTAR eX 11 iSTAR Edge 14 RM Personality Modules & I/O Devices Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 HID 125kHz cards and readers HID iCLASS cards and readers ADT 26bit Mifare cards and readers Software House Muti-Tech and Multi- Format readers ADT 34bit Mifare cards and readers ioProxTM Proximity cards and readers CCure RM Series Readers Nedap AVI Readers & Accessories Nedap uPass Research Reader General Access Products Standard Egress Devices 2 T-Rex Exit Detector 6 Emergency Egress Devices 9 Access Control Locking Standard Maglock 3 External Maglock 5 Solenoid Bolt 7 Shearlocks 8 Accessories 9 Other Locking Solution 11 Power Supplies ID Badging Solutions Card Bureau Card Accessories Door Accessories Junction Boxes Local Door Annunciators Cable EMEA Technical Services User Training Tyco EMEA Training Access Control Survey document Power Consumption Chart CCure Cable Specs
Chapter 8.5 Chapter 8.6 Chapter 8.7 Chapter 8.8 Chapter 8.9 Chapter 9.1 Chapter 9.2 Chapter 9.3 Chapter 9.4 Chapter10.1 Chapter 10.2 Chapter 11.1 Chapter 11.2 Chapter 11.3 Chapter 12 Chapter 13.1 Chapter 13.2 Chapter 13.3 Chapter 14.1 Chapter 15.2 Chapter 15.3
Page 2
Access Catalogue Issue 2 - 2011
Chapter 1 - Standalone
Features
DG-180 Split off controller and keypad for high security Epoxy sealed Aluminum alloy casing design with vandal resistant screws for enhanced safety and durability Memory volume up to 1000+ PINs Invalid PIN lock-out 2 LED indicator and buzzer for status indication, keypad with beep sound Additional input for anti tailgating function Non-volatile memory Dual relay outputs for multi-control Touch panel Extremely slim body and narrow faceplate suitable for all types of door/frames DG-25 Stainless steal Surface mount Operating voltage: 1224 Vdc 5 digit codes programmable Allows up to 100 PIN codes Dual relays output for multi-control Door reed switch input for anti-trailing Fully programmable via keypad and master code 3 LED displays with audible indication
DG-180/DG-25 Keypads
The DG-180 is a more aesthetically pleasing keypad with the control electronics housed in the power supply included in the kit. The pigtail lead from the keypad makes for a more secure installation than the DG-25. The power supply will require a 12Vdc 7Ah battery (not included in the JDE kit part code) to support the system under mains fail conditions. Although the unit will support up to 1,000 PIN codes this is NOT recommended due to the likelihood of someone guessing a code. The DG-25 is a surface mounted stainless steel unit designed for both internal and external applications. The unit is not IP rated but will withstand general wear and tear in both commercial and industrial applications. The unit is programmed via the keypad and all wiring for monitoring and locking is terminated in the keypad enclosure (which means outside of the secure area). The keypad will require a battery backed power Supply Unit capable of supporting the keypad and proposed locking device(s).
Technical Specification
Dimensions DG-180 Height 150 DG-25 Height 116 Width 44 Width 80 Depth 6.7 Depth 26
Product Codes
DG-180-SET ICS DG-180-SET keypad kit. Includes mullion style keypad with separate PSU. PSU houses control PCB with relay output. PSU supports 12Vdc up to 500mA for locking. Requires a 12Vdc 7Ah battery not included (PS-1270) ICS DG25WP stainless steel keypad. Up to 100 users with 5 digit code. Keypad requires 12Vdc power supply (we recommend with battery back up)
DG25WP
02/12
Access Control Catalogue
Chapter 1 Page 1
Features
2 Door stand alone controller 4 digit LED |programme & status display 16 Key keypad Card entry & deletion via Master card or Keypad 4 user programmable inputs 4 user programmable 1A relay outputs Up to a maximum of 1,000 users Door open & door forced monitoring
Morley Sentinel 2 Reader Standalone Access Controller

The Sentinel is a feature rich 2 door stand alone controller offering exceptional user benefits. Sentinel is easy to install and maintenance friendly, housed in an aesthetically appealing and durable housing for guaranteed quality and appeal. Sentinel allows users to programme tokens for an individual or both doors on the controller. The door group programming is simple and easy to implement. Sentinel can be programmed via the password protected controller keypad. Cards may be added or deleted via the keypad or directly at a reader, using a Master card. In every event the 4 digit LED display provided in each Sentinel gives a clear, concise indication of controller programme and operational status.
Processor: Memory: Siemens type 164, 16 bit running @ 20MHz 128K bytes of random access memory giving 1,000 cardholders capacity. NiCad cell RAM backup. 12Vdc 10% 240mA
Product Codes
101013ADT
Battery Backup: Power: Current: Physical Specification Wall mount housing:
Chapter 1 Page 2
Morley Sentinel 2 reader controller. Configured for ADT to read HIDs 37bit tracked format H10302 only. Use iCLASS readers (including Morleys Mv-1 unit) and H10302 format cards only. Requires reader(s), credentials, 12Vdc power supply and standby battery. ICLASSALONEKIT1 Morley Sentinel 2 reader controller in 150W X 110H X 32D (mm) H10302 format. Supplied with 1 x R10 iCLASS reader, 50 x iCLASS ISO cards in H10302 format, Elmdene 12Vdc 2Amp PSU and 12Vdc 7Ah battery. Accessories Readers 105068ADT Morley Mv-1 iCLASS Vandal Resistant Reader 109018ADT Morley MV spacer for Mv-1 reader. Required when this reader is to be mounted on to metal surfaces 6100CKN0000ADT1 HID R10 iCLASS reader ADT branded. Credentials 2000PGGMN-H10302 HID iCLASS 2K2 ISO card - 37 bit tracked format 2002PGGMN-H10302 HID iCLASS 16K16 ISO card - 37 bit tracked format 2050PKNMN-H10302 HID iCLASS 2K2 Key - 37 bit tracked format 2052PKNMN-H10302 HID iCLASS 16K16 Key - 37 bit tracked format 2060PSSMN-H10302 HID iCLASS 2k2 smart key 37 bit tracked format 2062PSSMN-H10302 HID iCLASS 16k16 smart key - 37 b tracked format Access Control Catalogue 02/12
Chapter 1 - Standalone ioPassTM Stand Alone Door Controller

Features
Up to 5000 card users Use reader, keypad or both (common code for visitors) Integrated or external ioProxTM proximity reader Read range of up to 4 (10cm) Easy programming from the keypad Higher security provided by a concealed door relay module Auxiliary relay to arm/disarm an alarm system Audit trial on the unit (not date and time stamped) Duress function available 10 proximity keytags included
ioPass Stand Alone Door Controller

The ioPassTM is a fully programmable stand-alone access control system that allows entry using proximity technology, keypad or both, for up to 5,000 users. Compact and surface mount, the ioPassTM is programmed directly from the unit. The system is available in two models: with integrated or external proximity reader. Easy Programming Programming is performed directly from the keypad with visual confirmation of each operation on the 16-character, 2-line LCD display. Invalid Password Lockout To prevent unauthorised persons from gaining password entry by trial and error, the system activates an alarm relay and/or automatically deletes the card number after five tries, once the option is selected in the system. Integrated or external ioProxTM Proximity Reader Two ioPassTM models are available. The integrated proximity reader model is used for indoor installations, the external proximity reader model provides a vandal and weather resistant feature. Higher Security provided by concealed door relay module. The ioPassTM relay module is separate from the unit and can be concealed in a wall or ceiling.
TYPICAL MOUNTING DIAGRAM

Door Relay Sounder T.Rex Egress PIR
Door Relay
Integrated
Proximity Reader
External
Proximity Reader
02/12
Chapter 1 Page 3
Product Codes
ioPass Standalone units SA-500ADT-EN ioPass ADT branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags SA-600ADT-EN ioPass ADT branded external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags + external P100W26 reader SA-500-DT ioPass non branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags + Dutch version SA-500-EN ioPass non branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags SA-500-FR ioPass non branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags + French version SA-500-GE ioPass non branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags + German version SA-500-SP ioPass non branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags + Spanish version SA-500-IT ioPass non branded, integrated reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags + Italian version, English manual SA-600-DT ioPass non branded, external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags external P100W26 reader Dutch version SA-600-EN ioPass non branded, external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags external P100W26 reader SA-600-FR ioPass non branded, external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags external P100W26 reader French version SA-600-GE ioPass non branded, external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags external P100W26 reader German version SA-600-SP ioPass non branded, external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags external P100W26 reader Spanish version SA-600-IT ioPass non branded, external reader, includes SA-RM56 + 10 tags external P100W26 reader Italian version, Engliah manual Common Parts SA-RM56 ioPassTM additional relay module P10SHL Kantech ioProxTM Standard shell tag/card for use with ioPassTM & other Kantech products. The card is dual- XSF & industry standard 26 bit Wiegand Kantech ioProxTM Dye sublimination card (suitable for direct card printing) for use with ioPassTM & other Kantech products. The card is dual format - XSF & industry standard 26 bit Wiegand Kantech ioProxTM proximity keytag for use with ioPASS & other Kantech products. The key tag is dual format - XSF & industry standard 26 bit Wiegand Kantech ioProxTM ioProxTM self adhesive tag for use with ioPASS & other Kantech products. The key tag is dual format - XSF & industry standard 26 bit Wiegand
P20DYE
P40KEY
P50TAG
Chapter 1 Page 4
02/12
02/12
240Va.c. Unswitched Fuse Spur PSU Door Relay Sounder Door Contact Maglock Reader Breakglass Box Controller Egress Button PSU Door Relay Sounder Maglock Mini Trunking Controller Door Control Break Glass Egress Reader
Chapter 1.1 - Standalone
IOPASS TYPICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
Access Control Catalogue Secure Area
Unswitched Fuse Spur
Chapter 1.1 Page 5
Chapter 1.1 - Standalone
This page is left intentionally blank
Chapter 1.1 Page 6
02/12
Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution Non PC Network Access Control Solution
Features
Up to 64 doors controlled. Area based integrated access and intrusion control. No access if area is set. Prevents false alarms. Up to 1000 users. Access event log with 1000 events recorded in panel (separate intruder log). Fully customisable weekly schedules to control access, autosetting and output functions. Up to 32 yearly holiday schedules each with 20 periods. Users access controlled by access templates and group set status. Area behind a door is unset automatically upon access if user has authority. This prevents false alarms due to failure to unset.
Galaxy Dimension
Galaxy Dimension combines the best intrusion features with advanced Access Control functions in a single, integrated system. Installing and programming a full security system becomes easier, quicker and more efficient. With only one system to install and maintain, one point of contact for Technical Support and one training session for the complete system, there are savings in both time and money. Offering the non PC based Access Control system for small industrial and commercial premises provides a user friendly system with upgrade facility to integrated Intruder and Access Control at a later date. The combined Intrusion and Access System offers the end user a system which retains maximum convenience whilst maintaining the highest level of security at all times. Additional Features Groups can be set by pressing the Menu Recall button before card swipe, or by triple swipe. A system keypad can be linked to each reader for Menu Recall function control. Evacuation control will allow doors to unlock in the event of fire. Wiegand compatibility - gives the flexibility to work with a huge range of reader and card technologies up to 40 Bits. Allows compatibility to retrofit existing installations. Compatible with Wiegand keypads that use 8-bit Burst mode. DCM modules available in compact plastic box or combined with a PSU and RIO expansion module in a Metal box for installation convenience.
New Innovative User Interface The Galaxy colour TouchCentre facilitates easy user operation. An intuitive menu gives clear options, and event logs are displayed as a scroll list for easier comprehension. Users can customise the screen background with their own images and logos. Enhanced controls allow simple centralised operation of electrical appliances such as lights, heating or window blinds either manually using the touchscreen or automatically via timer control. Programming Software Compatibility The new Remote Servicing Suite uses a common database to communicate with all Galaxy panels from one program. A networked version of the Remote Servicing Suite is also available to allow access to up to date records for all users. It guarantees secure management of information in one central location.
Maximum Configuration
Device/Panel GD-48 GD-96 GD-264 GD-520 Keyproxes 3 10 10 24 DCMs 4 16 16 32 DCM controlled doors 8 32 32 64
02/11
Chapter 2 Page 1
Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

ProxKey with Integral HID Reader Typical Solution Schematic
Dimension Panel
C080 or C081
CP038-36-H
1346LSSM-H10302 1346LSSM-H10302.1
6005BGB00
Chapter 2 Page 2
02/11

Features
Up to 64 doors controlled. Up to 1000 users. Access event log with 1000 events recorded in panel (separate intruder log). Fully customisable weekly schedules to control access, auto-setting and output functions. Up to 32 yearly holiday schedules each with 20 periods. Users access controlled by access templates and group set status. Evacuation control will allow doors to unlock in the event of fire. Wiegand compatiblilty - gives the flexibility to work with a huge range of reader and card technologies up to 40 Bits. Allows compatibility to retrofit existing installations. - Compatible with Wiegand keypads that use 8-bit Burst mode. - DCM modules available in compact plastic box or combined with a PSU and RIO expansion module in a Metal box for installation convenience.
Galaxy Dimension Door Control Module

The Galaxy Dimension Door Control Module (DCM) connects to the RS485 data line along with standard RIO and MAX devices. The DCM is available with or without an internal 12Vd.c. 2.75Amp PSU.
Each DCM (the number of DCMs per system is subject to the panel type - see chart below) will provide a networked Access Control solution that integrates into the Intruder panel and can be used for secure Access Control and/or alarm set/unset subject to local Intruder policies. Whilst on line the DCM will support via the control panel up to 1,000 users and in off-line/standalone mode up to 100 individual user tokens.
* Subject to devices-Reader & Rio intruder intems etc..
The DCM allows for two connection of two Wiegand output access control card readers, and has the necessary inputs and outputs for the door monitoring contact, egress device and lock output. The Power DCM provides up to 750mA* at 12Vd.c. per lock output. Both versions of the DCM are provided in an enclosure. The Power DCM also has a RIO and Smart PSU mounted in the enclosure.
Door Control Module Schematic
RS485 Bus 12Vd.c. Power In Touch Centre
(x2) (x2) NOTE: Use the DCM for fully programmable access control and maximum choice of card/reader technology Cable Schedule Data Line - Belden 8723 Reader - Belden 9504 Inputs/Outputs - Alarm 4, 6 or 8 core (lock feed must be separate cable) Door Contact Key Switch (x2) (x2) Breakglass Exit Button HID 26 bit Open Format or 37 bit Tracked Format
Maglock
02/11
Chapter 2 Page 3

Features
Customisable homescreen via external SD card slot Large, bright colourful display Intuitive touch-screen display with icons and menu driven prompts Simple setting and unsetting feature for systems with multiple areas Entry/Exit Delay countdown displayed Add, delete or edit users and codes View entire zone list with status of each zone Overview of system status display Event log display Engineer console mode with full MK7 keypad display emulator for programming Building control feature allows the user to control outputs to operate systems such as lighting and airconditioning.
Galaxy Dimension TouchCenter
Colour graphical touch screen for Galaxy Dimension. Highly practical state of the art technology at your finger tips. With its large, customisable colour touch screen, Honeywells Galaxy Dimension TouchCenter is a new and modern user interface offering end-users the simplest operation and providing installers with a key differentiator to help retain and grow their business. Installers can increase their advertising exposure by displaying their company name or logo on the home screen and add value to an installation by putting a picture and name of the end-users company on a bright colourful interface.
The Galaxy Dimension TouchCenter makes it easier than ever for end-users to take advantage of their security system features. Even the most advanced functions are simple, with graphics and menu driven prompts guiding the user every step of the way. There is no reader integrated into the TouchCenter. To provide set/unset capability by either card reader or biometric a Door Control Module (DCM) should be provided and a reader sited next to the TouchCenter. The schematics below show typical solutions.
TouchCenter Typical Solutions

Dimension Panel
DCM Image CO80 or C081
TouchCenter
6005BGB00
1346LSSM-H10302 1346LSSM-H10302.1
Chapter 2 Page 4
02/11

Control Panels
C048-C-C1 Galaxy Dimension 48 UK - intruder panel with integral 2.5Amp PSU. 16 zones and 8 trigger outputs on-board. Can be expanded by RIO to 48 zones. Will support 4 DCMs - 8 Wiegand card readers
C096-C-C1
Galaxy Dimension 96 UK - intruder panel with integral 2.5Amp PSU. 16 zones and 8 trigger outputs on-board. Can be expanded by RIO to 96 zones. Will support 16 DCMs - 32 Wiegand card readers
C264-C-C1
C520-C-C1
User Interface Modules

CP038-36-H Galaxy Keyprox ADT branded with integral HID reader. The Galaxy Keyprox is a standard MK7 keypad and a proximity card reader combined into one housing. This allows dual function setting/unsetting ability from the one unit without the need for a separate card reader. It is primarily intended for use in situations where a PIN and/or card are needed to set/unset the Intruder Alarm System. It is not intended to be used for door control as it does not contain a door strike relay. However, limited door function can be programmed using programming links in the Galaxy Control Panels. Galaxy TouchCentre - unbranded. For use with Dimension Control Panels only. Simple to use graphical display for system administration and management.
CP040-00
CP040-36
Galaxy TouchCentre - ADT branded. For use with Dimension Control Panels only. Simple to use graphical display for system administration and management.
Access Control
C080 Honeywell Dimension Door Control Module DCM. Supports up to 2 x Wiegand readers and necessary i/o for Access Control
C081
Honeywell Dimension Door Control Module DCM with integral PSU. Supports up to 2 x Wiegand readers and necessary i/o for Access Control
02/11
Chapter 2 Page 5

Card Readers & Tokens
6005BGB00 HID Proxpoint Plus in grey with 18 (45.7cm) pigtail cable. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on card read
5365EGH00
HID Miniprox in grey with hazardous area backbox. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on card read. The hazardous location MiniProx provides the same features and dimensions as the MiniProx reader, with a junction box incorporated for use in hazardous locations
5365EGP00
HID MiniProx in grey with 18 (45.7cm) pigtail cable. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on card read
Preferred 37bit Tracked Format

1346LSSM-H10302 HID:1346LSSM Format: H10302 ProxKey II Keyfob programmed for HIDs tracked 37bit Wiegand format. Supplied with HID logo on the front, back is standard finish. Numbering is sequential internal & external. Order in multiples of 100
1346LSSM-H10302.1 HID: 1346LSSM Format: H10302 ProxKey II Keyfob programmed for HIDs tracked 37bit Wiegand format. Supplied with HID logo on the front, back is standard finish. Numbering is sequential internal & external. These can be ordered individually
1386LGGMN-H10302 HID: 1386LGGMN-H10302 ISO Prox II programmed for HIDs tracked 37bit Wiegand format. Front & rear supplied in PVC plain white gloss finish. Card numbering matching - internal & external. NOT slot punched. Order in multiples of 100
1326LMSMV-H10302
HID: 1326LMSMV Format: H10302 ProxCard II programmed for HID 37bit tracked format Wiegand. Plain white vinyl with matte finish. Base with moulded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch Order in multiples of 100 1326LMSMV-H10302.1 As above, these can be ordered individually
26bit Format - Open Protocol

1346LSSM-H10301 HID: 1346LSSM Format: H10301 ProxKey II keyfob programmed for 26bit Wiegand. Supplied with HID logo on the front, back is standard finish. Numbering is sequential internal & external. Order in multiples of 100
1386LGGMN-H10301 HID: 1386LGGMN-H10301 ISO Prox II programmed for 26bit Wiegand. Front & rear supplied in PVC plain white gloss finish. Card numbering matching internal & external. NOT slot punched. Order in multiples of 100
1326LMSMV-H10301
HID: 1326LMSMV Format: H10301 ProxCard II programmed for 26bit Wiegand. Plain white vinyl with matte finish. Base with moulded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch
Chapter 2 Page 6
02/11

Technical Specifications
Description Zones On-board (max) Outputs (400mA) On-board Trigger Outputs on Flying Lead (10mA) Integrated PSU RS485 Databuses Keypads (KeyProx) Graphics Keypad Galaxy TouchCentre Bus Mounted Prox Readers (MAX) DCMs with 2 x Wiegand Interfaces DCM Controlled Doors Wireless Users 7 Day Timer Schedules Zone Types O/P Types Library Event Log Access Log Multi-Users Autoset Pre-Check Timed Lockout Links Part Set Silent Part Set RS232 Integrated PSTN (V22) Printer Output Remote Servicing Ethernet Module Groups SMS Text ISDN EN50131 GD-48 16 - (48) 8 6 2.5A 1 8 (3) 1 4 4 8 100 19 52 81 Yes 1000 1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes 64 Yes Yes Built-in Built-in Via RS232 Yes Optional 8 Yes Optional Yes GD-96 GD-264 16 - (96) 16 - (264) 8 8 6 6 2.5A 2.5A 2 2 16 (7) 16 (7) 2 2 16 16 16 16 32 32 5800H Series via RF RIOs 250 1000 35 67 52 52 81 81 Yes Yes 1500 1500 1000 1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 128 256 Yes Yes Yes Yes Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Via RS232 Via RS232 Yes Yes Optional Optional 16 32 Yes Yes Optional Optional Yes Yes GD-520 16 - (520) 8 6 2.5A 4 32 (24) 4 32 32 64 1000 67 52 81 Yes 1500 1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes 256 Yes Yes Built-in Built-in Via RS232 Yes Optional 32 Yes Optional Yes
02/11
Chapter 2 Page 7
Chapter 2 Page 8
02/11
Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software EntraPass Special Edition

Features
1
Increased security with easy to set-up integration of access, video, intrusion and telephone entry systems Embedded high performance Sybase SQL database engine Controls up to 128 readers with KT-100 and KT-300; 256 readers with KT-400 Fast and user friendly installation and operation Built-in email reporting capability
(1) All of the features of EntraPass listed on this data sheet are available with software version 5.0 and higher
Single Workstation Security Management Software

Single Workstation System EntraPass Special Edition is a single workstation security software. It controls up to 128 card readers with KT-100/KT-300 and up to 256 card readers with KT-400 door controllers. The software also includes a number of stand-alone utilities that allow operators to perform a variety of tasks such as: verifying the system database, changing the system language (English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Dutch, German, Italian and Chinese), migrating from older versions of EntraPass, viewing reports, etc. Express Setup Express Setup allows you to configure system components such as sites and controllers, as well as devices associated with these components such as doors and inputs. This utility reduces programming to a minimum, allowing the installer to test the installation and system components. Site Architecture EntraPass Special Edition can manage up to 64 sites consisting of KT-100, KT-200, KT-300 and KT-400 controllers (up to 64 controllers). Video Integration Real-time monitoring capability is a response to the growing importance of video in access control systems. Integration with American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems through the powerful Intellex Application Programming Interface (API) provides real-time video monitoring as well as video playback. Video can be linked to access events (such as door forced open) and recorded from one to sixteen cameras from different American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex units simultaneously. Presets, sequences, dome control and 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, and 4x4 views are available through the EntraPass software. All cameras can be called up directly from a floor plan simply by double-clicking on the camera or dome icon. Operators can configure viewing parameters for digital video applications through an EntraPass user interface. Alarm Panel Integration Alarm panel integration can be accomplished with the use of the EntraPass software in one of two ways. The first way is to connect the software directly to the DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS or Honeywell Galaxy Dimensions alarm panels. Alternatively, the KT-400 can be connected to the DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS or Honeywell Galaxy Dimensions alarm panels. Either connection method allows the alarm panels to receive intrusion events, view the status of zones, and manage partitions and user codes. In addition the system can be armed/disarmed (single or multiple partitions) via reader (KT-400 only) or manual operation. Telephone Entry Integration EntraPass Special Edition integrates with the Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) to provide an access control solution with telephone entry access capabilities which include: fast configuration and firmware updates, live transaction monitoring, and system backup. For more information, refer to the Kantech Telephone Entry System data sheet.
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Page 1
Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software

Tehnical Specifications
Recommended Computer Requirements Processor (without video integration) Dual Core Processor (with video integration) Quad Core RAM 2 GB Free Hard Disk Space for Software 20 GB (30 GB with video integration) Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 Graphic Adapter Card AGP or PCI Express 8X graphics (without video integration) card with 64 MB memory and DirectX 9.0 support Graphic Adapter Card with Video Integ NVS 295 or equivalent DVD/CD-ROM Drive 48x Network Interface Card 10/100Base-T (Gigabit or greater with video integration) Operating System Compatibility Windows XP Pro in 32-bit version, Server 2003/2008 Standard/Enterprise, Vista Pro and Windows 7 Pro (all in 32 and 64-bit versions). All operating systems should have their latest Service Packs and updates. System Capacities Cards Unlimited Cards per Controller in Stand-Alone Mode KT-100 (6,000), KT-200 (3,000), KT-300/128K (8,000), KT-300/512K (56,000), KT-400 (100,000) Card Families or Site Codes Unlimited Number of Sites Up to 64 (Max. 64 controllers) Door Controllers per Site 32 Card Readers/Keypads KT-100/KT-300 (128 per system), KT-400 (256 per system) Monitored Points (Input) KT-100 (128 per site), KT-300 (512 per site), KT-400 (8,192 per site) Card User Access Levels 250 per site Access Level Combinations Unlimited Schedules of Four Time Zones Each 100 Holidays 366 per system Holiday Types 4 System Operator Passwords Unlimited Operator Security Levels Unlimited, pre-defined (3) Concurrent System Languages Two Number of Printers One log printer; one report printer; optional badging printer Integration Capabilities Intrusion DSC PowerSeries and MAXSYS Alarm Panels (PC1616, PC1832, PC1864,PC4020) Honeywell Galaxy Dimension Panel G48 Video American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems. Intellex Ultra, DVMS and IP all require software v3.1 or higher, Intellex LT requires software v2.6 or higher.
Product Codes
Software E-SPE-XX-V5 E-SPE-V5 E-SPE-UPG-V5 EntraPass Special Edition v5.xx software and user manual EntraPass Special Edition v5.xx software only EntraPass Special Edition upgrade from v3.xx to v5.xx software only (requires Kantech Advantage Program token for future upgrades).
Options E-SPE-GXY
Honeywell Galaxy Dimension Integration for G48 panel
User Manuals E-SPE-MAN-XX
EntraPass Special Edition user manual
Note: XX in model number denotes the language of user manual: EN (English), FR (French)
Chapter 3.1 Page 2
02/12
Printers (optional) Badging Printer (optional) DSC PowerSeries and MAXSYS Alarm Panels2 Honeywell Galaxy G48
Single Workstation System

WebViews (IP cameras and DVR web pages)3
KT-400
American Dynamics HDVR and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems2 (optional)
KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, and Kantech Telephone Entry System
DSC MAXSYS and PowerSeries Alarm Panels2 Honeywell Galaxy G48
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
See Integration Capabilities (in the Specifications section above) for more information A variety of IP cameras and DVR web pages have been tested successfully using WebViews. For a detailed list, please contact your sales representative Dial-up: KT-300 only, using RS-232 serial modem at remote site (KT-100 needs to be connected to a KT-300 or KT-400) Direct: KT-300 or KT-400, via RS-232 or RS-485 with USB-485 or VC-485 converter; KT-100 or KT-200 via RS-485 with USB-485 or VC-485 converter Ethernet TCP/IP: using Kantech IP Link (KT-100 also requires VC-485 converter) or KT-400
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Page 3
Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software EntraPass Corporate Edition

Features
1
Increased security with easy to set up integration of access, video, intrusion and telephone entry systems Embedded high-performance Sybase SQL database engine Supports up to 20 workstations and controls thousands of readers Fast and user-friendly installation and operation Available WebStation capability that allows system to be controlled remotely SmartLink Task Builder automates system tasks
Network and Web-Ready Security Management Software

Network and Web-Ready Kantech EntraPass Corporate Edition is a powerful network and web-ready security management software that adapts easily to meet the needs of growing businesses, allowing you to manage one building or access multiple remote sites from a network. Express Setup Express Setup allows you to configure system components such as sites and controllers, as well as devices associated with these components such as doors and inputs. This utility reduces programming to a minimum, allowing the installer to test the installation and system components. Site Architecture A site is composed of controllers attached to the same communication port or connection. The system can manage up to 32 local sites (consisting of KT-100, KT-200, KT-300 or KT-400 door controllers) per Multi-Site Gateway. EntraPass Corporate Edition also allows users to add up to 512 secure IP connections or dial up sites per Multi-Site Gateway. EntraPass software is scalable - it expands as the security requirements of the business grows. Redundancy Server EntraPass Corporate Edition offers an optional redundancy server with a mirror database to monitor all data activity on your primary EntraPass server and creates a real-time copy of the system database. In the event of primary server failure, the mirror database automatically launches the redundancy server which supports all the features and functionality of the primary server. Once the primary server returns online, all archives are merged and/or the entire database is copied from the redundancy server, without interrupting system operation. Network-Ready EntraPass Corporate Edition is compatible with the Kantech IP Link (an RS232 to TCP/IP converter) that provides a secure Ethernet connection. This is an easy and affordable way to manage your access control system over a network by relaying data between the door controllers and the Multi-Site Gateway. Kantech IP Link serves as a polling device that will control the excess bandwidth by communicating to the Multi-Site Gateways only when necessary. Door Controller Compatibility EntraPass Corporate Edition is compatible with Kantechs KT-100, KT-200, KT-300 and KT-400 door controllers. This has an added benefit when upgrading existing sites that require more flexibility and improved user interfaces. It also allows installers to select the controller that best suits their customers needs and budget. The KT-400 is a four-door Ethernet encrypted (128-bit AES) controller that is used as a door controller and as an IP communication device (via onboard Ethernet Port) for a remote site loop. This eliminates the need for an external Kantech IP Link to connect to the network.
Chapter 3.1 Page 4
02/12

Simplified System Management EntraPass workspaces provide customized views of the EntraPass system based on an operators access privileges. Each workspace is created and defined in terms of devices gateways, sites, doors, relays, etc. and is configured to identify what areas of the EntraPass system the operator can access and view, such as desktop display, card fields, etc. Workspaces let you create different views of the EntraPass system that can be saved and applied to any operator. An operator can further create and refine views to filter additional components that are not necessary for day-today operation. The operator can create, save, and reuse temporary workspaces. This is useful whenever a recurring operation is needed on the system such as creating reports. You can assign up to five cards to any employee to avoid having to create five different entries in EntraPass. Access levels can also be applied at this time to ensure cardholders have access only to authorized areas. Manage Your System Remotely Easily manage your system over the Internet using the EntraPass WebStation. The web interface provides remote access to create, modify, and delete cardholders; and to export cardholder lists without the use of additional workstations. You can assign an access level to cardholders, manage access levels and schedules, manually operate doors, relays, and inputs, view last card transactions, receive reports securely by email, view live events in real-time or export in csv format and integrate and display live video from IP cameras, DVRs, etc. using WebViews. In addition, using the EntraPass vocabulary editor, you can translate the WebStation into any foreign language. EntraPass supports the following languages: English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Dutch, German, Italian and Chinese. SmartLink for Advanced System Integration and Automation The SmartLink application enables operators to integrate EntraPass Corporate Edition with most intelligent devices such as video multiplexers, HVAC systems, LCD panels, video matrix switchers, etc. SmartLink uses an RS-232 or network connection between the EntraPass workstation and the external device. With the SmartLink Task Builder, EntraPass reaches new levels in task automation. A series of tasks, similar to macros, can be created and triggered on any event and component in the system. When an event occurs, the tasks are then executed by the system. You can manually activate these specific tasks directly from the interactive floor plans in EntraPass. Advanced system integration can be accomplished by using the bi-directional SmartLink library to communicate with software applications such as time and attendance systems, badging systems, human resource management systems, student registration systems, etc. This allows complete and real-time data exchanges between systems, eliminating redundant data entry. WebViews Provide An Enhanced Operator Experience Graphical layouts can enhance your EntraPass experience. You can integrate embedded DVRs, IP cameras, web pages, or network files into the desktop. For example, add a IP camera view or a geographical map with objects, such as doors and cameras, directly onto the map for a visual representation of objects in various locations across the world. This gives you the ability to combine multiple technologies into one consolidated view.
Kantech Advantage Program An optional Kantech Advantage Program (KAP) program provides 12 months of updates and end user online training. As EntraPass continues to deliver new features and enhancements, it is more important than ever that you have the education and tools necessary to effectively use this solution. These optional KAPs ensure that you receive new functionalities and end user online training with software updates. Purchase the number of tokens required for your EntraPass installation and then enter the token license in the EntraPass server software. To access the end user online training available through the Kantech Advantage Program, simply complete the registration form available on our web site, www.kantech.com. Video Integration Real-time monitoring capability is a response to the growing importance of video in access control systems. Integration with American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems provides real-time video monitoring as well as video playback. Video can be linked to access events (such as door forced open) and recorded from one to sixteen cameras from different American Dynamics recorders simultaneously. Presets, sequences, dome control and 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, and 4x4 views are available through the EntraPass software. All cameras can be called up directly from a floor plan simply by double-clicking on the camera or dome icon. Operators can configure viewing parameters for digital video applications through an EntraPass user interface.
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Page 5

EntraPass Video Vault EntraPass Video Vault offers an easy way for preserving important video data for future reference. Since video recordings require a great amount of disk space, using an archive management tool such as EntraPass Video Vault enables organizations to better manage and easily retrieve video contents. EntraPass Video Vault enables all video clips from an Intellex alarm or an EntraPass video alarm to be automatically stored as Audio Video Interlaced format (.AVI) files or Kantech Video Intellex (.KVI), Kantech Video Archive (.KVA) and American Dynamics Network Client video format (.IMG) which can be password protected. Each EntraPass Video Vault may be connected to as many American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex units as defined within the EntraPass software. Video may be saved to up to 24 pre-programmed hard drive locations. A .bmp image may be associated automatically with each video clip, and a thumbnail image may be created on the first frame of the video clip. Alarm Panel Integration Alarm panel integration can be accomplished with the use of the Multi-Site Gateway in one of two ways. The first way is to connect the Multi-Site Gateway directly to the DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS or Honeywell Galaxy Dimension alarm panels. Alternatively the KT400 can be connected to the Multi-Site Gateway which, in turn, is connected to the DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS or Honeywell Galaxy Dimension alarm panels. Either connection method allows the alarm panels to receive intrusion events, view the status of zones, and manage partitions and user codes. In addition the system can be armed/ disarmed (single or multiple partitions) via reader (KT-400 only) or manual operation. Telephone Entry Integration EntraPass Corporate Edition also integrates with the Kantech Telephone Entry System (KTES) to bring you an access control solution with telephone entry access capabilities. A simplified version of the EntraPass software is included which allows for fast configuration and firmware updates, live transaction monitoring, and system backup. For more information, refer to the Kantech Telephone Entry System data sheet.
Basic System Diagram

WebViews (IP cameras and DVR web pages)2 Web Browser Web Server
Printers (optional)
Server/Muti-Site Gateway
DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS and Honeywell Galaxy Dimension G48 Alarm Panels6
Workstations (up to 20)
American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems6 (optional)
KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, and Kantech Telephone Entry System
KT-400
DSC MAXSYS , PowerSeries Honeywell Galaxy Dimension G48 Alarm Panels6
1 to 16 Cameras or Domes
A variety of video products have been tested successfully using WebViews. For a complete list, contact Kantech sales (3) Direct: using RS-232 or RS-485 with USB-485 or VC-485 converter, KT-100 using RS-485 with converter (4) IP using Kantech IP Link or KT-400 Ethernet controller (5) Dial-up: KT-300 only, using RS-232 serial modem at remote site (KT-100 must be connected to KT-300 or KT-400) (6) See Integration Capabilities (in the Specifications section on the next page) for more information
Chapter 3.1 Page 6
02/12

Recommended Computer Requirements Processor (without video integration Dual Core Processor (with video integration) Quad Core RAM 2 GB Free Hard Disk Space for Software 20 GB (30 GB with video integration) Colour Depth 24-bit (16 million colours), required for video integration only Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 Graphic Adapter Card AGP or PCI Express 8X (without video integration) graphics card with 64 MB memory and DirectX 9.0 support Graphic Adapter Card NVS 295 or equivalent (with video integration) DVD/CD-ROM Drive 48x Network Interface Card 10/100Base-T (Gigabit or greater with video integration) Operating System Compatibility Windows XP Pro in 32-bit version, Server 2003/2008 Standard/Enterprise, Vista Pro and Windows 7 Pro (all in 32 and 64-bit versions). All operating systems should have their latest Service Packs and updates. System Capacities Cards Unlimited Card Families or Site Codes Unlimited Door Controllers 17,408 per Multi-Site Gateway Card Readers/Keypad KT-300 34,816 per Multi-Site Gateway KT-400 69,632 per Multi-Site Gateway Monitored Points (Inputs) KT-300 278,528 per Multi-Site Gateway KT-400 4,456,448 per Multi-Site Gateway Auxiliary Outputs for Reader LEDs and Door Alarms 69,632 (KT-300) Elevator Floors per Cab 64 Card User Access Levels 250 per site Access Level Combinations Unlimited Schedules of Four Time Zones Each 100/site Holidays 366 per system Operator Workstations 20 + 1 on the server Concurrent WebStation Logins 4 Multi-Site Gateways 41 System Operator Passwords Unlimited Operator Security Levels Unlimited, pre-defined (3) Concurrent System Languages Two Number of Printers One log printer, one report printer, and one badge printer per workstation Serial Port / USB Max. 32 per Multi-Site Gateway Remote Sites Max. 512 per Multi-Site Gateway Integration Capabilities Intrusion DSC Alarm Panels (PC1616, PC1832,PC1864, PC4020) Honeywell Galaxy Dimension G48 Video American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems. Intellex Ultra, DVMS and IP all require software v3.1 or higher, Intellex LT requires software v2.6 or higher.
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Page 7

Product Codes
Each EntraPass Corporate Edition software package includes: two additional Workstation licenses, one Server/Workstation license, one Multi-Site Gateway license and one WebStation license Software E-COR-XX-V5 EntraPass Corporate Edition v5.xx software and user manual E-COR-V5 EntraPass Corporate Edition v5.xx software only E-COR-UPG-XX-V5 EntraPass Corporate Edition upgrade from v3.xx to v5.xx software and user manual (requires Kantech Advantage Program token for future upgrades). Additional Multi-Site Gateway and Workstation Licenses EntraPass Corporate Edition, E-COR-WS1 license for 1 additional Workstation (v3.xx and higher) E-COR-WS6 EntraPass Corporate Edition, license for 6 additional Workstations (v3.xx and higher) E-COR-COM EntraPass Corporate Edition, license for 40 additional Multi-Site Gateways (v3.xx and higher) E-COR-RDN EntraPass Corporate Edition option, license for 1 Redundancy Server (v3.xx and Options E-COR-GXY KAP (Kantech Advantage Program) Kantech token for EntraPass E-COR-KTK-1 Corporate Edition (1) E-COR-KTK-2 Kantech token for EntraPass Corporate Edition (2) E-COR-KTK-3 Kantech token for EntraPass Corporate Edition (3) E-COR-KTK-5 Kantech token for EntraPass Corporate Edition (5) E-COR-KTK-10 Kantech token for EntraPass Corporate Edition (10) User Manuals E-COR-MAN-XX
EntraPass Corporate Edition User Manual
Note: XX in model number denotes the language of user manual: EN (English), FR (French)
E-COR-RDN
E-COR-SQL
E-COR-VVM
E-COR-WEB-1
E-COR-WEB-3
EntraPass Corporate Edition option,license for Galaxy Dimension G48 Integration EntraPass Corporate Edition option, license for 1 Redundancy Server (v3.xx and higher) EntraPass Corporate Edition option, license for 1 Card Gateway (Oracle/MS SQL HR interface) (v3.xx and higher) EntraPass Corporate Edition option, license for 1 EntraPass Video Vault (v3.xx and higher) EntraPass Corporate Edition option, license for 1 concurrent WebStation (v4.xx and higher) EntraPass Corporate Edition option, license for 3 concurrent WebStations (v4.xx and higher)
Chapter 3.1 Page 8
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software EntraPass Global Edition

Features
1
Intelligent Alarm Routing allows assignment of system alarms to any workstation on the network Increased security with advanced integration of access, video, automation, intrusion and telephone entry systems Embedded high performance Sybase SQL database engine Supports up to 128 workstations and controls hundreds of thousands of readers Global virtual alarm system, antipassback, guard tours and muster reporting Available WebStation capability that allows system to be controlled remotely SmartLink Task Builder automates system tasks
Network-Ready Enterprise Level Security Management Software

Enterprise Level Kantech EntraPass Global Edition is a powerful, networkready enterprise level security management software. It accommodates widely-dispersed applications with an unlimited number of users, controls thousands of card readers, and allows you to simultaneously access the system from up to 128 workstations connected to the network. Improved System Reliability The Kantech KT-NCC (Network Communication Controller) is a powerful way to expand an EntraPass Global Edition System. Instead of relying on a PC for communication between the controllers and server, the dependable KT-NCC is in control. There are fewer PCs to maintain, operating systems to upgrade, and security emergencies to manage. KT-NCC includes onboard TCP/IP which eliminates the costs associated with buying and maintaining a third party communication device to link to the network. The KT-NCC manages communication between the EntraPass software and the door controllers. It also administers global features such as anti-passback, alarm systems, guard tours, and secondary access levels. All events from the controllers are stored in the KT-NCC for additional security in the event of a communication failure between the controllers and the server. The KT-NCC supports any combination of up to 128 controllers (KT-100, KT-300 or KT-400). For more information on the KT-NCC, refer to the KT-NCC data sheet. Site Architecture A site/loop is composed of controllers attached to the same communication port or connection. The software is scalable and grows with the customers needs. EntraPass Global Edition can manage up to 32 local sites or 512 Secure IP connections per Multi-Site Gateway. Each KT-NCC supports 3 local loops (32 controllers each) and 4 remote loops (8 controllers each). The KT-NCC provides advanced cross controller communication giving customers higher flexibility and functionality. Sites/loops are comprised of any combination of KT-100, KT-300 and KT-400 door controllers. Redundancy Server An optional redundancy server with a mirror database monitors all data activity on your primary EntraPass server and creates a real-time copy of the system database. In the event of primary server failure, the mirror database automatically launches the redundancy server which supports all the features and functionality of the primary server. Once the primary server returns online, all archives are merged and/or the entire database is merged/copied from the redundancy server, without interrupting system operations. Global Security Features EntraPass Global Edition is ideal for widely-dispersed applications that require a higher level of security. For example, global anti-passback helps you prevent a cardholder from passing back his or her card to a second person to gain entry into a secured area, regardless of whether those areas are in close proximity or far apart. In addition, powerful alarm partitioning lets you divide an area protected by the EntraPass system into as many as 100 partitions per Multi-Site Gateway and individualize the alarm parameters for each. EntraPass Global Edition and KT-NCC also enable you to control clearances globally. For example, a worker with temporary access to one part of the building or campus will lose access once the authorized clearance duration has passed. EntraPass also provides greater security and protection using muster reports. Mustering is critical for emergency situations where it is crucial to evacuate a building as quickly as possible. You can print a list of personnel in a predefined group of areas to determine who is present and if the area is secure when an alarm or event is triggered. Mustering also includes a parking management function which notifies users when a parking area is exceeding its capacity and restricts access to the area.
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Page 9

Simplified System Management EntraPass Global Edition workspaces provide customized views of the system based on an operators access privileges. Each workspace is created and defined in terms of devices - gateways, sites, doors, relays, etc. - and is configured to identify what areas of the EntraPass system the operator can access and view, such as desktop display, card fields, etc. Workspaces enable you to create different views of the EntraPass system that can be saved and applied to any user. You can assign up to five cards to any single employee to avoid having to create five different entries in EntraPass. Access levels can also be applied at this time to ensure cardholders have access only to authorized areas. This function is also available when using EntraPass WebStation. Manage Your System Remotely Easily manage your system over the Internet using the EntraPass WebStation. The web interface provides remote access to create, modify, and delete cardholders without installing and maintaining additional workstations. You can assign primary and secondary access levels to cardholders, manage your access levels and schedules, manually operate doors, relays, and inputs, view last card transactions, receive reports securely by email, and integrate and display live video from IP cameras, DVRs, etc. using WebViews. You can translate the WebStation into any foreign language using EntraPass vocabulary editor. For convenience, EntraPass WebStation defaults to English and French. SmartLink for Advanced System Integration and Automation The SmartLink application enables operators to integrate EntraPass Global Edition with most intelligent devices such as video multiplexers, HVAC systems, LCD panels, video matrix switchers, etc. SmartLink uses an RS-232 or network connection to the external device. With the SmartLink Task Builder, EntraPass reaches new levels in task automation. A series of tasks, similar to macros, can be created and triggered on any event and component in the system. When an event occurs, the tasks are then executed by the system. You can manually activate these specific tasks directly from the interactive floor plans in EntraPass. Advanced system integration can be accomplished by using the bi-directional SmartLink library to communicate with software applications such as time and attendance systems, badging systems, human resource management systems, student registration systems, etc. This allows complete and real-time data exchanges between systems, eliminating redundant data entry. Kantech Advantage Program An optional Kantech Advantage Program (KAP) program provides 12 months of updates and end user online training. As EntraPass continues to deliver new features and enhancements, it is more important than ever that you have the education and tools necessary to effectively use this solution. These optional KAPs ensure that you receive new functionalities and end user online training with software updates. Purchase the number of tokens required for your EntraPass installation and then enter the token license in the EntraPass server software. To access the end user online training available through the Kantech Advantage Program, simply complete the registration form available on our web site, www.kantech.com. Video Integration Real-time monitoring capability is a response to the growing importance of video in access control systems. Integration with American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems provides real-time video monitoring as well as video playback. Video can be linked to access events (such as door forced open) and recorded from one to sixteen cameras from different American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex units simultaneously. Presets, sequences, dome control and 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, and 4x4 views are available through the EntraPass software. All cameras can be called up directly from a floor plan simply by double-clicking on the camera or dome icon. Operators can configure viewing parameters for digital video applications through an EntraPass user interface. EntraPass Video Vault EntraPass Video Vault offers an easy way for preserving important video data for future reference. Since video recordings require a great amount of disk space, using an archive management tool such as EntraPass Video Vault enables organizations to better manage and easily retrieve video contents. EntraPass Video Vault enables all video clips from an Intellex alarm or an EntraPass video alarm to be automatically stored as Audio Video Interlaced format (.AVI) files or Kantech Video Intellex (.KVI), Kantech Video Archive (.KVA) and American Dynamics Network Client video format (.IMG) which can be password protected. Each EntraPass Video Vault may be connected to as many American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex units as defined within the EntraPass software. Video may be saved to up to 24 pre-programmed hard drive locations. A .bmp image may be associated automatically with each video clip, and a thumbnail image may be created on the first frame of the video clip. Alarm Panel Integration Alarm panel integration can be accomplished with the use of the Multi-Site Gateway in one of two ways. The first way is to connect the Multi-Site Gateway directly to the DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS or Honeywell Galaxy Dimension alarm panels. Alternatively the KT-400 can be connected to the Multi-Site Gateway which in turn is connected to the DSC PowerSeries, MAXSYS Honeywell Galaxy Dimension alarm panels. Either connection method allows the alarm panels to receive intrusion events, view the status of zones, and manage partitions and user codes. In addition the system can be armed/disarmed (single or multiple partitions) via reader (KT-400 only) or manual operation. Telephone Entry Integration EntraPass Global Edition also integrates with the Kantech Telephone Entry System to bring you an access control solution with telephone entry access capabilities. A simplified version of the EntraPass software is included with each Kantech Telephone Entry System which allows for fast configuration and firmware updates, live transaction monitoring, and system backup. For more information, refer to the Kantech Telephone Entry System data sheet.
Chapter 3.1 Page 10
02/12

Basic System Diagram
Printers (optional)
Web-Browser
American Dynamics HDVR, TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems2 (optional)
Webserver
1 to 16 Cameras or Domes
Workstations (up to 128)
DSC PowerSeries or MAXSYS Honeywell Galaxy Dimension Alarm Panels 2
WebViews (IP Cameras and DVR web pages)3
Multi-Site Gateway6 KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, and Kantech Telephone Entry System
KT-400
Global Gateway or KT-NCC Network DSC PowerSeries Communication Alarm or Honeywell Galaxy Controller Dimension Panels6
KT-100, KT-200, KT-300 and KT-400
(2) See Integration Capabilities (in the Specifications section above) for more information (3) Many different video products have been tested successfully using WebViews - for an updated list please contact you sales representative (4) Direct: using RS-232 or RS-485 with USB-485 or VC-485 converter, KT-100 using RS-485 with converter (5) IP under Global Gateways using Lantronix Universal Device (6) Dial-up: KT-300 only, using RS-232 serial modem at remote site (KT-100 needs to be connected to a KT-300 or KT-400) (7) IP using Kantech IP Link or KT-400 Ethernet controller
02/12
Chapter 3.1 Page 11

Recommended Computer Requirements Processor (without video integration Dual Core Processor (with video integration) Quad Core RAM 2 GB Free Hard Disk Space for Software 20 GB (30 GB with video integration) Colour Depth 24-bit (16 million colours), required for video integration Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 Graphic Adapter Card AGP or PCI Express 8X (without video integration) graphics card with 64 MB memory and DirectX 9.0 Graphic Adapter Card NVS 295 or equivalent (with video integration) DVD/CD-ROM Drive 48x Network Interface Card 10/100Base-T (Gigabit or greater with video integration) Operating System Compatibility Windows XP Pro in 32-bit version, Server 2003/2008 Standard/Enterprise, Vista Pro and Windows 7 Pro (all in 32 and 64-bit versions). All operating systems should have their latest Service Packs and updates. System Capacities Cards per Gateway (Online) Unlimited Card Families or Site Codes Unlimited Global Gateways 128 Multi-Site Gateways 40 Elevator Floors per Cab 64 (KT-300 and KT-400) Card User Access Levels 250 per site/gateway Access Level Combination Unlimited Operator Workstations 128 workstations Concurrent Webstation Logins 21 System Operator Passwords Unlimited Operator Security Levels Unlimited, pre-defined (3) Concurrent System Languages 2 Per Global Gateway Loops per Global Gateway 32 KT-300 2,048 KT-400 4,096 Monitored Points (Inputs) KT-300 Up to 16,384 KT-400 Up to 262,144 Auxiliary Outputs for Reader LEDs and Door Alarms KT-300 Up to 4,096 KT-400 Up to 8,192 Schedules of Four Time Zones 100/gateway Holidays 366/gateway Access Level Per Card Holder 13 Per Multi-Site Gateway Loops per Multi-Site Gateway 544 Door Controllers 17,408 Card Readers/Keypads KT-300 34,816 KT-400 69,632 Monitored Points (Inputs) KT-300 278,528 KT-400 4,456,448 Auxiliary Outputs for Reader LEDs and Door Alarms KT-300 Up to 69,632 KT-400 Up to 278,528 Schedules of Four Time Zones 100/site Holidays 366/site Integration Capabilities Intrusion DSC Alarm Panels (PC1616, PC1832, PC1864, PC4020) Honeywell Galaxy Dimension G48 Video American Dynamics HDVR. TVR Series and Intellex Digital Video Management Systems. Intellex Ultra, DVMS and IP all require software v3.1 or higher, Intellex LT requires software v2.6 or higher
Door Controllers 1,024 Card Readers/Keypads Chapter 3.1 Page 12 Access Control Catalogue 01/2

Product Codes
Software Each EntraPass Global Edition software package includes: four additional Workstation licenses, one Server/Workstation license, one Global Gateway (Windows NCC) license and one WebStation license E-GLO-XX-V5 EntraPass Global Edition v5.xx software and user manual E-GLO-V5 EntraPass Global Edition v5.xx software only E-GLO-UPG-XX-V5 EntraPass Global Edition upgrade from v3.xx to v5.xx software and user manual (requires Kantech Advantage Program token for future upgrades) Additional Global and Multi-Site Gateway and Workstation Licenses E-GLO-WS1 EntraPass Global Edition, license for 1 additional Workstation (v3.xx and higher) E-GLO-WS8 EntraPass Global Edition, license for 8 additional Workstations (v3.xx and higher) E-GLO-COM-WIN EntraPass Global Edition, license for 16 additional Global Gateways (Windows NCC) (v3.xx and higher) E-GLO-CORCOM EntraPass Global Edition, license for 40 additional Multi-Site Gateways (v3.xx and higher) Options E-GLO-GXY EntraPass Global Edition option, license for 1 Integrate to Honeywell Galaxy Dimension G48 panel EntraPass Global Edition option, license for 1 Redundancy Server (v3.xx and higher) EntraPass Global Edition option, license for 1 Card Gateway (Oracle/MS-SQL HR interface) (v3.xx and higher) EntraPass Global Edition option, license for 1 EntraPass Video Vault (v3.xx and higher) EntraPass Global Edition option, license for 1 concurrent WebStation (v4.xx and higher) EntraPass Global Edition option, license for 3 concurrent WebStations (v4.xx and higher)
E-GLO-RDN
E-GLO-SQL
E-GLO-VVM
E-GLO-WEB-1
E-GLO-WEB-3
KAP (Kantech Advantage Program) Kantech token for EntraPass E-GLO-KTK-1 Global Edition (1) E-GLO-KTK-2 Kantech token for EntraPass Global Edition (2) E-GLO-KTK-3 Kantech token for EntraPass Global Edition (3) E-GLO-KTK-5 Kantech token for EntraPass Global Edition (5) E-GLO-KTK-10 Kantech token for EntraPass Global Edition (10) E-GLO-KTK-20 Kantech token for EntraPass Global Edition (20) User Manuals EntraPass Global Edition User E-GLO-MAN-XX Manual Note: XX in model number denotes the language of user manual: EN (English), FR (French)
01/2
Chapter 3.1 Page 13
This page left intentionally blank
Chapter 3.1 Page 14
01/2
Chapter 3.2 - Kantech Communications and Devices Network Communication Controller

Features
Powerful panel architecture removes a layer of PCs to improve reliability and save money Onboard TCP/IP eliminates the need for an external network communication device Supports any combination of up to 128 controllers (KT-300, KT-200, or KT-100) Embedded redundancy ensures critical data is always protected Seven LED modes provide quick assessment of system status Flashable firmware enables fast, convenient updates Battery backup provides alternative for Universal Power Supply (UPS) Global functionality such as anti-passback, guard tours, and alarm systems management is easier than ever to implement
KT-NCC-EU Network Communication Controller

Kantech KT-NCC-EU makes your access control system easier to manage, easier to expand, and much more reliable. Now, instead of relying on a PC for communication between the controllers and server, the dependable KT-NCC is in control.There are fewer PCs to maintain, operating systems to upgrade, and security emergencies to manage. KT-NCC includes onboard TCP/IP a great money-saving , feature, that eliminates the costs associated with buying and maintaining a third party communication device to link to the network.
Physical Cabinet Dimensions (H x W x D) 375.9 x 304.8 x125.7 mm Cabinet Weight 4.0 kg Communication Ports 2 x RS-485 1 x RS-232 2 x Ethernet 100Base-T Electrical AC Power 240Vac Mains input required PS-1270 12V/7Ah battery required Battery Backup (minimum of four hours) Auxiliary Power Output 12 VDC, 250 mA, Operational Loops per Gateway Seven loops (2 x RS-485, 1 x RS-232, 4 x IP) Controllers per KT-NCC 128 Max Controllers per Loop RS-485 (COM1 & COM2) = 32 each RS-232 = 32 each IP#1 to IP#4 = 8 each Number of Cards per KT-NCC 56,000 Readers/Keypads per KT-NCC 256 Controller Groups 100 Access Level Groups 100 Operating System Windows CE embedded v5.0 Regulatory Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE C-Tick
Product Codes
KT-NCC-EU Embedded Network Communication Controller (NCC), includes: black metal cabinet (KT- NCC-CAB) with transformer (240VAC/50Hz, 16.5VAC/40VA) and fuse block (315mA/240VAC) and accessory kit (KT-NCC-EU-ACC) with lock (KT-LOCK) and tamper switch (KT-TAMPER); compatible with EntraPass Global Edition v3.18 and higher. Embedded NCC PCB only, includes: accessory kit (KT-NCC-ACC), ground and battery cables, hardware to affix the wire, and the PCB Accessory kit for KT-NCC, includes: four 120 ohms end-of-line resistors, RS-232 to VC-485 flat cable with RJ12 male connectors, and screwdriver 12Vdc 7Ah Battery
KT-NCC-PCB
KT-NCC-ACC
PS-1270
01/11
Chapter 3.2 Page 1
Chapter 3.2 - Kantech Communications and Devices Kantech IP Control Module

Features
Secure communication via 128-bit AES encryption Configured using either a static or dynamic IP address Communications over the network only as required minimal bandwidth usage Up to 512 IP Links can be supported per EntraPass Corporate Gateway Supports up to 32 controllers per IP Link Compatible with Entrapass Special Edition, Corporate Edition and Global Edition with Corporate Gateway CE certified
KT-IP Kantech IP Control Module

KT-IP (IP controller module) completes the Kantech line of products providing affordable Internet connectivity for the KT-100, 200 & 300 ranges of controllers. In the present architecture, distant sites require the installation of remote gateway computer to manage the local loop of controller. While this setup is perfect for large scale installation, smaller customers consider this setup too complex and expensive. Currently, integrators overcome inadequately this problem by installing Lantronix UDS-100. The problem with this device is the bandwidth generated by the combined solution (UDS-10 & EntraPass gateway); polling and flooding the customers network with data request from the gateway. The data traffic is also secured.
0.6kg 12VDC 26.7 x 9.5 x 3.12cm Max:175mA Typical :125mA Communication Ports RJ-45 Ethernet, 10/100Base-T & RS-232 Communication Speed Up to 115200 baud for serial communication Compatibility KT-100, KT-200 & KT-300 (KT-200 must always be on its own Gateway and never combined with KT-100 & KT-300 controllers) Maximum units Up to 512 IP Links per Corporate Gateway / Up to 64 IP Links per Special Edition Weight DC Power Dimensions Input Current
Product Codes
KT-IP IP Link Module with Wall mounted metal enclosure and accessories (ground wire, plastic stand off cable and connector) IP Link PCB only with accessories (ground wire, plastic stand off, cable and connector) Metal cabinet for KT-IP-PCB
KT-IP-PCB
KT-IP-CAB
Chapter 3.2 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 3.2 - Kantech Communications and Devices Other Communication Devices

EntraPass Software communicates with the KT range of controllers via RS485. This is achieved via hard wire, dial up or LAN/WAN connection.
Features
Converts RS232 to RS485 Extends communication up to 1,200m Uses unshielded, twisted communication cable Supports up to 32 Kantech controllers Requires 5VDC or 12VDC power
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter

The VC-485 Communication Interface is an RS-232/RS-485 protocol converter primarily used to connect a PC to a KT-100/KT-300 controller. The maximum bus length is 5 km, when line repeater is used and 1.2 km for EntraPassTM when using Ethernet Grade 3, unshielded, two twisted pair cable (Belden # 1227A recommended or CAT 5e UTP) Two VC- 485's may be connected back-to-back to be used as a line repeater in order to extend the RS-485 communication bus.
Product Code
VC-485 RS-232 / RS-485 protocol converter
Features
Converts USB to RS485 Extends communication up to 1,200m Uses unshielded, twisted communication cable Supports up to 32 Kantech controllers Powered by USB port
USB to RS-485 Converter

The USB-485 Communication Interface is a protocol converter used to connect a PC's USB port to the RS-485 input on your Kantech controller KT-100/KT-300. the Maximum bus length is 1.2km when using an ethernet Grade 3, unshielded, two twisted pair cable (Belden # 1227A recommended or CAT 5e UTP)
Product Code
USB-485 USB / RS-485 protocol converter
Features
Makes Controllers Networkable Convert to TCP/IP to RS-232, RS-495 & RS-422 DB25 pin female (DCE) connector Embedded web page for configuration Supports up to 8 Kantech controllers (via VC-485)
LAN/WAN Connection
The availability of the Lantronix UDS Devices server to increase data accessibility and remote management to thousands of devices that connect to the network. The TRM002 or TRM003 server allows almost any device with serial port RS-232
included Kantech's KT-300, and KT-100 (requires VC-485) controllers, to connect to Ethernet networks quickly and cost-effectively. Up to 8 KT-Series controllers can be connected to any one UDS-10/VC-485 line.
Product Code
UDS-1100 UDS-1100 Lantronix TCP/IP to Serial communication convertor. Software selectable RS-232, S-422 or RS485.
Ancillary Cables
CBLK-10 CBLK-11 Replacement PC Cable/Connector sets RS-232 from PC to Master KT-300 Replacement Modem Cable/Connector set RS-232 from Remote Modem to KT300, 5m. CBLK-12 CAB-100EXT Replacement Modem Cable/Connector set RS-232 from PC to Host Modem, 3m. Extension RS-232 Flat cable with RJ12 male and female connector, 30m Chapter 3.2 Page 3
01/11
Chapter 3.2 - Kantech Communications and Devices Cables

Cable Schedule
Max Length BUS AND COMMUNICATIONS RS-485 bus from VC-485 or USB-485 to 100/KT-300 RS-232 from computer to KT-100/KT-300 modems READERS AND KEYPADS ioProxTM Readers POL-2, POL-2KP SH-2KP SH-Y/Y2/Y4/X5, WEI-R20/R30 , readers BC-301 readers KP-2500, ES-KTP/103SN AUXILIARY DEVICES KT-100 inputs (zones 1-4) KT-300 inputs (zones 1 to 8) T.Rex or PB2 cable to KT-100/KT-300 POWER AND GROUNDING AC transformers to Kantech products 1.2km 1.2km 30m Belden Ref. No. 1227A CAT5 UTP N/A 610.001.043 N/A JDE Ref No. Description
Ethernet category 3 cable 2KT twisted pairs, No. 22AWG 4pair UTP (unsheilded Twisted Pair) 6 conductors, No. 22AWG, stranded.flat telephone cable 3 twisted pairs, solid No. 22 AWG, 4pair UTP (unsheilded Twisted Pair) 4 pairs, stranded No. 18 AWG shielded (foil), drawing wire 3 pairs stranded, No 18 AWG shielded (foil), drain wire 3 pairs, stranded, No. 18AWG shielded (foil), drain wire 12 conductors, stranded No 18AWG, unsheilded 4 conductors, solid No. 22 AWG unsheilded Intruder alarm 4,6 or 8 cable 7/0.2mm 4 conductors, solid No. 22 AWG unsheilded Intruder alarm 4,6 or 8 cable 7/0.2mm 4 conductors, solid No. 22 AWG unshielded 2 conductors solid, No. 18AWG unshielded intruder alarm 4,5 or 8 core cable 7/0.2mm 2 conductors solid No. 18AWG, unsheilded 7/0.2mm Intruder Alarm 4, 6 or 8 Core Cable 7/0.2mm 1 conductor, solid No. 18AWG
300m 50m 150m 150m 150m 150m
8742 CAT5 UTP 9554 9553 9553 8466
610.001.043 NSL NSL NSL NSL
600m 600m 600m
9794 7024Y/7026Y/7028Y 9794 7024Y/7026Y/7028Y 9794
2045/2046/2047 BEQ9794 2045/2046/2047
8m
9571 7024Y/7026Y/7028Y 9571 7024Y/7026Y/7028Y 7024Y/7026Y/7028Y N/A
2045/2046/2047
Door lock power from KT-100/KT-300 Door lock Power KT-100/KT-300 grounding
150m
2045/2046/2047 2045/2046/2047 N/A
8m
The cables above are the preferred cables specified by Kantech. Alternative cables should only be used with the approval of Product Management or the ACVS EMEA Application Team.
Chapter 3.2 Page 4
01/11
Chapter 3.3 Kantech Controllers KT-100

Features
Easy firmware updates Trouble supervision Fast and easy installation Interfaces with an external alarm system DC Powered Controller
KT-100
Compact and Versatile Single Door Controller The KT-100 Mini Door Controller is compact and versatile with a space-saving design that incorporates all the components and equipment found in much larger controllers. Choose it for installations near a door, within a ceiling, involving turnstiles and parking gates. The KT-100 contains all the intelligence and necessary inputs/outputs to manage two readers on one door. Or link the KT-100 with other controllers (via RS-485 connection) to control thousands of readers. Easy Firmware Updates KT-100 features flash memory for easy firmware updates. The controllers firmware can be updated from any EntraPass workstation in just a few minutes. Flash memory saves time by allowing system updates from a PC without having to update each controller individually. Trouble Supervision The KT-100 constantly supervises the power supply, short-circuit and surge conditions and reports status to the EntraPass software. The power output is protected against short-circuits and surges by a self-resetting PTC.The equipment is also monitored for failure or tampering. Fast and Easy Installation Mounts on the secure side of a door, reducing the length of cable required for installations. Has no DIP switches or jumpers to set. Includes connections for 2 card readers (entry/exit), lock device, door contact and request to exit. Mounting is easy: it can be placed on a single gang box (flush mount) or on a surface back box specially designed for it. External Alarm Interface The KT-100 can interface with an external intrusion alarm system. An authorized individual can arm or disarm the alarm system simply by presenting his/her card to a reader. Network Connectivity The KT-IP (IP controller module) provides affordable WAN/LAN network connectivity for the KT-100 mini door controller. In this setup, the KT-100 is first connected to a VC-485 (RS-232/RS-485 interface). Then the VC-485 is connected to the KT-IP If there is a loss of communication . with one of the controllers, the VC-485 will preserve communication with the other controllers. The KT-IP relays information between the KT-100 and the EntraPass Multi-Site Gateway. Operational Compatible Reader Types Wiegand, proximity, bar code, magnetic stripe, integrated keypad and others Monitored Points (Inputs) 4 monitored points, NO/NC, with or without single end-of-line resistors Maximum Wiring Distance 600m (AWG #22) Communication Ports RS-485 Communication Speed From 1,200 to 115,200 baud (automatic detection) Firmware Flash Memory 64K RAM Memory 128K, protected by a lithium battery Network Autonomy Distributed data and processing Regulatory Certifications/Listing FCC Part 15, Class B; CE approved (EN 55022, EN 501304)
Physical Dimensions (HWD) 11.4cm H x 7cm W x 3cm D Environmental Operating Temperatures From 2C to 40C Maximum 95% humidity, non-condensing Electrical Input Power 9.5 to 14 VDC/50mA + accessories (maximum 750mA) Battery Backup 1 lithium battery, up to 10 year retention Door Strike Power 12VDC, 250mA each, supervised Auxiliary Outputs (LED, BUZ) 2 outputs, open NPN collector for door access & status 25mA maximum, 12VDC each Control Relay Outputs 2 relay outputs, 12VDC, 25mA (R1, R2, R3, R4) maximum/each. Open collector to ground (use form C relays such as Kantech/KT-RM1 if needed). 2 control relay outputs, 30 VAC/VDC, 50 mA (max) each. Two opto-isolated contacts per relay. Reader Power Outputs 5 VDC @150mA total, protected 02/12
Product Codes
KT-100 MUSB-1WHT Mini Door Controller (requires 12 VDC power supply) KT-100 white color surface mounting box Chapter 3.3 Page 1

Features
Controls two readers and easily links to a network Update firmware directly from system workstation Interfaces with an external alarm system Choice of 128K or 512K memory capacities LEDs provide important controller status and diagnostic information
KT-300EU
Scalable Two-Reader Door Controller The KT-300 is a two-reader networkable door controller. One controller supports up to two readers, installed on two separate doors or on a single door controlling both entry and exit. Each controller is linked to the others in the system using an RS-485 communication bus providing control for up to a million doors depending on the EntraPass Edition. Easy Firmware Updates The KT-300 features flash memory for easy firmware updates. The controllers firmware can be updated from any EntraPass workstation in just a few minutes. Flash memory saves time by allowing system updates from a PC without having to update each controller individually. Speed Selection and Trouble/Reporting KT-300 detects the systems communication speed (set by EntraPass) and assigns the controllers address, eliminating the need to set up DIP switches or jumpers. KT-300 also provides trouble reporting, constantly supervising locking devices for short and open circuits to detect lock failures. It also monitors battery condition to alert the system of low battery/no battery status. All power outputs are individually protected against short circuits and surges by a self-resetting PTC. Expandable The KT-300 can be expanded via Combus expansion modules allowing for relay, input and output modules, and an LCD time and date display. Status Indicators LEDs provide important controller status and diagnostic information. The KT-300 has multiple LED indicators for: communication status, troubleshooting, network activity, power status and outputs activity. External Alarm Interface The KT-300 can interface with an external intrusion alarm system. An authorized individual can arm or disarm the alarm system simply by presenting their card to a reader. Network Connectivity The KT-IP (IP controller module) provides affordable and secure LAN/WAN network connectivity for the KT-300 door controller. In this setup, the KT-300 is first connected to a VC-485 (RS-232/RS-485 interface). Then the VC-485 is connected to the KT-IP (and both devices are powered by the KT-300). The KT-IP relays information between the KT-300 and the EntraPass Multi-Site Gateway.
Physical Dimensions 29.9 x 28.8 x 7.7 cm Knock Out Dimensions 1.9 cm Weight (with metal cabinet) 2.4 kg Environmental Operating Temperatures 2 to 40C Electrical Input Power 16VAC, 100VA, Class 2 transformer Battery Backup One battery 12V/7Ah, supervised, provides operation for up to 12 hours Auxiliary Outputs (LED, BUZ) Four outputs, 25 mA max. each, open collector Control Relay Outputs (R1, R2) Two control relay outputs, 12 VDC, 25 mA totals each, open collector (optional relay KT-RM1 available) Auxiliary Power Output 11.1 VDC to 13.8 VDC @175 mA maximum, protected and supervised Reader Power Outputs 12 VDC and 5 VDC @125 mA total, protected and supervised Chapter 3.3 Page 2 Door Strike Power 12VDC, 500mA each, supervised Operational Compatible Reader Types Wiegand, proximity, bar code, magnetic, integrated keypad, and others Monitored Points (Inputs)Eight monitored points, NO/NC, with or without end-of-line resistors (expandable to 16) Max. Wiring Distance. 600 m (AWG #22) Communication Ports RS-232, RS-485, and Combus Communication Speed Up to 115,200 baud (automatic detection) Firmware Flash Memory 128K RAM 128K or available 512K, protected by a lithium battery Network Autonomy Distributed data and processing Regulatory Certifications
UL 294, CE, FCC
02/12
Chapter 3.3 Kantech Controllers

Product Codes
KT-300EU-8K 2 door Door Controller (2readers) with 128kB memory, 8000 cards, 5000 events, including metal cabinet
KT-300EU-56K
2 Doors Controllers (2 readers) with 512kB memory, 56,000 cards, 18,000 events, including metal cabinet
808.012.510
External isolation relay SPDT for KT-300 output RL 1/RL2. Put it when the locking device current is > 500mA
KT-300PCB/128K
Door Controller with 128kB memory (PCB only) and accessory kit KT-300ACC
KT-300PCB/512K
Door Controller with 512kB memory (PCB only) and accessory kit KT-300ACC
TYCO-A-ACCESS
KT-300EU black metal cabinet including PSU + transformer
KT-300ACC
KT-300 Accessory kit including 1.0K OHM (2), 5.6K ohms (10), 120 ohms (2), PCB standoff, lock hole cover, ground wire and screwdriver.
PS-1270
12 Volt DC, 7 Ah battery
02/12
Chapter 3.3 Page 3

KT-300 Expansion Module Boards
Product Codes
KT-PC4108 8-Zone Input Expansion Module for KT-300
KT-PC4204
4 -Relay and COMPUS additional Power Supply Module for KT-300
KT-PC4216
16-Output Expansion Module for KT-300
KT-4051CAB
Standard metal cabinet for KT-PC4108, KT-PC4204 and KT-PC4216 Expansion modules
Chapter 3.3 Page 4
02/12

Features
Supports four readers Secure 128-bit AES encryption solution 100,000 cards per controller and 20,000 stored events in stand-alone mode Expansion fl exibility - connect up to 256 inputs and 256 outputs Full integration with DSC PowerSeries and MAXSYS alarm panels LEDs provide important controller status and diagnostic information
KT-400-EU Powerful, Ethernet-Ready Four-Door Controller

Ethernet-Ready Encrypted 4-Door Controller The KT-400 is a 4-door Ethernet-ready controller providing a secure (128-bit AES encryption) solution for any enterprise looking for the highest available security. It easily integrates into existing EntraPass systems and with other Kantech controllers (KT-100, KT-200 and KT-300). The KT-400 can also provide the foundation - with the EntraPass system for a brand new highly scalable security installation. An onboard Ethernet port ensures quick network connectivity and eliminates the need for an external Ethernet device. Built-In Expansion The KT-400 allows connection to expansion modules in order to add inputs or to add outputs such as relays and drain outputs. Combining input and output expansion modules provides the flexibility to connect up to 256 inputs and 256 outputs. Status Indicators LEDs provide important controller status and diagnostic information. The KT-400 has multiple LED status indicators for: troubleshooting, network activity, power status and outputs activity. Easy Network Connectivity The auto-sensing 10/100Base-T onboard Ethernet port automatically selects compatible Ethernet speeds to provide faster network connectivity. It eliminates the need to purchase an external Ethernet device, saving time and money. The KT-400 uses secure 128-bit AES encryption to communicate with the Gateway. Removable Terminal Blocks In order to expedite installation and facilitate serviceability, KT-400 features removable terminal blocks that are simple to connect and are color-coded for quick identification. Built-in Web Configuration The web configuration page is accessible through any browser. It can be used to verify and configure the IP settings of the KT-400. For enhanced security, once the KT400 is configured, the web configuration page can no longer be accessed. The KT-400 can be reset to factory default in the case of a configuration error and the web configuration page will once again be accessible.
Product Codes
KT-400-EU
KT-400 four-door controller, IP-ready, accessory kit (KT-400-ACC), metal cabinet (KT-400-CAB) with lock (KT-LOCK) KT-400-PCB KT-400 four-door controller (PCB only), and IP-ready accessory kit (KT-400-ACC) Expansion Modules KT-MOD-INP16 16-zone input expansion module with SPI cable (KT-MOD-SPI-16) KT-MOD-REL8 Eight-relay expansion module with SPI cable (KT-MOD-SPI-16) KT-MOD-OUT16 16-zone output expansion module with SPI cable (KT-MOD-SPI-16) KT-MOD-CAB Expansion Module cabinet, black, with 92 cm SPI cable (KT-MOD-SPI36) and lock (KT-LOCK) KT-MOD-SPI-16 SPI cable 41 cm KT-MOD-SPI-36 SPI cable 92 cm Integration Modules KT-IT100 Kantech/DSC PowerSeries integration module. Includes: DSC-IT100 integration module and CBLK-IT100 cable kit 02/12
KT-4401VK
CBLK-IT100
CBLK-4401VK
Kantech/DSC MAXSYS integration module, RS232 cable/connector, 1.8 m Cable kit, RS-232 cable/connector set,3 m , for integration between DSCIT110 and either KT-400 4-door controller or EntraPass software Cable kit, RS-232 cable/connector, 1.8 m , and EPROM set. Compatible with PC-4401 DSC MAXSYS integration module
Accessories KT-400-ACC
Accessory Kit includes: Four 1.0 K ohm, 32/5.6 K ohm resistors, ground wire, and screwdriver KT-400-CABEU Black metal cabinet with lock (KT-LOCK) KT-400-CON Removable terminal block spare kit KT-ACPW-LED UL AC power LED indicator KT-3LED-PLATE UL-listed alarm, three-color LED indicator mounted on single gang plate KT-TAMPER Tamper switch for KT-NCC-CAB, KT-300CAB, and KT-4051CAB metal cabinets KT-LOCK Lock (and two keys) for KT-NCC-CAB Chapter 3.3 Page 5

Physical Cabinet Dimensions (H x W x D) PCB Dimensions Cabinet Weight Auxiliary Port 37.6 x 30.5 x 12.6 cm 22.9 x 14.0 x 5.2 cm 4.0kg Auxiliary 12 VDC, 500mA maximum shared SPI expansion port Communication Speed Up to 115,200 baud (automatic detection over RS-232 and RS485); 10/100Base-T over Ethernet Flash Memory 16MB for application storage RAM 64MB for application loading and running, protected by a Lithium-Ion battery for a minimum of 75 hours Network Autonomy Distributed data and processing External Lock Power 12 or 24VDC (up to 28VDC) supply up to 750mA per lock for a total of 3 amp Regulatory EN61000-6-1, EN61000-6-2, EN55022, EN60950 FCC Class A UL-294, UL-1076 RoHS WEEE CE
Environmental Operating Temperature 0 to 49C; indoor use only Humidity Level Maximum 85% relative humidity noncondensing Electrical Power Input KT-400 Battery Backup
16.5 VAC, 75 VA, Class 2 transformer 12 VDC/ 7 or 12Ah battery supervised;up to 12 hours of operation Reader Power Output Maximum 500 mA @ 12 VDC, typical 125 mA per reader or 400 mA @ 5VDC, typical 100 mA per reader, protected and supervised. The combined reader current cannot exceed 500mA @ 12VDC or 400mA @ 5VDC.
Operational Reader Types
Wiegand, proximity, ABA clock and data, bar code, magnetic, integrated keypad, smart card Monitored Points (Inputs) 16 monitored points, single EOL, double EOL Points Maximum Wiring AWG #22 600m Door Strike Power 12 VDC, 250 mA maximum each, supervised Reader Outputs 16 outputs, 25mA maximum each, open collector outputs Auxiliary Outputs LEDs (door 1, door 2, door 3, door 4, LED, OUT1 and OUT2) and buzzers (Buz,door1, door 2, door 3, door 4) 2 5mA each, open collector outputs Controlled Output Relay Four onboard Form C controlled outputs relay, 30 VDC, 3 amp max each Communication Ports RS-232 with RJ-12, RS-485, Ethernet 10/100Base-T with RJ-45 Expansion Port SPI 6-pin connector, bi-directional data exchange supported. Supplies 12VDC, 500mA maximum shared with 12VDC auxiliary port
Chapter 3.3 Page 6
02/12
KT100 Readers Port Power Input Battery Backup Dimensions
Weight Operating Temperatures/ Humidity range Inputs supervision Input Wiring Relays
KT100 2 9.5 to 14 VDC/50 mA (max 750mA.) Supplied by the power supply used 11.4cmx 7.0cm x 3cm (requires MUSB-1WHT backbox) 110g From 2C to 40C 0-95% (non-condensing) 4 NO/NC w or w/o EOL supervision 600 meters -(AWG #22) Belden #9794 2 output, 12VDC, 25mA max/each.Open collector to ground;2 control relays output 30 VAC/DC, 50mA (max) eachTwo optosolated contacts per relay 2 x 12VDC dry contact rated 250mA (No Lock Power for KT-100) barrier/twisted) 2 output, open NPN collectors for door access and status 25 mA, 12 VDC each 5 VDC @ 150mA protected
KT300-EU 2 16 VAC 100VA, transformer 1 battery 12V, 7 Ah 390 x 340 x 90mm
KT400-EU 4 16 VAC 100VA, transformer 1 battery 12V, 7 Ah 376 x 305 x 126mm
5.2kg with metal cabinet From 2C to 40C 0-95% (non-condensing) 9 NO/NC w or w/o EOL supervision 600 meters -(AWG #22) Belden # 9794 2 relays output, 12 VDC, 25mA max/each. Open collector to ground
5.2kg with metal cabinet From 2C to 40C 0-95% (non-condensing) 16 NO/NC w or w/o EOL supervision 600 meters -(AWG #22) Belden # 9794 2 relays output, 30 VDC, 34mA max/each. Open collector to ground
Lock Output
Auxiliary Outputs (LED,BUZZ)
2 x 12 VDC 500mA max/strike, supervised (Use additional relays for barrier/twisted) 4 outputs, open collector 25mA, max each
4 x 12 VDC 625mA max/strike, supervised (Use additional relays for barrier/twisted) 8 outputs, open collector 25mA, max each
Reader Power Output Communications Communication Speeds Firmware RAM Memory Tamper Switch Expansion Module
RS-485 From 1200 to 115.200 baud (automatic detection) Downloadable flash 128K Optionally connected to an input N/A
12VDC and 5VDC @ 175mA total, protected and supervised RS-232, RS 485 and combus Up to 115,200 baud (automatic detection) Downloadable Flash 128K (512K unit available) Optionally connected to an input COMBUS EXPANSION 4-relay and COMBUS additionalpower supply module, 16-input module, 8-input module and a LCD time/date display module With serial number CE, FCC, UL294 (5000 with the 128K version and 18000 with the 512K
12VDC and 5VDC @ 400mA protected and supervised RS-232, RS 485 and combus Up to 115,200 baud (automatic detection) Downloadable Flash 128K (64mb unit available) Optionally connected to an input Expansion port 1 x SP1 6 pin Connector bidirectional data exchange support
Addressable Certification Event Buffer
With serial number FCC, CE 5000 event in stand-alone mode
With serial number CE, FCC, UL294 (5000 with the 128K version and 18000 with the 512K version) version)
02/12
Chapter 3.3 Page 7
This page is left intentionally blank.
Chapter 3.3 Page 8
02/12
Chapter 4.1 CCure 800 CCure 800/8000 Security Management Solutions

Features
Supports iSTAR Edge two-reader IP door controller* Microsoft Windows login authentication provides enhanced security and password management* Quickly access and leverage LDAP compliant data sources such as Microsoft Active Directory within seconds Monitor multiple locations from a single guard station Powerful database partitioning gives maximum security to buildings with multiple tenants Easily integrate with multiple video systems and other business-critical applications Import and export personnel records for consistency in data across business and security applications using the enhanced API Quickly import personnel information, including either roles or clearances, from ODBC-based data sources for synchronization of databases *New features for version 10 which is English only.
CCURE 800/8000 Integrated Security Management System

Ideal for Government and enterprise Customers Whether its specifically complying with FIPS regulations or ensuring that safety precautions are augmented when critical security events occur, CCURE 800/8000 is the system of choice for meeting todays most stringent security and administrative needs. In addition, CCURE 800/8000 supports the iSTAR eX Ethernet-ready controller (four- or eight-door) to provide a solution for any government or enterprise application looking for the highest security available. CCURE 800/8000 also provides tighter security with the addition of a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) general connection. Built into the architecture of CCURE 800/8000, this feature enables a user to connect to many external data sources including industry leading Microsoft Active Directory. By importing vital personnel information from an LDAP directory into CCURE 800/8000 within seconds, the customer is assured that the information in both systems is precisely matched and clearances are in place. Complete Integration with Unlimited Applications CCURE 800/8000 is a scalable security management solution encompassing complete access control and advanced event monitoring. The system integrates with critical business applications including CCTV and video systems from American Dynamics (Intellex, VideoEdge NVR, EDVR), visitor management, ERP HR/time and , attendance, and third party devices such as fire alarms, intercoms, and burglar and other alarms. Easy to Network CCURE 800/8000 client workstations and iSTAR intelligent network controllers can be placed directly on an existing network and across a wide area network (WAN). iSTAR controllers support dual network connectivity and Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), easing connectivity to most existing networks. 04/11 Accountability and Auditing A comprehensive audit trail is critical for organizations that must comply with process regulations, such as pharmaceutical and healthcare facilites. CCURE 800/8000s field-level audit trail enhances the control you have of data and system integrity by tracking changes made to all relevant security objects, including configuration and clearance data. Unlimited Scalability CCURE 800/8000 is completely scalable and lets you easily add functionality and increase capacity as your security needs grow. Using Microsoft .MSI standard installer technology with CCURE 800/8000, you can easily install, upgrade, and repair remote workstations conveniently without visiting every site. Additional Benefits Significantly enhance security with intrusion zones and keypad commands Easily create cardholder unique identifiers (CHUIDs) with extended card number support Assign up to five cards per cardholder, including a PINonly credential Threat level support allows you to change the operation of the system based on current events Dynamic clearance filters ensure personnel clearance numbers match the clearance number of the protected area Intuitive .NET badging solution provides high performance, cost-effective identification management system
Chapter 4.1 Page 1
Chapter 4.1 CCure 800

Configuration Matrix
Model 1 32 128 128 No limit* 10K 10K 2 999 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Model 5 64 256 256 No limit* 40K 40K 3 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional Model 10 128 512 512 No limit* 40K 40K 4 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional Model 20 256 1024 1024 No limit* 250K 250K 8 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional Model 30 512 2500 2500 No limit* 250K 250K 16 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional Model 40 1000 5000 5000 No limit* 250K 250K 64 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional 8000 Enterprise Server 2500 10000 10000 No limit* 500K 500K 128 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional 8000Plus Enterprise Server * * * No limit* 500K 500K 128 999 Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional
# of Online Readers # of Online Inputs # of Online Outputs # of Addressable Controllers (Dial-Up or Network) # of Cardholders # of Assets # of Simultaneous Clients # of Client PCs Definable in Server CoCURE ID Badging Client Unlimited Paging Recipients iSTAR Intrusion Zones/ Keypad Commands Guard Tour Central Monitoring Bi-Directional Serial Interface with SimplexGrinnell 4100U Fire Panel Bi-Directional Serial Interface with Stentofon Intercom Bi-Directional Serial Interface with Radionics Receivers Bi-Directional Serial Interface with Inovonics Bi-Directional Serial Interface CoCURE NetVue Software with Enhanced Alarm Management Asset Management Software CoCURE Central Replication Option Enhanced Reporting Area Lockout Advanced Door Monitoring Carpool Anti-Passback LDAP Integration
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Yes Optional Optional Optional Optional
A sentinel is required to operate all levels of the CCURE 800/8000 system. *CCURE 800/8000 is designed for unlimited expansion. The often-stated 3,000 readers and 32,000 input/output handling are tested limits only and do not represent expansion restrictions. System performance will vary depending upon specific hardware configuration including number of communication lines/ports, download/upload frequency, etc.
Standard Features
The following features are standard on all models of CCURE 800/8000 N-Man Rule and Occupancy Restrictions Paging-Single Subscriber (included with the server) Muster/De-Muster Enhanced Password Protection Field Level Audit of Personnel Data Expiring Clearances Extended Card Number Support (FIPS 201) Cardholder Access Events Multiple Card Support Wild Card in Search Unlimited E-Mail Recipients Smart Card Enrollment
Chapter 4.1 Page 2
04/11

CCURE 800/8000 Software Versions Available
Language French,German Spanish Dutch English Czech Polish Latest Version 9.3.4 9.0.4 10.0 7.0.5 8.2.5
IMPORTANT NOTE: Software House will offer the latest software plus two revisions back for sale. It is important to note that technical support is only available for the latest release plus one revision back.One set of English manuals is provided with each application.
CCURE 800 Basic Software Product Codes Product Codes

CC800-1S-NV CC800-1ID CC800-5S CC800-10S CC800-20S CC800-30S CC800-40S CC8000ES-S CC8000ESPLUS-S CCURE 800 Model 1 System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and two CCURE Client licenses, no ID Badging included. CCURE 800 Model 1 System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and two CCURE client licenses, CCURE ID badging software license included CCURE 800 Model 5 System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and three CCURE client licenses CCURE 800 Model 10 System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and four CCURE client licenses CCURE 800 Model 20 System Software Only, Includes CCURE server software and eight CCURE client licenses CCURE 800 Model 30 System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and 16 CCURE client licenses CCURE 800 Model 40 System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and 64 CCURE client licenses CCURE 8000 Enterprise System Software Only Includes CCURE server software and 128 CCURE client licenses and Broadcast Messenger software CCURE 8000 Enterprise Plus System Software Only, Includes CCURE server software and 128 CCURE client licenses and Broadcast Messenger software, and enhanced
04/11
Chapter 4.1 Page 3

Processor Model Number 1 through 10 Model Number 20 through 40 Model Number 8000 and 8000 Plus Free Hard Disk Space Model Number 1 through 10 Model Number 20 through 8000 Plus Memory Model Number 1 through 10 Model Number 20 through 40 Model Number 8000 and 8000 Plus Network Adapter Card Model Numbers 1 through 8000 Plus Video Adapter Card Model 1 through 10 Model 20 through 8000 Plus Monitor/Video Adapter Board DVD Drive Operating System
1.5 GHz Intel Pentium IV or higher 1.8 GHz Intel Pentium IV or higher 2.4 GHz Intel Pentium IV or higher 4.0 GB 4.0 GB 1 GB RAM 1 GB RAM 2 GB RAM 10/100Base-T Integrated 64 MB available memory or equivalent Integrated 64 MB available memory or equivalent 17 SVGA (1024 x 768) 2X Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 1), Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2), Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3), Windows Vista (Service Pack 2) PS/2 bus type, USB Two serial, one parallel, USB (a USB port is required with CCURE 800/8000 v8.x) Tape or CDRW 56.7 Kbps Supplied by Software House Eight port (Models 20/30/40)
Intel Core 2 Duo, 3.0 GHz E5506 Xeon Processor, 2.13 GHz E5506 Xeon Processor, 2.13 GHz Two 160 GB Four 160 GB 4 GB, DDR2 800 MHz 4 GB, 1066 Dual Racked UDIMM 4 GB, 1066 Dual Racked UDIMM Gigabit NIC 256 ATI Radeon HD3470 graphics or equivalent Integrated MATROX G200 with 8 MB sheared video memory or equivalent 17 SVGA (1024 x 768) 2X Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 1 or later), Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 or later), ,Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 or later) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 or later) PS/2 bus type, USB At least one USB port (or parallel port) l for sentinel, dual serial ports (if needed) DVD+/-RW 56.7 Kbps Supplied by Software House Eight port (Models 20/30/40)
Mouse Ports
Backup Modem Sentinel Digiboard
Chapter 4.1 Page 4
04/11
04/11 apC apC/L, apC/L Flash 10.7ZB/10.7ZA 10.7ZB/10.7ZA 10.7ZA/10.7.Y 10.7ZA/10.7.Y 10.7W/10.7U 10.7U/10.7S 10.7W/10.7U 10.7S/10.7R 8.7W/8.7U 8.7S/8.7R 8. 7ZA/8.7Y 8.7W/8.7U 8.7U/8.7S 8.7R/8.7P 8.7W/8.7U 8.7U/8.7S 8.7R/8.7P 8. 7ZA/8.7Y 8.7U/8.7S 4.3.1/4.1.1 3.2.0/3.0.0 4.3.1/4.1.1 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 8. 7ZA/8.7Y 8.7U/8.7S 8.7R/8.7P 8.7U/8.7S 8.7R/8.7P 8.7U/8.7S 8.7U/8.7S 4.0.8/3.3.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 4.0.8/3.3.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 4.3.1/4.1.1 3.2.0/3.0.0 4.3.1/4.1.1 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 N/A N/A N/A 4.3.1/4.1.1 N/A 4.3.1/4.1.1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4.3.1/4.1.1 4.0.0/3.3.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 4.3.1/4.1.1 4.0.0/3.3.0 3.2.0/3.0.0 3.0.0/2.2.0 4.3.1/4.1.1 N/A N/A N/A 4.0.0/3.3.0 3.1.0/3.0.0 N/A N/A 10. 7ZA/10.7.Y 10.7W/10.7U 10.7U/10.7S 10.7R/10.7P 10.7W/10.7U 10.7U/10.7S 10.7R/10.7P 10. 7ZA/10.7.Y 10.7U/10.7S 10. 7ZA/10.7.Y 10.7U/10.7S 10.7R/10.7P 10.7U/10.7S 10.7R/10.7P 10.7U/10.7S 10.7U/10.7S 4.0.0/3.3.0 3.1.0/3.0.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3.0 N/A 3.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 8.7ZB/8.7ZA 8.7ZB/8.7ZA 8.7ZA/8.7Y 8.7ZA/8.7Y 8.7W/8.7U 8.7U/8.7S 5.02/4.4.5 4.4.1/4.3.1 4.3.1/4.1.1 4.1.1/4.0.0 4.0.0/3.3.0 3.3.0/3.2.0 5.02/4.4.5 4.4.1/4.3.1 4.3.1/4.1.1 4.1.1/4.0.0 N/A N/A 4.4.5/4.3.1 4.4.1/4.3.1 4.3.1/4.1.1 4.1.1/4.0.0 4.0.0/3.3.0 3.3.0/3.2.0 apC/8X, apC/8X Flash iSTAR Pro Version iSTAR eX Version CCURE Central Version 3.0 P02 3.0 P01 3.0 3.0 N/A 2.2 iSTAR Version CFTool 7.7ZB/7.7 ZA 7.7ZB/7.7ZA 7.7ZA/7.7Y 7.7ZA/7.7Y 7.7W/7.7U 7.7U/7.7S 7.7W/7.7U 7.7S/7.7R 7.7ZA/7.7Y 7.7W/7.7U 7.7U/7.7S 7.7R/7.7P 7.7W/7.7U 7.7U/7.7S 7.7R/7.7P 7.7ZA/7.7Y 7.7U/7.7S 7.7ZA/7.7Y 7.7U/7.7S 7.7R/7.7P 7.7U/7.7S 7.7R/7.7P 7.7U/7.7S 7.7U/7.7S iSTAR Edge Version 5.02 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 9.3.0 N/A N/A N/A 9.0.0 N/A N/A 9.3.0 N/A 9.3.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Firmware Compatibility Chart for CCURE 800/8000 International Versions

10.0.4283 9.4.4028 9.3.0 9.1.0 9.0.0 8.3.0
Language
Release Date MM/YY
CCURE 800/8000 Version 10.0 9.4.0 9.3.0 9.1.0 9.0.0 8.3.2
English English English English English English
12/09 09/08 02/08 08/06 10/05 07/05
9.0.13 8.1.13
RUS RUS
12/06 07/04
9.3.4 9.0.4 8.2.4 8.0.4
FGS FGSD FGSD FGS
01/09 04/06 09/05 04/02
9.0.8 8.2.8 8.0.8
JPN JPN JPN
02/08 11/05 11/03
9.3.14 8.2.14
PTB PTB
5/09 07/05
9.3.6 8.2.6 8.0.6
CHS CHS CHS
10/08 06/05 03/04
8.2.7 8.0.7
CHT CHT
01/05 01/04
8.2.5
POL
06/05
8.2.9
KOR
02/05
Language Legend ENG English PTB Portuguese (Brazilian) RUS Russian CHS Simplified Chinese FGSD French/German/Spanish/Dutch CHT Traditional Chinese FGS French/German/Spanish POL Polish JPN Japanese KOR Korean
Chapter 4.1 Page 5
Chapter 4.1 Page 6
04/11
Chapter 4.2 CCure 800 - Software Enhancements Software Enhancements

Introduction to System Redundancy
To provide redundancy for CCURE 800/8000 installations, Software House offers 3 different solutions. These can be combined in order to increase the level of Redundancy and Security. For new installations you need to order CCURE Software in redundant Software. This means you will receive 2 copies. To upgrade an existing CCURE800/8000 installation to redundancy systems you must order redundancy upgrades Software.
Features
Emergency recovery of CCURE 800 system Manual or automatic changeover LAN or WAN connectivity Second CCURE license included in package Real time data backup from primary server
The 3 Redundancy Solutions are: Cold Backup

Software House provide the possibility to setup a second server fully configured and available to takeover in case of failure. The take-over process and start-up have to be carried out manually.
Hot Standby
With Hot Standby a second server is fully configured and copies in real time all data from the primary server. One condition of this design is that the servers are in the same location and not more than 100 Meters from each other (greater with via Fibre optic). This solution is known as Disk Level Mirroring Automated Availability Manager (AAM) from third party EMC will manage the mirroring and the Automatic take-over when necessary.
Warm Failover
With Warm Failover a second server is fully configured and copies in real time over WAN all data of the primary server. The second server does not need to be an the same location. The EMC Software RepliStor will manage the Data replication at File level and manage the system take-over when necessary. It is imperative in any WAN high availability system, to have some level of human interaction to determine that a true failure has occurred and command/control the fail-over.
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 1
Chapter 4.2 CCure 800 - Software Enhancements

Cold Backup
CCURE 800 Disaster Recovery Systems To provide a cold backup for CCURE 800/8000 installations, Software House provides a duplicate software sentinel key required to run the CCURE 800/8000 management server software application. The intent is to provide CCURE 800/8000 users the option of a second server computer fully configured and available to take-over the primary servers operations in the event of a catastrophic failure with the primary CCURE 800/8000 security management software and/or hardware. The duplicate sentinels are not to be used in conjunction with each other. Specifically, both the primary and secondary systems must not be operated simultaneously. The only exception shall be to allow for data transfers for the purpose of updating the cold back-up computers database. When an order is placed for this item, both the dealer/Integrator and end user must sign a document (Addendum 2) outlining the restrictions for use prior to Software House accepting the order.
Please contact your Software House representative for further information.
Hot Standby by System Mirroring

Definition: Mirroring is the continuous process of copying important information from an active server to a standby server. This information is copied at the block and sector level, which is the lowest level. When a fail-over occurs using this method there is little or no data loss. This method is the ideal when the two systems are on a LAN. AAM provides the system monitoring on the high availability servers. The AAM software will then detect failures and provide the triggers to initiate fail-over to the back-up server or other actions to avoid system downtime. AAM must be purchased and utilised together on all servers to provide system Hot standby LAN redundancy.
Scenario 1 - Two closely coupled systems in a LAN using AAM Mirroring for Windows 2000
CCure 800 Server with AAM
Sector level Mirroring
CCure 800 Server with AAM Hot Failover Secondary (Standby)
Hot Failover Primary (Active)
Dedicated link for sector mirror. Maximum 100 meters of copper or 10km of dark fibre
Part Number Redundancy Management
Product Codes
CC800-AAM CC800-AAM-2 One License of AAM to achieve redundancy on Windows 2000 Servers Two Licenses of AAM to achieve redundancy on Windows 2000 Servers
Chapter 4.2 Page 2
04/11

Warm Failover
Definitions: Replication is the continuous process of copying important information from an active server to a standby server across a WAN. This method, sometimes called data vaulting, is done at the file system level and is the only method that can be used across a WAN. Failover is the transfer of control from an active CCURE 800/8000 system to a standby CCURE 800/8000 system. Software House has qualified EMCs Automated Availability Manager (AAM) to provide failover services over LAN and WAN topologies. AAM allows you to define resource domains, and to specify the rules and events that manage failover and recovery. The solution utilises the EMC Software RepliStor and Automated Availability Manager (AAM) products. RepliStor provides asynchronous data replication between the primary and the secondary server(s). RepliStor manages continuous data availability ensuring that data is always at least two places and minimises recovery time should the primary server fail. AAM provides the system monitoring on the high availability servers and will detect failures and provide triggers to initiate fail-over to the back-up server or other actions to avoid system down-time. AAM and RepliStor must be purchased and utilised together on all servers to provide system fail-over WAN redundancy. An important distinction between the WAN redundant AAM/RepliStor solution and the Local Area Network configured EMC AAM solution is the WAN solution requires a man in the loop or warm redundancy in the WAN environment if a secondary network is not used. This is necessitated by the facts of an enterprise WAN network. This situation is discussed below. A fully automated redundancy can be accomplished with EMC Software RepliStor/AAM by deploying a dedicated second network between the high availability systems servers.
WAN
Router CCure 800 Server with AAM and Replistor Warm Failover Primary Router CCure 800 Server with AAM and Replistor Warm Failover
Disaster
Product Codes
CC800-AAM One License of AAM to achieve redundancy on Windows 2000 Servers. CC800-AAM-2 Two Licenses of AAM to achieve redundancy on Windows CC800-LREDPK Two Licenses of EMC AAM and Two Licenses of RepliStor (for MS Windows) CC800-LREP EMC RepliStor for MS Windows single License
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 3

The Split Brain Problem:
An important consideration for setting up a WAN High availability solution of any kind in an enterprise WAN environment, is the simple fact that many points of failure exist and that in todays networking world there are many self correcting automated systems which may or may not deal with these failures. For example, in a situation in which two servers are high availability redundant over a WAN, and some component on the network, such as router or a switch fails for a time, the second server would detect the failure to communicate and take over control. However, if that failure was temporary (i.e. a network sub-system identified the problem) and the component then came back on line, the original primary Server which never lost connection to the applications would be maintaining control as well. In effect, two systems would think they were the Primary brain. Therefore, it is imperative in any WAN high availability system, such as EMC AAM/RepliStor, to have some level of human interaction to determine that a true failure has occurred and command the fail-over. AAM and RepliStor can simplify the process and make it a single click of a button. The situation of Split Brain can be overcome if a duplicate or second network is available between the servers so each can be assured of the true availability status of one another.
Other Configurations
Scenario 3W - This Scenario is a combination of scenario 1 and 2W. The primary node is mirrored to the secondary node using AAMs Mirroring for windows 2000. The Primary or Secondary node, whichever is active, is replicated to the Disaster node using Replistor.
File Level Replication CCure 800 Server with AAM and Replistor Sector level Mirroring Dedicated link for sector mirror. Maximum 100 meters of copper or 10km of dark fibre Primary (Active)
WAN
Router CCure 800 Server with CCure 800 Server with AAM AAM and Replistor and Replistor Hot Failover Warm Failover Disaster Router
Hot Failover
Professional Services
Software House is offering the EMC Software AAM/RepliStor solution only when purchased with Professional Services. All orders for this WAN solution will only be accepted with a Professional Services component covering on-site set-up and installation. The cost of installation will vary based on the network complexity, number of servers and physical proximity of each site to be set up. Quotation of the set-up and installation will be on a site-by-site basis to be coordinated through Software House Professional Service . An important step of the quotation process is the completion of a site survey form, which will be sent to the end user site (through the integrator) to provide all relevant information on the physical environment and the information technology network configuration for the proposed High Availability solution. Information such as the use of a DNS server and the network structure is critical in assessing the viability and cost of implementing the EMC Software High Availability solution. Once the site survey is completed, Software House and EMC Software personnel will undertake the on-site set-up and installation. In addition to installation and set-up of the WAN solution, Software House and EMC Software will provide a run book and backup on figuration setup at every installation site. This run book will highlight the configuration of the WAN solution when it is successfully operational at the customer site. The run book will be provided to the integrator/customer as well as be kept on file in the Software House Technical Support Department for reference during service calls.
Chapter 4.2 Page 4
04/11

Product Codes
CCURE 800 Model 20 Redundant System Software Only Includes server software, two sentinels, eight CCURE Client licenses. CC800-30RDS CCURE 800 Model 30 Redundant System Software Only Includes server software, two sentinels, 16 CCURE Client licenses each CC800-40RDS CCURE 800 Model 40 Redundant System Software Only Includes server software, two sentinels, 64 CCURE Client licenses each CC8000ES-RDS CCURE 8000 Enterprise Redundant System Software Only Includes server software, two sentinels,128 CCURE Client licenses each, and Broadcast Messenger Software CC8000ESPLUS-RDS CCURE 8000 Enterprise PLUS Redundant System Software Only Includes server software, two sentinels, 128 CCURE Client licenses each, and Broadcast Messenger Software and enhanced reader capacity CC800-20RDS
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 5

Hardware Requirements: Standard Redundant Tower
2 units DELL Power Edge 2800, tower chassis Intel Xeon, 2.8GHz, 1M cache Single processor 1GB DDR SDRAM PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Dell E1703FP Flat Panel Monitor PERC4-DI 128MB, 2 Internal Channel Controller, Embedded RAID Five - 36GB SCSI, 10K RPM, U320, Disk Drive [RAID 1 for OS, RAID 5 for CCURE] 3.5 inch, 1.44MB, Floppy Disk Drive 24X CD-RW / DVD ROM Tape Backup, 36/72GB, DAT72 MS Windows 2003 Server, 5 Client Redundant Power Supply Dual embedded Intel 10/100/1000 NIC Intel Pro 100S NIC Integrated Video
Standard Redundant Rack Mount Server

2 Units DELL Power Edge 2850, rack chassis Intel Xeon, 2.8GHz, 1M cache Single processor 1GB DDR SDRAM PS/2 Keyboard and Mouse Dell E1703FP Flat Panel Monitor PERC3-DI 128MB, 2 Internal Channel Controller, Embedded RAID Five - 36GB SCSI, 10K RPM, U320, Disk Drive [RAID 1 for OS, RAID 5 for CCURE] 3.5 inch, 1.44MB, Floppy Disk Drive 24X CD-RW / DVD ROM Dell Rapid Rails for Dell Rack MS Windows 2003 Server, 5 Client Redundant Power Supply, 500 Watt Dual Integrated NICs Integrated Video *Exact specifications may change depending on model availability from Dell.
Chapter 4.2 Page 6
04/11
Chapter 4.2 CCure 800 - Software Enhancements CCURE ID Badging Software

CCURE 800/8000 provides users with the basic ability to capture, import, and display images from within the standard system personnel window.
Features
Capture Portraits Import Portraits Display Portraits Double-Sided Printing Specify Offset Origin Cropping Device Setup Batch Mode Printing Integrated Zoom Sheet Layout Choose Image Format Smart Card Enrollment
CCURE 800 ID Badging Solutions

For sophisticated badging however, CCURE ID provides a fully integrated photo imaging application that runs on any CCURE client supporting Windows XP NT, or 2000. , CCURE IDs powerful photo imaging features a userfriendly badge layout editor, support for multiple graphic formats, network retrieval of images, controlled iris, and zoom capability. Also included are signature capture, unlimited badge layouts, and background display support. Integrated iris control and zoom capability Users can specify different iris settings for live video feeds as well as control the mechanical zoom function of the camera directly from the CCURE 800 application. Share resources across multiple workstations Photographs, signatures or logos can be captured locally, using a live video camera or scanner connected to the workstation, or remotely, using a portable still video camera. This allows significant savings in time, capital expenditures and staff overhead for a customer who may have a large mobile workforce or several facilities since only one badge production facility is necessary. Batch mode printing Prints badges in batches to save time and and work more efficiently. Design multiple badge layouts CCURE ID allows users to create multiple badge layouts. For example, permanent badges can have a different design and layout than temporary or visitor badges in order to make a quick distinction. Toolbar for quick access to badge design tool CCURE IDs Graphical User Interface (GUI) includes an easy-to-use toolbar that allows the user to quickly pick necessary tools when creating a badge. Ghosting images and backgrounds. All background images and portraits can be Ghosted or made semi-transparent to provide aesthetically pleasing badges. Additional Benefits Specify Alternate Resolutions 1D & 2D Barcode Support Capture & Display Signature Data expressions for text Image "ghosting" and "see through" Ghost Background Image Create borders for text and image objects Create "on-the-fly" text and data strings Full access to text & layout properties "Size to fit" and "maintain aspect ratio" Design Multi-Badge Sheet Layouts Rainbow Images Automatic Directory Tree For Images Any device with TWAIN or Video for MS Windows Interface Create / Edit Layout (WYSIWYG drawing environment) Print to (pre-printed) badge forms Specify Starting Position For Printing Sheet Use of Multiple Images in Badge & Sheet Specify location of badging images Integrated Iris Control (Brightness) Specify Number Of Badges Held In Print Queue Tool bar for quick access to badge design tools Software Controlled Camera (CC800-VA3)
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 7

Application Features Configuration Features Capture Portraits Import Portraits Display Portraits Display Signature Signature Capture Cropping Device Setup Integrated Iris Control (Brightness) Integrated Zoom Automatic Directory Tree For Images Choose Image Format Software Controlled Camera (CC800-VA2) Use of Multiple Images in Badge & Sheet Any device with TWAIN or Video for MS Windows Interface Support for FlashBus and Flash3D Badge Layout Features Create / Edit Layout (WYSIWYG drawing environment) Full access to text properties Full access to layout properties Rainbow Images Image ghosting and see through Ghost Background Image Create borders for text and image objects Create on-the-fly text and data strings Tool bar for quick access to badge design tools Size to fit and maintain aspect ratio Data expressions for text Specify location of badging images Send Data To Badge Preview Printing Features Badge Printing Double-Sided Printing Magnetic Encoding 1D Barcode Support Batch Mode Printing 2D Barcode Support Print to (pre-printed) badge forms Design Multi-Badge Sheet Layouts No Badging NO YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO CCURE YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES1 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
Chapter 4.2 Page 8
04/11

Application Features Specify Starting Position For Printing Sheet Specify Number Of Badges Held In Print Queue Sheet Layout Specify Alternate Resolutions Specify Offset Origin Languages Support Multiple Languages No Badging NO NO NO NO NO YES CCURE YES YES YES YES YES FUTURE
Minimum System Requirements Technical Specifications

CCURE ID Client Workstation Processor Memory Network Adapter Disk Drive Monitor Operating Systems Mouse Ports 400 MHz Intel Pentium 256 MB RAM 10base-T 2 GB 17 SVGA (1024 x 768) Windows 2000/NT/XP PS/2 bus type 2 serial, 1 parallel
Product Code
CC800-IDS CCURE ID Software License Includes client license for complete CCURE ID option which includes signature capture/display, two-sided badge printing, unlimited badge layouts, and batch mode printing.
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 9
Chapter 4.2 CCure 800 - Software Enhancements CCURE NetVue Software

CCURE NetVue is an option within CCURE 800/8000 that provides seamless integration with digital video management systems, such as American Dynamics Intellex, Nice Systems NiceVision Pro and Harmony, and Loronix CCTVware
Features
Interface with various digital video servers Interface with video server operations including: Video record and display Live video and display Multiple video screens that support up to four video inputs Dynamic camera positioning using NetVue icons Operator restrictions based on cameras and video operations Video Verification
CCURE NetVue - Quick Reference Chart Technical Specifications

Vendor hardware models supported Vendor Software Model Number Product Code CCURE 800 Versions Supported Loronix Nice CCTVware - Remote NiceVision Harmony and enterprise and NiceVision Pro v4.0 and v4.3 NiceVision Harmony ,version(s) supported & Pro v 7.1 and v 8.0 CC800-NETVUEI CC800-NETVUEL CC800-NETVUENH B B B DV16000 V7.0 and v8.0 and up NiceVision -v7.0 up;DV8000 V7.2 and up: Harmony & and up Pro - v8.0 and up
Verint Pelco LVM 4.x/Nextiva DS Xpress/DVX Pelco DX8x00
Intellex DV8000 and DV16000 v2.4 and 3.1
American Dynamics American Dynamics Nice Intellex VideoEdge VisionPro/ Harmony Software House Model Number CC800-NETVUEI CC800-NETVUEVE CC800NETVUENH NiceVision Harmony NiceVison Pro
CC800NETVUEL
CC800-NETVUET
CC800-NETVUEPL
Vendor Hardware Models Supported Intellex Ultra Intellex DVMS Intellex DV8000 Intellex DV16000 EDVR 1.53a Vendor Software Version(s) 4.2 Supported
Loronix 4.5 v1.3.0.162 Nextiva 5.0 SP2 v6.5.0.159
v1.2
VideoEdge NVR
2.0.4.042
Harmony 10.0 NVSat 10.
CCURE 800 Versions Compatibility
Intellex DV16000 v7.0 and higher Intellex DV8000 v7.2 and higher
v4.3
NiceVision v7.0 and up; Harmony & Pro - v8.0 and up
Loronix 4.0 SP2 DSXpress Nextiva 5.1 SP2 (Digital Sentry) 4.1 (Mastercontrol) 4.3 v8.0 and up v8.3 and up
v1.1x or higher
v1.2
Chapter 4.2 Page 10
04/11

Competitor Feature Comparison
Product American Dynamics Intellex P P P P P P P P P P1 P P P P American Dynamics VideoEdge P P P P P P P P Presets only Nice Vision P P P P P2 P P3 P P P P4 P P Verint LVM 4.x/Nextiva P P P P P3 P P P1 P Integral DS Xpress/DVX P P P P P2 P P3 P P P Pelco DX8X00 P P P P P P P P P P P
Live Video Text Overlay Pre-recorded Video Play Back Export to AVI Time Synchronization Record Start (On Demand) Frame-Rate Adjustment Record Stop (On Demand) PTZ (Domes only) Bi-Directional Actions (Domes Only) Video Alarms Video Tour Video View Up to 16 Cameras Presets & Patterns View Live & Recorded Video from Multiple Cameras via Pop-Up Window PTZ Presets and Patterns Based on Event, Alarm Input or Video Tour Video Tour Start/Stop Time in Journal Toggle NetVue Window Size from 1x to 4x Display Up to four Live Video NetVue Windows Based on Event Original Recorded Video Cannot Be Altered
1 2 3 4
P P P P P P
P P
P P P P P P
P P P P
In quad mode, only first camera export Use timeserve application Via API, server supported Not supported in 2.0x
Product Codes
CC800-NETVUEI CCURE NetVue interface to American Dynamics Intellex Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of Intellex. (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v7.0 or higher) CCURE NetVue interface to American Dynamics VideoEdge Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of VideoEdge. (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v9.4 CCURE NetVue interface to Nice Systems NiceVision PRO (v6.2), or Nice Harmony Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of NiceVision PRO, or Nice Harmony systems., (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v8.0 or higher) CCURE NetVue interface to Verint (Loronix) Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of Loronix systems. (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v8.0 or higher CCURE NetVue interface to Verint (Nextiva) Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of Nextiva systems. (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v9.3 or higher CCURE NetVue interface to Integral DVX (Pelco) Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of Integral DVR models DS XPress and DVXi, running API V1.3.0.162 / DVR v4.1x. (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v8.3 or higher) CCURE NetVue interface to Pelco DX8X00 Includes licensing to enable CCURE NetVue for one CCURE 800/8000 server and unlimited number of DX8X00, running API v3.2.4 (Requires CCURE 800/8000 v9.4
CC800-NETVUEVE
CC800-NETVUENH
CC800-NETVUEL
CC800-NETVUENXT
CC800-NETVUET
CC800-NETVUEPL
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 11
Chapter 4.2 CCure 800 - Software Enhancements Software Options

Software House have developed a number of software modules to increase the feature set of the core software and to enable some of the unique software features.
Features
Lock/Unlock/Secure Door Momentarily Unlock Door Activate/Deactivate Event Arm/Disarm Event Latch/Unlatch Event Activate/Deactivate/Pulse Output Connect apC (dial-up) Activate/Deactivate CCTV Action Arm/Disarm/Force Arm Intrusion Zone (IZ)
Keypad Commands/Enhanced Intrusions Zones

These modules are ordered separately to provide features, some of which are dependent controllers on site. Keypad Commands (KPCs) allow an authorised cardholder to activate events with a command via the RM keypad. A KPC is a unique nine-digit number entered on the keypad (with optional prompting) that activates a specific event.
on iSTAR Pro
Some KPCs are used as intrusion zone pass codes but a KPC event may be configured to execute any allowable event action and is not limited to controlling and displaying intrusion zones. The KPC may be configured to require a card presentation and, optionally, a PIN to validate the KPC.
Product Code
CC800-IZKP CCURE 800 Keypad commands/Enhanced Intrusion Zones for iSTAR Includes licensing to enable the use of keypad commands and enhanced intrusion zone functional with the iSTAR Intelligent Network Controller on a CCURE 800 Model 1 configuration. System serial number, fax number and contact name are required at time of order.
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Connection CCURE 800/8000 lets you connect to LDAP-compliant data sources including industry-leading Microsoft Active Directory for Windows 2003. This connection occurs within the CCURE 800/8000 application without an add-on toolkit or middleware adapter. This new functionality allows you to pull existing entries such as personnel information, credentials, and clearances from an external data source and import the information directly into CCURE 800/8000 as new or modified personnel records in real time. Special Microsoft functionality has also been added to this LDAP feature to enhance performance for those utilising the Microsoft Active Directory. You can easily link to an outside directory using an IP address. New employees will no longer have to wait long periods of time for all systems to be updated and clearances granted to applicable areas. Updating one database rather than synchronising two or more systems saves time and costs associated with employing disparate systems. Overall security is enhanced when identity information in CCURE 800/8000 is updated within seconds. In addition, you can assign clearance privileges, both physical and logical, to a cardholder based on role assignments. Model Number Description CC800-LDAP CCURE 800/8000, LDAP option
Chapter 4.2 Page 12
04/11

Features
Better and easier access to the valuable data stored in the CCURE 800/8000 journals Pre-configured reports to address specific reporting needs The ability for the user to customise additional reports Schedule reports via the Windows 2000 scheduler utility E-mail the results of a scheduled report to an e-mail address Print the report to a specified printer
Enhanced Reporting
The Enhanced Reporting option allows a CCURE 800 Model 1 customer to add the functionality of increased report generation and formatting to the base CCURE 800 configuration. Crystal Reports Crystal Reports is a third party report generation tool. It accesses databases via ODBC and can be used to design and administer reports. Journal Export Database The new database that contain the extracted journal data. Sometimes referred to as the Enhanced Reporting database
Product Code
CC800-RPTG CCURE 800 Enhanced Reporting option Includes licensing to enable the use of enhanced reporting on a CCURE 800 Model 1 configuration. Generation of prepacked reports does not require a Crystal reports license. Generation of custom reports by the end user does require the user to acquire a separate Crystal Reports v8.5 or v9.0* Standard or Developers License. System serial number, fax number and contact name are required at time of order.
Features
Up to 16 inputs per door 4 event monitoring of each point Multiple lock sensor inputs per door
Advanced Door Monitoring (on iSTAR Pro)

Advanced Door Monitoring adds inputs for monitoring doors, including lock sensor status inputs and various lock release devices such as: Fire alarm Crash bar Key override Power failure The enhancement supports multiple release devices per door as well as multiple DSM and RTE inputs per door.
Product Code
CC800-ENHDOOR CCURE 800 Advanced Door Monitoring Option System serial number, fax number and contact name are required at time of order.
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 13

Features
Can be timed or fixed Users can be given pass-through times Entry card can be different to exit card
Carpool Anti-Passback (on iSTAR Pro)

Carpool Anti-pass back enforces anti-pass back on a group of individuals configured as a carpool group. It allows users to change the pass back information in multiple personnel records from a single card read. A user can designate carpool areas that enforce anti-pass back for a specified group when a single specified card is read at the carpool area reader. The user can then grace the cardholders in this group. CC800-CRPL CCURE 800 Carpool Anti-pass back System serial number, fax number and contact name are required at time of order.
Product Code
CC800-CRPL CCURE 800 Carpool Anti-pass back. System serial number, fax number and contact name are required at time of order
Features
Provides you the ability to configure pre-determined security tours for guards to follow Readers or Inputs for stops Reader can be used to initiate the tour Tours can be sequential or random Optional Min / Max times for each stop and for the total tour
Guard Tour
The Guard Tour option of CCURE 800 allows customers to set up pre-determined Guard Tours for a security guard to follow in order to better automate their security processes. Guard Tour requires CCURE 800/8000 version 6.0.1 or higher.
Product Code
CC800-GT CCURE 800 Guard Tour Option - includes licensing to enable Guard Tour for 1 CCURE 800 server Only for CCURE 800 English version
Chapter 4.2 Page 14
04/11

Features
Only with iSTAR Pro Personnel or personnel groups Lockout Timer Area or area groups
Area Lockout (on iSTAR Pro)

Allows a user to deny personnel or personnel groups access from an area for a specified period of time. A user can configure lockouts for a single area or for area groups. The lockout timer starts when the personnel enter or exit the Lockout area. Utilised in conjunction with the iSTAR Intelligent Network Controller.
Product Code
CC800-ARALK Area Lockout option Includes licensing to enable the Area Lockout feature in all Models of CCURE 800/8000 utilising the iSTAR Intelligent Network Controller. System serial number, fax number, and contact name are required at time of order.
Features
Monitor multiple system from one guard station Increased site efficiency Not dependant on CCURE Central
Central Monitoring
The Central Monitoring option of CCURE 800 allows customers to monitor multiple CCURE servers from one guard station with their existing CCURE 800 system. Central Monitoring requires version 6.0.1 or higher, plus licensing for each server. You select multiple CCURE 800 servers to monitor allowing you to monitor locations from one guard station thus providing backup security management.
Product Code
CENTMON-1S CCURE 800 Central Monitoring Option software only - includes licensing to enable alarm event monitoring of one regional CCURE 800 servers (Price per server)
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 15

Features
Integration with Third Party Systems Examples might include the following: Dome control Elevators EAS Plus Support for secondary alarm annunciation for fire and . burglar panels
.
Bi-directional Serial Interface

CURE 800/8000 provides third party device integration via bi-directional serial interface. The interface has been implemented to receive messages from third party devices and interpret them for CCURE 800/8000. The messages are translated as CCURE 800/8000 journal messages or as events. The interface has been designed to communicate with the CCURE 800/8000 driver via RS-232 serial port or remotely through TCP/IP via a qualified terminal server. The bi-directional interface provides output messages to third party devices by through the use of action activation. The bi-directional interface is available with templates for use with an intercom or intrusion detection system, as well as a powerful user -configurable option allowing interaction with many ASCII serial interface devices. The current templates for the bi-directional interface are for the Radionics 6500 and 6600 intrusion alarm receivers, the Zenitel Stentofon AlphaCom M intercom system and Inovonics RF panic alarm. With the order of the General Purpose bi-directional serial interface the customer will receive a $2,500 (MSRP USD) credit good towards the purchase of either the Intercom (CC800-Stent), the SimplexGrinnell 4100U Fire System Interface (CC800-SG-4100U), the Inovonics (CC800INNOV), or the Radionics (CC800-RAD2) interface template purchased on the same order. The credit is not transferable to any other Software House product or to another order.
Product Code
CC800-GPSERV General Purpose serial interface option user configurable Bi-directional serial interface
Features
Export and Modify configuration data from an existing CCURE 800/8000 database Create new configuration data from scratch Import configuration data into a CCURE 800/8000 database
CCURE 800 Configuration (CF) Import/Export Tool

The CCURE Configuration Import/Export Utility is a tool that allows customers to design and load security objects into the CCURE 800/8000 system. Using the tool, customers can design and enter configuration data into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to quickly and easily configure the CCURE 800/8000. This data includes apCs, apC Inputs, apC Outputs, apC readers, iSTARs, iSTAR Inputs, iSTAR Outputs and iSTAR Readers, as well as Bi-directional interface date. Note: Training is required prior to purchasing the CCURE Configuration Import/Export Utility, either through our web-based training program or as part of the standard CCURE 800 Advanced Integrator or Installer training curriculum. Usage of the tool on live installations is a licensable option to each CCURE 800 site. The license cost of the option varies with the size of the CCURE 800 installation.The CCURE Configuration Import Export Utility is version dependent. This utility can be only used with a CCURE 800/8000 8.3 database. There are also versions 8.1, and 8.2 of the CCURE 800 with their own versions of this tool.
Product Code
For Part Number contact CCURE 800 Configuration (CF) Application Engineering Import/Export Tool Chapter 4.2 Page 16 Access Control Catalogue 04/11

Features
Link Assets with Employees - use CCURE 800/8000s Asset Manager to link assets with authorised employees Automatic Hands-Free Operation - employees simply . walk through the door or other portal; no buttons to push . or cards to swipe Flexible Coverage Zone - operates at very short range for . door control; or coverage can be expanded across a . broad detection zone for monitoring Multi-Tag Read - instantaneously reads multiple tag across abroad corridor or within secure areas; no need to . herd employees through security gates or choke points Covert Monitoring - a wide variety of antenna options . offer unobtrusive and aesthetically pleasing installation , choices; antennas can be hidden in ceilings, walls and, , . even picture frames.
Asset Management System

This solution works only with apC panels and is not supported by the iSTAR or iSTAR Pro controllers.
Contact your Software House Area Sales Manager for more information about Visitor Management
Product Code
CC800-AMGR CCURE 800 Asset Management Software Option Includes licensing to enable Asset management for 1 CCURE 800/8000 server. System serial number, fax number and contact name are required at time of order. Supported with apC panels only.
Threat Level - Software Only

The Threat Level option allows customers to increase or decrease system security measures based on the level of "threat" to their system. Multiple Threat Levels can be configured to cause different series of events to fire based on the level required. High level threats can cause all doors to lock, change the clearance filters to a higher level, and require all personnel to use card and PIN instead of just a card. A Medium threat level may simply be set to require all access to be Card plus PIN.
Product Code
CC800-THRTLVL CCURE 800 Threat Level Option Includes licensing to enable the use of Threat Levels.
Additional Inputs/Outputs
This package can be provided to any model CCure package and allows additional i/o on the existing model (saves changing site model package when only i/o is required)
Product Code
CC800-AMDD10 Licence allowing 512 additional software input and 512 software outputs.
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 17
Chapter 4.2 CCure 800 - Software Enhancements Visitor Management Systems

Features
Pre-register visitors and groups Visitor self-registration option Print badges in advance or upon arrival e-mail employees of visitor arrival Link to the CCURE 800 employee database Monitor and track visitor movements through CCURE 800 Issue temporary access cards for use with CCURE 800 Links to Government Watch List
STOPwares PassagePointTM Software

With STOPwares PassagePointTM, the front desk personnel can track visitors as they enter and exit the facility. Using the optional Intranet module, employees can pre-register visitors utilising a web browser interface. By combining PassagePointTM with the CCURE 800 Integration Add-on license, front desk personnel can additionally issue access cards and search the CCURE cardholder directory. STOPware PassagePoint is available in two versions: Professional and Enterprise: Both products have identical functionality except that the Enterprise Edition supports the use of MSSQL and ORACLE databases. Additional Benefits: Custom design badges, or use a template Use built-in reports, or create your own Non-disclosure agreement (NDA) Capture and store signatures Look out/watch list with photos Scan business cards, drivers licenses or passports Print and read barcodes Track deliveries and property
Contact your local Tyco Fire and Security Representative for your product code.
Chapter 4.2 Page 18
04/11

Real-Time Application Protocol Interface (API)
The CCURE 800/8000 Real-Time API run-time license is only available for CCURE 800/8000 systems, model 10 or above. The license allows CCURE 800/8000 to be interoperable with such interfaces as mapping, building systems Integration, or any other application which has acquired and been developed using the CCURE 800/8000 API. The CCURE 800/8000 API for software application developers is licensed separately and on an individual basis. Model Number Description CC800-API CCURE API Run-Time License Enables the API for real-time communications of specified data to external licensed applications (required: CCURE 800 license Model 10 or above) CC800-APIPSNL CCURE API Personnel License Enables the API for import and export of personnel data (required: CCURE 800 license Model 10 or above)
The CCURE 800/8000 API (Application Program Interface) provides real-time, bi-directional interfaces to other applications. The API is a set of software calls and procedures that enable a seamless communication interface with CCURE 800. In general the API supports all of the functions currently available in the CCURE 800/8000 Monitoring Station including: unlock or lock doors, view and acknowledge alarm messages, and view the status of objects. The application package consists of four necessary documents to be filled out, signed (as required), and returned before the API can be purchased: Application: Customer and Deployment Information NDA: One Way Non-Disclosure Agreement (Requires Signature) License Contract Agreement (Requires Signature) Credit Application: Required to set up the account to accept a PO in our Order Entry System Documents should be directed to:Software House Product Management 70 Westview Street Lexington, MA 02421-3108 Model Number Description CC800-RTAPI CCURE 800/8000 API Development license Includes for one year the following: DLL libraries, sample app, and associated documentation. Demo version of CoCURE 800 with a one year (renewable) license and enabled API license 16 hours of R&D assistance - additional time available at $1,000 for four hours All maintenance and new revisions during duration of contract CC800-RTAPI-R CCURE 800/8000 API Development License Yearly Renewal Includes for one year the following: Four hours of R&D assistance - additional time available at $1,000 for four hours All maintenance and new revisions during duration of contract
With the order of the CCURE 800/8000 RTAPI (CC800-RTAPI) the customer will receive a $5,000 (MSRP USD) credit good towards the purchase of the CCURE 800/8000 Personnel Import/Export API (CC800-APIPSNL). The credit is not transferable to any other Software House product or to another order.
04/11
Chapter 4.2 Page 19
Chapter 4.2 Page 20
04/11
Chapter 4.3 - CCure 800 CCURE 800/8000 Enterprise Integration Options

Features
Links IT Network access with CCURE 800/8000 access control events Provides single-point authentication management using password, password and card, or password and biometric Helps organizations comply with regulations such as Sarbanes-Oxley, HIPAA, etc. Browser-based graphical user interface makes it easy to connect from any PC with an Internet connection Strengthens anti-tailgating policies Instant user lock-out feature closes security gaps Reduces security risk when non-active employees are instantly revoked from local and remote IT directories Appliance-based package easily plugs into your network
IT Integration Package
The CCURE IT Integration Package includes the CCURE Enterprise Adapter, developed using IBM Tivoli Directory Integrator, to synchronize identity data in the CCURE 800/8000 security database, Human Resources systems, and other Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems to provide one streamlined company information system. CCURE Enterprise Adapter allows up-to-the-minute transfer of information between a CCURE 800/8000 access control system and an ERP system such as PeopleSoft, SAP , Lawson, Oracle, and J.D. Edwards. This integration of logical and physical security systems enables companies to reduce the risks of improper access by an employee who has been terminated. It also allows corporations to reduce costs and eliminate the errors associated with entering data into two disparate systems. CCURE Enterprise Adapter provides an intuitive graphical user interface and web-based administrative management console for easy development and maintenance of synchronization rules. Personnel data entered into the ERP system is automatically imported into the CCURE 800/8000 system, eliminating the need to duplicate data entry and reducing the chance of errors. The Enterprise Adapter enables you to set up standard clearance sets, such as "department" or "job title", from backend ERP systems into clearance assignments within CCURE 800/8000.
Order Process So that ADT will receive pre and post sales support and warranty for the Imprivata product, ADT Worldwide recommend that you purchase the Imprivata unit NSL (Non Stock Listed) from the approved agent/Dealer in your country. You will then receive local support (which will not be available in EMEA if the product is purchased from Software House).
NOTE: System serial number, fax number, and contact name required at the time of order. Unless waived by customer, IT integration package requires professional services engagement to deploy. Please contact Software House Professional Services for details.
01/11
Chapter 4.3 Page 1
Chapter 4.3 - CCure 800

Imprivata OneSign
The CCURE 800/8000 Physical/Logical Access Control Solution utilises Imprivata OneSign identity-based convergence system to share information between a company's CCURE 800/8000 security management system and the company's network. Better demonstrate compliance OneSign allows quick and easy mergence of user activity from the CCURE 800/8000 system to detail and monitor who is accessing what, when and from where in order to grant access to the network. This is crucial for complying with regulations such as Sarbanes-Oxley, HSPD-12, HIPAA and corporate security investigations. Enhanced security during authentication process This solution provides enhanced security during authentication by requiring a user to present a password, password and card, or password and biometric when accessing a building and signing on to a networked system. Strengthens anti-tailgating policies By linking a user's physical access badge activity with network access, this integrated solution strengthens anti-tailgating policies. For example, if an individual enters a building/zone behind another individual without presenting his/her card s/he can be rejected from accessing the network. This allows corporations to reduce costs by eliminating burdensome turnstile ingress/egress systems. Easy configuration The OneSign application utilizes a browser-based graphical user interface that lets you easily make all system configurations from any computer with an Internet connection. Eliminate risks with instant user lock-out feature The CCURE 800/8000 Physical/Logical Access Control Solution effectively closes security gaps with an instant user lock-out feature. This feature instantly locks the user from the network once revoked from the CCURE system, eliminating the risks associated with the time gap that can exist between an employee's termination date and removal from the network.
User taps door reader with access card; CCURE 800/8000 verifies user and unlocks door Imprivata OneSign Directories (AD, LDAP RADIUS, Other) , User attempts login to network, initiating authentication call to OneSign OneSign verifies with CCURE 800/8000 that user is active and badged into the building; OneSign verifies user's network privileges with IT directories OneSign authenticates user to the network
iSTAR Pro CCURE 800/8000
Chapter 4.3 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 4.4 - CCure 800 CCure Central v2.2

Features
Web browser access to centralized database of cardholder records Centralized personnel and cardholder administration Global Clearances Seamless integration with the CCURE 800/8000 system Sophisticated reporting capabilities for personnel and clearance information including scheduled and custom reports utilizing Crystal Reports Supports MS SQL Server 2005 Service Pack 1 Enables a single card to be valid across the entire enterprise of CCURE 800/8000 systems Scalable system to meet the needs of any enterprise Encrypted communications with Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to enhance data security Filter Replication provides faster selected replication of personnel data to servers Support up to unlimited CCURE 800/8000 servers with 250,000 cardholders24 MS Windows 2003 Service Pack 1 support Intel Pentium IV processor support Allows CCURE Central and CCURE 800/8000 to run on one physical server Centralized photo image management Automated database recovery Improved systems diagnostics General Import Export Option (GIEO) Improved systems diagnostics
Web-Based Security Credential Management System

CCURE Central allows users to add personnel records, edit existing records, or change access clearances, all from the convenience of a web browser application. CCURE Central provides users with the ability to centrally manage card enrollment in an enterprise access control system. Cardholder updates are automatically distributed to selected CCURE 800/8000 servers in the CCURE Central network. The platform-independent architecture of CCURE Central supports the industry standard network protocol, TCP/IP which allows seamless integration with other , systems and components that may already exist within an enterprises network. The CCURE Central client provides security in the form of authentication via a login username and password. All transactions between the browser client and the web server are encrypted via Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). In addition, public key encryption is used between the CCURE Central server and the local CCURE system servers to enhance data security.
NOTE: All CCURE Certified integrators must complete training on CCURE Central prior to purchase. All CCURE systems must be under a valid CCURE 800/8000 SSA.
CCURE Central GIEO with an Approved Enterprise Integration Adapter The CCURE Central General Import/Export Option (GIEO) is a feature that allows the import and export of personnel records to and from CCURE Central in real time. Three adapters are included; a flat file adapter, an XML adapter and a TCP/IP adapter that supports the connection to a CCURE 800/8000 approved Enterprise Adapter. The Enterprise Adapter connects to many applications including any relational database and SAP PeopleSoft, and Oracle HR , applications. Cardholder clearances may be assigned during import to CCURE Central by configuring a cardholder clearance table to the Enterprise Adapter (see below). Using the General Import/Export Option to import employee records eliminates data input errors, reduces labor costs, and provides real time, up-to-date information in the CCURE Central application.
01/11
Chapter 4.4 Page 1

CCURE Central Minimum Hardware and Software Requirements1
CCURE Central Server Processor 2.0 GHz Intel Pentium IV or higher RAM 1.0 GB Hard Disk Space 40 GB Monitor/Video Adapter Board 17-inch SVGA (1024 x 768); 16-bit colour Operating Systems MS Windows 2003 Server (Service Pack 3), MS Windows XP (32-bit native) Ports 2 serial, 1 parallel Video Adapter SVGA Network Adapter 10Base-T or 100Base-T Operating System MS Windows 2003 Database Microsoft SQL Server 2005 (9.0) Service Pack 1 CCURE Central Client Web Browser Internet Explorer v5.5 or higher Monitor 17-inch SVGA (1024 x 768); 16-bit colour CCURE Central Bundled Systems include: Dual Core Xeon Processor 5130 4 MB Cache, Single Processor 4 GB 533 MHz (4 x 1 GB), Dual Ranked DIMMs Keyboard, Mouse Dell 17-inch Flat Panel Monitor 4 x 73 GB, SAS, 3.5 inch 15K RPM Hard Drives Integrated Gigabit NIC 48X IDE CD-RW/DVD ROM Drive RAID Enabled MS Windows 2003 Server Standard Edition 3 year, Next Business Day, Parts and On-Site Labor Documentation on CD CCURE Central software and license CCURE Central Registration Bundled Hardware configuration: Standard Rack Mount Server Dual Core Xeon Processor 5130 4 MB Cache, Single Processor 4 GB 533 MHz (4 x 1 GB), Dual Ranked DIMMs Keyboard, Mouse Dell 17-inch Flat Panel Monitor 4 x 73 GB, SAS, 3.5 inch 15K RPM Hard Drives Integrated Gigabit NIC 48X IDE CD-RW/DVD ROM Drive RAID Enabled MS Windows 2003 Server Standard Edition 3 year, Next Business Day, Parts and On-Site Labor
1 Exact Specifications may change depending on model availability from Dell
Chapter 4.4 Page 2
01/11

CCURE Central Support Table
The table below shows the versions of CCURE Central that are supported with CCURE 800/8000. CCURE v2.0.1 CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 800/8000 v7.2 v8.0 v8.1 v8.2 v8.3 v8.3.2 v9.0 v9.1 v9.3 CCURE Central v2.1 CCURE Central v2.2 CCURE Central v3.0
Product Codes
CCCENT CCURE Central Enterprise Bundled System Includes Pentium PC, MS Windows 2003 Server, MS SQL Server 2005, Actuate Reporting and two simultaneous CCURE Central users1 CCURE Central Additional User License Includes license to add one additional simultaneous CCURE Central user CCURE Central Additional 5 User License - Includes license to add five additional simultaneous CCURE Central users CCURE Central Enterprise System Software Only263 Includes CCURE Central licensing for unlimited CCURE 800/8000 servers, and two simultaneous CCURE Central CCURE Central Replication Option for all CCURE 800/8000 Models
CCCENT-U1
CCCENT-U5
CCCENT-S
CC800-CCCR
1 Includes one replication option
Notes: Every CCURE 800/8000 server must have the CC800-CCCR CCURE Central Replication option in order to be a node of the CCURE Central server. CCURE Central has been successfully tested to support up to 10 CCURE 800/8000 servers with 250,000 total cardholder records. However, as with all of our systems, CCURE Central is designed for unlimited expansion and information on larger installations can be provided by your Area Sales Manager. All CCURE certified integrators must complete training on CCURE Central prior to purchase. CCURE Central installation requires network configuration and a review of each CCURE 800/8000 database for initial installation. See Please contact your local ACVS Regional Manager for guidance prior to quoting C.Cure Central. Additional Support & Professional services will be required.
01/11
Chapter 4.4 Page 3
Chapter 4.4 Page 4
01/11
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 CCure 9000 V2.0 Security and Event Management System
Features
CCURE 9000 Enterprise provides advanced distributed architecture for enterprise scalability Control and monitor areas with anti-passback, Occupancy Restrictions, and N-man Rule Easily create your own custom personnel data fields to capture information specific to your company Enhance security by requiring operator confirmation before manual activation of events Trigger automatic changes in access rights based on threat levels with Dynamic Clearance Filters Control security objects directly from the monitoring station or from graphical CADbased maps Dynamically change views, reorder columns, and modify and filter data from a single screen Easily drag and drop cameras directly to the interface Share a single database while retaining security and privacy of your own information Significantly enhance security with intrusion zones and keypad commands Remotely manage and monitor the system using CCURE 9000 Web Client Access and leverage LDAP-compliant data sources Create a virtual hub of integrated applications with robust Software Development Kit (SDK) Supports the entire suite of iSTAR and apC controllers1, and SimplexGrinnell Ethernet ISC panels Integrates with American Dynamics solutions as well as other video systems FIPS 201 compliant
Introduction to CCure 9000

CCURE 9000 is a powerful security and event management system that provides IT-standard tools and innovative distributed architecture. By leveraging .NET v3.5 technology, CCURE 9000 offers native encryption and XML data transfer, making it one of the fastest, most secure systems in the industry. CCURE 9000 provides unsurpassed integration capabilities, advanced alarm routing, and remote access for system administration and monitoring via a light client. For extremely effective information management, CCURE 9000 supports multiple layouts and monitoring station panes in the same windows. This enables you to focus on system activity, while another window displays your live video. Integrate an unlimited number of security and business applications using the same GUI, navigation, driver interfaces, etc. with the CCURE 9000 Kit (SDK). This kit is available through the Software House Connected platform integration program. The SDK provides the essential tools to develop hardware and software applications that communicate seamlessly with CCURE 9000. CCURE 9000 provides advanced security with a built-in LDAP general connection. This allows a user to connect to many external data sources including industry-leading Microsoft Active Directory.
(1) Minimum memory specification for apCs: 512k for apC/L and 1 MB for apC and apC/8X
02/12
Chapter 5.1 Page 1

Configuration Matrix v1.93
# of Online Readers # of Online Inputs # of Online Outputs # of Credentials # of Simultaneous Clients** # Standard Badging Clients Activity Journal Automated Import/Export CCURE Mobile**** CCTV Integration Configuration Templates Double Swipe Elevator Support Extended Card Number Support (Government Cards) Field Level Auditing Graphical Maps ISC elevator support LDAP Option Localized versions available**** Migration Tool for Cardholder Data Multiple Card Support Multiple Application Server Option (Maximum of three) Multiple Guard Station GUI's Multiple Time Zones NetVue Integration with Intellex Notification by Email Oracle 10g support***** Partitioning Push Install of Clients Single Sign-On Authentication Software House Wireless Access System System Backup of Database and Journals Tool for In-Country Localisation Verint Nextiva VideoEdge NVR Series Series L* M* 16 32 64 128 64 128 7,000 12,000 5 5 1 1 P P Not Available P Optional Optional Not Available P P P P Not Available P P P P P P Optional P Series N* 64 256 256 40,000 5 1 P P Series P 128 512 512 45,000 10 2 P P Series Q 256 1,024 1,024 250,000 10 2 P P Series R 512 2,500 2,500 250,000 10 2 P P Series R Plus 1,000 5,000 5,000 250,000 10 2 P P Optional P P P P P P P P Optional P Series S 2,500+ 10,000+ 10,000+ 500,000 10 2 P P Optional P P P P P P P P Optional P
Optional Optional Optional Optional P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Not Available P Not Available P Optional P
Optional Optional Optional Optional P P P P
Optional P Not Available Not Available P P P P Not Available P P Optional P Optional Optional Optional
Optional P Not Available P P P P P P P P Optional P Optional Optional P
Optional Optional Optional Optional P P P P Not Not Optional Optional Available Available P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P Option P P P P P P P P Optional
Optional P Optional P P P P P P P P Optional P Optional Optional P
Optional P Optional P P P P P P P P Optional P Optional Optional P
Optional Optional
P P P P Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional P P P P
Note: Additional input/output capacity and additional clients and badging clients may be added to the system licence. Note (SQL and SQL Express): A SQL Express license is shipped with every system. Series P through S requires a full SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Processor license which may be purchased from Software House in a bundle configuration, from Microsoft, or an approved vendor separately. *The baseline capabilities of the system are within the envelope of operation for utilization of SQL Express. **Client License Single monitoring station application or administration application. ***Requires installation of Microsoft Windows 2003 Server operating system on CCURE 9000 server at all series levels ****Arabic, Dutch, French, German, Polish, Spanish, and Simplified Chinese support is bundled into v1.9 English DVD. *****Oracle 10g can be utilized in all versions. However, it is mandatory that the end user have a fully qualified Oracle DBA to support and maintain the underlying Oracle 10g database infrastructure.
Chapter 5.1 Page 2
02/12

Recommended Minimum Requirements Server
Processor* Memory Hard Disk Drives Series L - N Series P - S Network Card DVD Drive Operating System Series L - N Series P - S Web Server Database Series L - N Series P - S Video Card SQL Express SQL Server 2005 Dedicated 256 MB accelerated video card** Dual drives: 80 GB each @ 7200 RPM Dual drives: 100 GB each @ 7200 RPM 1000 Base - T (Gigabit) Required Windows 2003 Standard Server or Windows XP Professional (32-bit native) Windows 2003 Enterprise Server (32-bit native)*** IIS v 6.0 or higher Intel 3.4 GHz or greater with 64-bit CPU 4 GB Ram
Client
Processor Hard Disk Drive Memory Network Card DVD Drive Operating Systems Video Card Intel 3.4 GHz or greater with 64-bit CPU 100 GB @ 7200 RPM 1 GB RAM 1000 Base - T (Gigabit) Required Windows XP Professional (32-bit native) Dedicated 256 MB accellerated video card**
*64-bit processor based hardware is recommended to facilitate future upgrades. ** For multiple screen display or other display applications, video cards with additional capabilities might be required. ***Utilizing the CCURE Mobile reader requires the installation Window 2003 Server operating system on the CCURE 9000 server regardless of Series level
Application Software only Product Codes

CC9000-SL CCURE 9000 Series L System Software license Only* SPECIAL OFFER CCURE 9000 Series L System Software Only with extended 2-year SSA (after 1-year warranty). Purchase CC9000-SL and CC9000-LSSAPS2 on initial system purchase to receive special pricing (Please speak to your ACVS contact) CC9000-SM CCURE 9000 Series M System Software license Only CC9000-SN CCURE 9000 Series N System Software license Only CC9000-SP CCURE 9000 Series P System Software license Only CC9000-SQ CCURE 9000 Series Q System Software license Only CC9000-SR CCURE 9000 Series R System Software license Only CC9000-SRP CCURE 9000 Series R Plus System Software license Only CC9000-SS CCURE 9000 Series S System Software license Only
* Product certification required. Does not include on-site installation support. Training requisites must be met prior to purchase.
To order the DVD media for the core software. Please add to your order the appropriate item below to meet your system needs
Software Media
CC9000-KIT Includes CCURE 9000 Software DVD (No system license) CC9000-KIT-SQL Includes CCURE 9000 Software DVD and runtime processor license of SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition for use solely with CCURE 9000. SQL includes one year support and upgrades from Microsoft. (No system license) 02/12 Access Control Catalogue Chapter 5.1 Page 3
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 Software Application

C.Cure 9000 core software upgrades can be ordered using the part codes detailed below. To increase the Series of an existing site more than one step will require you to order all intermediate steps as well. e.g. Series L to Series Q requires: CC9000-L-MSU + CC9000-M-NSU + CC9000-N-PSU + CC9000-P-QSU
Product Codes
CC9000-L-MSU CC9000-M-NSU CC9000-N-PSU CC9000-P-QSU CC9000-Q-RSU CC9000-R-RPSU CC9000-RP-SSU Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade Series Series Series Series Series Series Series L System License to Series M Includes new CCURE 9000 license only M System License to Series N Includes new CCURE 9000 license only N System License to Series P Includes new CCURE 9000 license only P System License to Series Q Includes new CCURE 9000 license only Q System License to Series R Includes new CCURE 9000 license only R System License to Series R Plus Includes new CCURE 9000 license only R Plus System License to Series S Includes new CCURE 9000 license only
Chapter 5.1 Page 4
02/12
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 Video Integration

Security Integration
Options for the CCURE 9000 include the integration of both DVMS and NVR systems. These integrations are undertaken by partner vendors through the Software House Connected Platform Integration Program. The software for non-Tyco partner integrations is distributed on an independent DVD.
Product Codes
CC9000-DV1 Intellex Digital Video Management System integration option for CCURE 9000 Series L CC9000-VEDGEL American Dynamics VideoEdge NVR integration option for CCURE 9000 Series L American Dynamics VideoEdge NVR integration option for CCURE 9000 Series M through Series S Verint Nextiva NVR v5.1 integration option for CCURE 9000 Series L through Series N Verint Nextiva NVR v5.1 integration option for CCURE 9000 Series P through Series S American Dynamics HDVR integration option for CCURE 9000 Included by default with each new system; use this part number if you need to enable the feature on an older system that does not have it enabled.
CC9000-VEDGE CC9000-O-VER-S CC9000-O-VER-L CC9000-HDVR
System Options
CC9000-ADDIO CC9000-LANGTL CC9000-ADDCLI CC9000-ADDCLIB CC9000-IDB CCURE ID Additional software input/output points Increments of 256 inputs and outputs per each unit purchased Not Available on CCURE 9000 Series L CCURE 9000 Language Translation Tool. Allows the end user to translate all strings and fields of CCURE 9000 Graphical User Interface (GUI) into other languages Additional Client Workstation Not Available on CCURE 9000 Series L Additional Client of CCURE ID - Badging Workstation license Not Available on CCURE 9000 Series L Video Identification and Badging System Package Includes bundled client workstation, additional CCURE ID Client Software for CCURE, Microsoft XP Professional, camera, lighting unit, and camera stand
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Connection

CCURE 9000 lets you connect to LDAP-compliant data sources including industry-leading Microsoft Active Directory for Windows 2003. This connection occurs within the CCURE 9000 application without an add-on toolkit or middleware adapter. This new functionality allows you to pull existing entries such as personnel information, credentials, and clearances from an external data source and import the information directly into CCURE 9000 as new or modified personnel records within seconds. Special Microsoft functionality has also been added to this LDAP feature to enhance performance for those utilizing the Microsoft Active Directory. You can easily link to an outside directory using an IP address. New employees will no longer have to wait long periods of time for all systems to be updated and clearances granted to applicable areas. Updating one database rather than synchronizing two or more systems saves time and costs associated with employing disparate systems. Overall security is enhanced when identity information in CCURE 9000 is updated within seconds. In addition, you can assign clearance privileges, both physical and logical, to a cardholder based on role assignments.
Product Code
CC9000-LDAP CCURE 9000, LDAP option
02/12
Chapter 5.1 Page 5
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 CCURE 9000 Application Server

Application Server provides the capability for up to three CCURE 9000 servers to access the same CCURE 9000 database. Each Application Server can manage a selected subset (one or more Partitions) of the security devices and Personnel contained in the database. This allows greater flexibility in load balancing of security and personnel assets. In addition, the Application Server environment provides a higher degree of scalability than a single server environment because multiple servers can support more security and personnel assets than a single server while maintaining all assets in a single database for centralized management. Application Server also enables Central Monitoring across one, any or all application servers on the system. In addition, it enables reporting across one, any or all application servers on the system. In a configuration with multiple, remotely-located Application Servers communicating to a central database, overall performance over a WAN is improved because high traffic server-to-controller communication is local, while lower traffic server-to-database communication uses the WAN connection. A system is altered from a single stand alone host to an application server configuration when a second server is attached to the same SQL database. Each licensed CCURE 9000 server can act as an Application Server; when more than one server is configured to communicate with the CCURE 9000 database, the Application Server capability is automatically activated. A number of limitations currently exist with the implementation of an Application Server Configuration which should be noted. These are: No Hardware failover or redundancy of Application Servers. Each Application Server has their own drivers (for iSTAR and video) and event services sharing one database. Each Application server can administer one or more partitions; In CCURE 9000 v1.9, apC, Ethernet ISC, Software House Wireless Access System (OSI/Stanley), and CCTV are only supported on one application server in environment; Partitions are generated automatically for each of the installed application servers, and Functions that are to be used across the application server environment, such as clearances containing doors across multiple application servers, events shared over application servers, and card formats must be in the CCURE 9000 system default partion. With the purchase of an additional application server, the customer must provide the serial number of the other CCURE 9000 servers which are to be deployed concurrently as application servers at the specified system site. The series license for all application servers in the deployed environment must be the same. The site will then be provided new licenses for all of the servers to be deployed as an application server deployment for this site.
Product Codes
CC9000-Q-APSRV CC9000-R-APSRV CC9000-RP-APSV CC9000-S-APSRV Additional Additional Additional Additional Server Server Server Server License License License License for for for for use use use use as as as as an an an an Application Application Application Application Server Server Server Server for for for for a a a a CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE 9000 9000 9000 9000 Series Series Series Series Q R RPLUS S
To ensure the correct licencing for each site, a SWH form must be completed for each order. Please contact your local ACVS Regional Manager for further details.
Chapter 5.1 Page 6
02/12

CCure 900 Application Server
CCure 9000 Server Site 1
Database Cluster
Client Work Station & Alarm Panel CCure 9000 Server Site 2
CCure 9000 Server Site 3
Client Work Station & Alarm Panel
02/12
Chapter 5.1 Page 7
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 CCURE 9000 Migration Utility

The migration utility facilitates the migration of both existing iSecure Pro and CCURE 800/8000 systems to CCURE 9000. iSecure Pro to CCURE 9000 migration involves taking an existing and functional iSecure Pro database at version 3.02.01 with Service Pack B and converting it to CCURE 9000 version 1.92 CCURE 800/8000 to CCURE 9000 migration involves taking an existing and functional CCURE 800/8000 database at version 9.x and converting it to CCURE 9000 version 1.92 The migration strategy utilises the features of the Import/Export of CCURE 9000. The Import/Export allows the user to select the portions of the migrating system required to move to the CCURE 9000 database. The data must be exported from the migrating database into an XML format and imported into an empty CCURE 9000 using the import/export facility. Currently, the information converted from the migrating database and created in the CCURE 9000 database will consist of the following objects: Cardholders (Personnel) -- includes portraits and signatures Cards relating to cardholders (credentials) Access levels (clearances) Time periods (schedules) Readers Doors Inputs Outputs Ethernet ISC and iSTAR controllers All modules (boards) attached to controllers Door groups (CCURE 800/8000 only) Notes: Input/Output linking needs to be completed manually. The Import/Export will only bring in the Inputs and Outputs but will not link them. All CCURE 800/8000 events will also have to be re-created manually. This will be completed in the field. Due to the differences between iSecure Pro and CCURE 9000, the following objects have fields which are not 100% converted during migration from iSecure Pro: Cardholders (personnel) Card (credential) ISC controller Inputs, outputs, readers and doors At this time, the following items are not migrated using the migration tool: Events Partitions Regions Policies Alarm links, map links, I/O links, door links Card formats Historical logs Badge layout Operators and privileges Video including cameras, protocols, switchers ASCII /bi-directional Fire integration (iSecure Pro only) Reports Elevator control Holidays
Reports will not be migrated and the user must retain the reports on the old system for as long as they wish to run them. Licensing of the migration utility will be done through the exporting of data from each database. An authorisation key will be generated that is unique to each iSecure or CCURE 800/8000 database.
Usage of the migration utility on live installations is a licensable option to each iSecure or C.CURE 800/8000 licensed site. The license cost of the option varies with the size of the target C.CURE 9000 installation. Professional services are also initially required for supporting the migration in the field or for Software House to undertake the complete migration from either existing iSecure or CCURE 800/8000 site. Please contact your local ACVS Regional Manager before purchase to acquire a site specific professional services quotation.
Product Codes
CC9000-MTL CC9000-MTM CC9000-MTN CC9000-MTQ CC9000-MTR CC9000-MTS CC9000-MTP Migration Migration Migration Migration Migration Migration Migration Utility Utility Utility Utility Utility Utility Utility for for for for for for for CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE CCURE 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 Series Series Series Series Series Series Series L M N Q R S P
Chapter 5.1 Page 8
02/12
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 CCURE 9000 Web Client

Features
Provides remote access to CCURE 9000 from virtually any computer with an Internet browser Manage personnel, display dynamic views, and monitor system activity Lock/unlock doors and activate events using manual actions Show journal history and audit trail activity through preconfigured dynamic views Intuitive graphical-user interface Easy deployment and installation Share a single database while retaining security and privacy of data through database partitioning Simple management of access-level permissions 128-bit AES encryption using SSL for secure communication between server and clients Single sign-on utilizes Microsoft Windows Authentication to maintain integrity of IT security Up to 50 simultaneous clients Built using the latest Microsoft standards and platforms
CCURE 9000 Web Client provides simplicity and accessibility of your CCURE 9000 Security and Event Management System by giving you remote access to CCURE 9000 using an Internet browser. With CCURE 9000 Web Client you can manage personnel records, display dynamic views of doors, readers, inputs/outputs, and controllers, and monitor system activity from within a facility or anywhere in the world. You can perform a wide-range of tasks such as creating/modifying cardholders and monitoring alarms/events while away from your workstation. Its a simple and secure way to deploy, monitor, and control the CCURE 9000 system from any location. Built using the latest Microsoft standard tools and platforms, CCURE 9000 Web Client is easy to administer and navigate with an intuitive layout and clear, consistent navigation panes. There is no need to install additional software.
Web Client That Makes a Different
You can log on to the Web Client using the same unique logon/password you already use for CCURE 9000, which reduces management of user accounts. You can add, delete, and modify personnel records, clearances, and credentials, as well as enable and disable cards. Validating whether an individual has or does not have access to a facility, a particular area within a facility, or a particular door has never been easier. To streamline productivity and balance both responsibility and workload, corporate security administrators can disseminate control to individual department managers, allowing them to grant access to the physical areas for which they are responsible wherever they may reside. This saves time by eliminating the need for intervention by security administration in order to assign or remove access privileges for each employee. CCURE 9000 Web Client is fast and easy, and its reassuring knowing that you can connect to CCURE 9000 from anywhere and at anytime.
02/12
Chapter 5.1 Page 9

CCURE 9000 Web Client Minimum System Requirements Supported Browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 7, Mozilla Firefox v3.0.5 or v3.0.11, Google Chrome v2.0.172.31 Supported Client Operating System Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista; any client that supports Silverlight 2.0 and 3.0 Microsoft Silverlight version v2.0 and higher CCURE 9000 Server Minimum System Requirements Supported Server Operating System Windows Server 2003 Standard SP2, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista Supported Web Server MS IIS v5.10, v6.0, v7.0 CCURE 9000 version 1.92 and higher Maximum Simultaneous Client Connections to Server Up to 50 (CCURE 9000 license must include the same number of simultaneous Web Clients) Maximum Number of Configured Users Unlimited Client to Server Encryption SSL, 128-bit AES Authentication Single Sign-on using Windows Authentication Audit Trail User activities logged in central CCURE 9000 database Database Partitioning Yes Personnel Management
Product Code
CC9000-ADDCLIW One additional CCURE 9000 client license
Activity Viewer
Chapter 5.1 Page 10
02/12
Chapter 5.1 - CCure 9000 CCURE 9000 MXZ

Features
Utilises BACnet, the industry-standard communications protocol for building automation and control networks Seamless integration of CCURE 9000 with the Tyco MZX Range of Fire Panels Fire alarms are reported instantly on the CCURE 9000 Event Monitoring station Easily produce status reports on your system and fire detection points Object icons on the graphical CAD-based maps like fire panels, points and zones give the operator a complete overview Fire alarm events can trigger Audio-visual notifications send out information Email Flexible reporting tools with pre-defined reports, email on event, launch on schedule MZX Fire detection panels are approved in more than 17 EMEA Countries Simplified configuration through automatic import of Fire panel configurations Trigger CCTV and video recording upon the activation of a fire alarm device One Security Management Platform for Fire, Burglar Alarm system, Video Integration, Access Control and many more Automated reporting of object status, for example Smoke detector dirtiness
CCURE 9000 MZX Fire Detection integration

CCURE 9000 is a powerful security and event management system that provides IT standard tools and innovative architecture. This allows users to manage and monitor multiple security and emergency applications from one integrated security system. This integrated CCURE 9000 security system built on Microsofts sophisticated .NET v4 technology offers security staff a flexible, efficient, fast and secure working environment, both locally and remotely. CCURE 9000 provides unsurpassed integration capabilities, advanced alarm routing, remote access for administration and monitoring. CCURE 9000 supports multiple layouts and monitoring station screens in the same window. This enables you to focus on system activity, while another screen displays your live video. CCURE 9000 offers preconfigured layouts or an empty palette for each administrator to customise. Drag and drop different viewers some that represent objects like fire detection points or intrusion zones, live video tours and specific types of activities, live camera views, dynamic views of system activity or configuration data. The most powerful thing about the monitoring station is that each screen is live and interactive. With appropriate permissions, you can manipulate data fields, change views, navigate around maps, launch a video tour, and perform quick searches and queries all from the same interface in real time. Import CAD (.dwg, .dxf) or raster files (.bmp, .jpg, etc.) and populate complex floor plans with your security objects. All original CAD layers are immediately visible or can be hidden for easy viewing. 02/12 Create new layers, and drag and drop security objects such as cameras, tours, inputs/outputs and more directly to your drawing with scalable icons. One-click magnification and tracking views provide the ability to manage and navigate around your floor plans. For expansion projects, easily update or replace your CAD drawings without having to add security icons again. Speed and accuracy in alarm handling is of paramount importance, CCURE 9000 provides a clear view of events and alarms, allowing the operator to take appropriate actions. All instructions can be stored in CCURE 9000 and called-up when an alarm event occurs. The operator can attach action log messages to the events. Different notifications can be defined for events or incidents. These notifications are sent via email to a person or predefined group of people when an event occurs. In the case of a fire alarm event, a roll call report can be printed and or emailed. Run pre-defined reports by an event or by schedule and automatically send via email. These reports can be various subjects, historical alarm notifications, system object status, detector dirtiness notifications to name but a few. Expand the security management system as your business grows. CCURE 9000 is totally scaleable from a single site, single workstation solution up to an Enterprise Security management system with multiple workstations and remote central monitoring. Software House connected program provides integration to various security or building facility products and is continuing to expand. For a complete list of available integrations please visit www.swhouse.com
Chapter 5.1 Page 11

Zone alarms, point alarms from fire inputs Normal Alarm Isolation-Bypass Fault Dirtiness MZX panel faults, faults from zones and points Normal Alarm Isolation-Bypass Fault Dirtiness Mains fault, system faults Pre-alarms and alarm warnings Isolations of zones, loop points, R-Bus and local I/O points Day mode Analogue values of automatic detectors Sound silence
How does CCURE 9000 MZX Fire Detection Interface work?

The CCURE 9000 and MZX fire panel system integration supports the secondary annunciation of the devices, panel events and panel health status data. The integration into CCURE 9000 is based on the BACnet protocol. Data coming from the MZX fire panels is passed through a BACnet converter. The integration establishes and maintains the connection to the BACnet converter. Connection type, panel and point data (inclusive, name, model, status) will be acquired into CCURE 9000. The MZX fire interface support multiple device types connected to the MZX fire detection panels such as fire sensors, fire zones, call points and their corresponding statuses include:
Version Compatibility
CCURE 9000: Versions 2.02, Stand Alone or parts of Enterprise solution, SAS CCURE 9000 Driver for MZX Panel: 1.0.45.0 or higher MZX Panel: Panels which support MX Speak 3.x, 4.x and 5.x, including MX1000, MX4000, T2000, ZX1, ZX4, MZX125, MZX250, MZX251, MZX252, MZX2-100 and MZX2-200, MZX250 and MX4000 MZX Panel Firmware: Panel firmware revision: 8.0 and higher MZX Consys version: 19 and higher MZX BACnet: Interface version 1.1 and higher MZX BACNET Device UC-7101: The UC-7101 BACnet converter is a mini RISC-based embedded computer which converts fire data to the BACnet communications protocol. A single MZX panel has the ability to be connected to the UC-7101, multiple panels can be connected to a single BACnet converter with the use of TLI800 network cards, each converter can support 2000 points, the maximum converters that can be used is 3 so the maximum is 6000 points.
MZX fire detection system panels transmit data in native MX Speak protocol. A single MZX BACnet device will convert and transmit MX Speak panel alarms over ethernet. CCURE 9000 receives the information over the network for processing and display on the CCURE 9000 workstations. The MZX integration is free of charge. Once the feature is enabled and the driver installed the administration menu shows the MZX BACnet converter configuration in the hardware folder. The configuration is easy and straight forward, once the connection type and IP address is entered, CCURE 9000 is ready to acquire the object data from the MZX BACnet converter. Fire alarms are sent to CCURE 9000 where they can be acknowledged, fire icons can be placed onto the graphical maps next to the access control readers and camera locations. Fire alarms can be configured to activate other system components such as CCTV Matrix, NVRs or DVRs. Chapter 5.1 Page 12
02/12

Single Panel Configuration BACnet Interface Protocol
Multiple Panel Configuration BACnet Interface Protocol TLI800EN
System Software Requirements CCURE 9000 Server Recommended Software Operating System Series L-N Windows 7 Professional (32- and 64-bit)2 Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit)2 Windows Server 2008 Standard and Enterprise Windows Server 2003 Standard SP2 or later Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2 or later Windows XP Professional SP3 or later Series P-S Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit)2 Windows Server 2008 Standard and Enterprise Windows Server 2003 Standard SP2 or later Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2 or later CCURE 9000 Client Workstation Recommended Software Operating System Windows 7 Professional (32- and 64-bit)2 Windows Vista Business SP1 or later Windows Vista Enterprise SP1 or later Windows XP Professional SP3 or later Server 2003 Standard SP2 or later Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2 or later
(2) Refer to the Software House Connected Compatibility Matrix on www.swhouse.com to confirm the supported versions of CCURE 9000
Product Code
CC9000-MZX
MZX Technology Fire Panels integration option for CCURE 9000
02/12
Chapter 5.1 Page 13
Chapter 5.1 Page 14
02/12
Chapter 5.2 - CCure 9000 CCURE Mobile

Features
Includes contact and contactless wireless multi-format access card reader Provides quick identity verification for various remote locations Integrates with the CCURE 9000 security and event management system in Live or Remote mode Easy-to-read, high resolution colour digital touchscreen display with stylus Compact and lightweight design for easy mobility Eight hour extended long life Li-Polymer battery Internal database encrypted and password-protected with a unique password/key using Microsoft SQL Server CE Supports internal wireless communication for data transmission from CCURE 9000 Supports HID (26- and 37-bit), MIFARE CSN, and iCLASS CSN card formats Operational without controllers or panels
Mobile Security Solution

Software House CCURE Mobile is a unique and completely portable solution that is based on the CCURE 9000 Security and Event Management System. This solution provides you with a multi-format access card reader that doesnt need to be wired to an access control system. Entrances can be created anywhere a system is required on a bus, train, boat, at a specified mustering point, or as a temporary entrance gate at a variety of off-site locations. The device reads contact and contactless smart cards and HID proximity cards and verifies them against a downloaded versionof a CCURE 9000 personnel database or to the real-time database at the host. Confirm cardholder identity in real time in Live mode when the device is connected to the CCURE 9000 host using a network connection. When the device is used in the field where there is no access to the CCURE 9000 system, you can use Remote mode to store the database locally and then synchronize with the host at a later time when a network connection is available. The device is lightweight and compact for easy transport to any location. The durable, weatherproof design is made to withstand high impact and harsh environments. A large, high resolution colour digital touchscreen display provides exceptional clarity in direct sunlight and low-light environments. The unit includes encryption and is password-protected so that personnel records and credentials will not be compromised. With an extended life Li-Polymer battery you are assured many hours of uninterrupted service. Card Formats Supported ISO 14443 A/B, 13.56 MHz and ISO 7816 iCLASS serial number (64-bit proximity contactless or contact) MIFARE serial number (32-bit proximity contactless or contact) MIFARE DESFire serial number (64-bit proximity contactless or contact) HID 125 KHz proximity 26-bit (industry standard, 8-bit facility code, 16-bit card number, plus 2-bit parity bits) 37-bit (Software House proprietary, 10-bit facility code, 6-bit site code, 16-bit card number, plus 2-bit parity bits)
01/11
Chapter 5.2 Page 1

Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) 185 x 185 x 50 mm Weight 0.91 kg with one battery; 1.13 kg with optional second battery Di spl ay 88.9 mm (3.5 in) colour digital trans flective touch screen with stylus, 320 x 240 QVGA resolution Operating System Compatibility Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Memory 64 MB RAM, 2 GB CF storage External CF Card 1 GB Keypad 5-button backlit rubber keypad; power button and four function keys Fingerprint Sensor1 500 dpi capacitive solid-state sensor 12.5 x 15.0 mm sensor area Interface Serial, USB host (2), CF slots (one external, one internal), LAN Internal Wireless WiFi (802.11g) Grip Dual grip battery cover with tethered styles Electrical Battery High capacity, rechargeable and user replaceable 4000 mAh LiPolymer battery (eight hours of normal use) Power Supply With AC Adapter/Charger 100-240 VAC, 500-600 Hz With Optional Auto Adapter/Charger 12-19 VDC Regulatory Safety CE low voltage directive (72/73/EEC) EN 60950:2000 EMC CE EMC directive (89/336/EEC)/(93/68/EEC) EN 55022:1998 & EN 55024:1998 R&TTE Compliance under EN 300330 & EN 301489-03 NRTL TV Rheinland of North America, Inc.
Product Codes
CC9000-MOB-K1-M CCURE Mobile software and hardware kit, MIFARE only CC9000-MOB-K2-MH CCURE Mobile software and hardware kit, MIFARE and HID Proximity CC9000-MOB-K3-I CCURE Mobile software and hardware kit, iCLASS only CC9000-MOB-K4-IH CCURE Mobile software and hardware kit, iCLASS and HID Proximity CC9000-MOB-BAT CCURE Mobile spare 4000 mAh battery CC9000-MOB-CHCCURE Mobile charging station CC9000-MOB-CHS CCURE Mobile spare charger/serial cable CC9000-MOB-STY CCURE Mobile spare stylus CCURE Mobile vehicle power CC9000-MOB-VPWR charger CC9000-MOB-ACEU CCURE Mobile power module European plug CC9000-MOB-ACUK CCURE Mobile power module UK plug CC9000-MOB-ACUS CCURE Mobile power module US plug CC9000-MOB-BAG CCURE Mobile power module carry Bag CC9000-MOB-RING CCURE Mobile D Ring CC9000-MOB-STRAP CCURE Mobile carry strap
Chapter 5.2 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 6.1 CCure 9000 Siteserver CCure 9000 Siteserver

Features
Ready-to-go out-of-the box with pre-installed CCURE 9000 software Cost-effective, entry-level access control solution reduces total installation costs with pre-installed OS and software Efficient design reduces IT management costs with less time required updating software Supports up to 32 readers Intuitive CCURE 9000 Web Client simplifies operator training Includes pre-configured database of readers, doors, controllers, and other standard objects to reduce setup time 16 GB Solid State Drive (SSD) provides enhanced system reliability Four independent Ethernet LAN ports for private subnets protect against system intrusion Compatible with wide-range of Software House iSTAR controllers, including the powerful iSTAR Edge tworeader IP door controller, and RM readers Flexible mounting options desktop, wall-mount, or 19inch rack 12VDC power input allows unit to be powered directly from separate battery-backed security power supply
Network-Based Access Control System with Web Client

CCURE 9000 SiteServer is a powerful yet affordable access control solution, ideal for applications such as regional offices, retail outlets, schools, satellite building and healthcare facilities. CCURE 9000 SiteServer is a true network appliance and using an embedded OS, it offers web-based security and event management capable of controlling systems with up to 32 readers. By eliminating the need for a standard PC with its associated installation and management costs, CCURE 9000 SiteServer provides an even more cost-effective access control solution. CCURE 9000 SiteServer is pre-installed with the latest version of CCURE 9000 so there is no software to install; an IP network connection is all you need to harness the power of CCURE 9000 and get started. A CCURE 9000 SiteServer may be configured and managed using a standard CCURE workstation or, if system management is needed from a number of locations, a standard web-browser like Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox or Google Chrome can logon to the system. This saves the need to install dedicated workstation software onto corporate computers and adds the freedom possibilities of secure system management from virtually any location. CCURE 9000 SiteServer is delivered with pre-installed software which means you spend less time installing and configuring applications, gathering license data and installing service packs. CCURE 9000 SiteServer also includes a pre-configured database which further reduces the time needed to configure and program doors, clearances, schedules, alarms and other system objects. Add the fact that the software is intuitive and user-friendly and operator training is greatly simplified. A 16 GB Solid State Drive (SSD) provides enhanced system reliability because, with no moving parts, solid-state drives are less fragile than hard disks which can wear out with repetitive use. Access time and latency are low as there are no mechanical delays. CCURE 9000 SiteServer can be deployed in a desktop, rack-mount, or wall-mount configuration, and is compatible with a wide-range of Software House door controllers and RM readers including the iSTAR Edge two-reader IP door controller. Fully-featured CCURE 9000 software allows CCURE 9000 SiteServer to provide powerful security and event management features in a compact, network appliance.
01/11
Chapter 6.1 Page 1
Chapter 6.1 CCure 9000 Siteserver

Customisable Monitoring Station Pre-configured layouts allow CCURE 9000 SiteServer to be rapidly deployed while the flexibility of an empty palette which each administrator can customise to their own preference means that you get the best of both worlds. Within the Monitoring Station, you can drag and drop different viewers, for example objects like video tours and specific types of activities, live camera views, dynamic views of system activity or configuration data, even the Windows Explorer bar to make navigation very easy. The most powerful thing about the Monitoring Station is that each pane is live and interactive. With appropriate permissions, you can manipulate data fields and change views, navigate around maps, launch a video tour, perform quick searches and queriesall in real time, all from one interface. Scalable, Editable Maps Import CAD (.dwg, .dxf) or raster files (.bmp, .jpg, etc.) and populate complex floor plans with your security objects. All original CAD layers are immediately visible or can be hidden for easy viewing. Create new layers and drag and drop security objects such as cameras, tours, inputs/ outputs, and more directly to your drawing with scalable icons. One-click magnification and tracking views provide the ability to manage and navigate around your floor plans. For expansion projects, easily update or replace your CAD drawings without having to add security icons again. Intrusion Zones and Keypad Commands Grouping inputs and doors into intrusion zones allows you to easily arm and disarm alarm monitoring points (inputs) in a defined area. An entire facility or a portion thereof may comprise an intrusion zone. Grouping inputs and doors into intrusion zones allows easy collective arming and disarming of inputs, as well as locking and unlocking groups of doors while displaying their current mode and status. Leveraging the intrusion zone feature, keypad commands allow a user to remotely activate cameras, doors, and other events as well as trigger a duress call right from a reader keypad. Additionally, triggering a duress call, sounding an alarm, and more can be performed all from a reader keypad connected to an iSTAR controller. Keypad commands can be configured to require card presentation and/or a PIN to validate the command. Exceptionally Reliable Security CCURE 9000 provides FIPS 197-approved encrypted communication between both the CCURE 9000 SiteServer appliance and clients, and between iSTAR Edge and iSTAR eX controllers, while Microsoft Windows single sign-on, field-level audit, and authentication of historical log content feature a digital signature on each event. This allows administrators to detect additions, modifications, or deletions of data which is critical in order to maintain compliance with regulations, such as Sarbanes-Oxley, HIPAA, and 21-CFR Part 11. CCURE 9000 SiteServer supports extended card numbers which allow users in government applications to comply with certain federal guidelines that require a multi-field CHUID. Additionally, CCURE 9000 SiteServer can be used in a TWIC environment Easily Create Sophisticated Badges The What You See is What You Get (WYSIWYG) badge designer within CCURE ID offers superior control over colour and easy manipulation of graphics. With a powerful Expression Builder, you can easily add text from the CCURE database, e.g. department, to your design and simplify badge creation. Uncomplicated query features allow you to query a common field and then print those cards found by the query in one batch. With the smart card enrolment solution, you can read and/or reprogram multiple smart card formats such as MIFARE (1K & 4K cards), iCLASS, and DESFire. These cards can be programmed with a wide range of data depending on the protocol of each card type for critical security purposes and/or value add-ons such as vending, parking, etc. Refer to the CCURE ID data sheet on www.swhouse.com for more detailed information.
Highly Secure Database Partitioning Independent companies can share a single database while, at the same time, partitioning that database to maintain the security and privacy of their individual organization. Users can specify to which multiple partitions they share privileges - doors, clearances, etc. The partitioning of information includes everything from personnel to video and hardware configuration. Control Areas with Anti-Passback With anti-passback, you can enhance security by preventing an authorised user from presenting a credential to access an area, and then passing it back to an unauthorised user, who then uses the same credential to access the building. The more secure, hard anti-passback requires both an entry and exit reader to enable the system to determine whether a card is in or out of an anti-passback-protected area while timed anti-passback allows an authorized user to be bound by anti-passback restrictions only for a specific amount of time. You can even configure the system to activate events such as sounding an alarm for anti-passback entry and exit violations.
Chapter 6.1 Page 2
01/11

Remote Web Capabilities Remote connection to CCURE 9000 SiteServer is effortless using CCURE 9000 Web Client. Using an Internet browser, you can manage personnel records, display dynamic views of doors, readers, inputs/outputs, and controllers, and monitor system activity from within a facility or anywhere in the world. You can perform a wide-range of tasks such as creating/modifying cardholders and monitoring alarms/events while away from your workstation. Its a simple and secure way to deploy, monitor, Private Subnets Protect Against System Intrusion CCURE 9000 SiteServer is equipped with four independent Ethernet LAN ports for separate subnets. Only one LAN port is required to be connected to the corporate network, while your door controllers can be connected to the remaining ports, making those ports invisible to the main network and thus out of sight of potential hackers. Additionally, since only one LAN port is connected to the main network, only one IP address is necessary for the whole system, making CCURE 9000 SiteServer a more cost-effective solution.
CCURE 9000 SiteServer rear view showing network connections
System Diagrams Traditional Network Architecture
CCURE 9000 SiteServer
CCURE 9000 W CCURE 9000 SiteServer web Client
Badging Client
iSTAR Edge
iSTAR Edge
iSTAR Edge iSTAR Pro
Network Architecture using Private Subnets
Badging Client
CCURE 9000 Web Client
CCURE 9000 SiteServer
iSTAR Edge
iSTAR Edge
iSTAR Edge
01/11
Chapter 6.1 Page 3

CCURE SiteServer Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) 44 x 220 x 151 mm Weight 2.5 kg Chassis Material Steel Form Factor 1U, desktop Mounting Options Desktop; 19-inch rack-mount brackets and wall-mount brackets available LED Indicators Power, SDD, Ethernet link/act with transfer rate Operational CPU Intel Pentium M processor, 1.7 GHz Chipset Intel 915 GME and Intel ICH6M Memory 2 GB SODIMM DDR2 400/533 Non-volatile Storage 1 x 2.5 inch SATA, 16 GB MLC Solid State Drive (SSD) Communications Four 10/100/1GB Ethernet ports, each port tied to an independent MAC/NIC Encryption AES 256, FIPS 197 listed Input/Output VGA DB9 connector, 2 x USB connector, 4 x RJ-45 Ethernet connector, 1 x 12VDC-in power; all connectors are located in the rear of the unit. USB Two (rear panel) MTBF 100,000 hours Operating System Windows XP embedded Database Microsoft SQL Express Languages Supported Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, French, German, Polish, and Spanish Environmental Operating Temperature 0 to 50C Storage Temperature -20 to 70C Humidity 10 95% RH, noncondensing Electrical Power to Unit 12V, 5A from power adapter Power Adaptor (included) 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2A Regulatory Agency Certifications FIPS 197, UL-60950, EN-60950, IEC60950, EN-55022, EN-55024, C-Tick, CE, FCC Part 15 Class A/B Environmental RoHS, WEEE CCURE 9000 Web Client Minimum System Requirements Browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8; Mozilla Firefox v3.0.5 and higher; Google Chrome v2.0.172.31 and higher Client Operating Systems Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista Microsoft Silverlight Version 2.0 and higher
Product Codes
SITESVR-8 SITESVR-16 SITESVR-32 SITESVR-BR SITESVR-BW CCURE 9000 SiteServer, supports eight readers CCURE 9000 SiteServer, supports 16 readers CCURE 9000 SiteServer, supports 32 readers CCURE 9000 SiteServer mounting brackets, 19-inch rack-mount CCURE 9000 SiteServer mounting brackets, wall-mount
CCURE 9000 SiteServer System Capacities SiteServer Model # of Online Readers # of Online Inputs # of Online Outputs # of Credentials # of Simultaneous Clients # of Standard Badging Clients # of Simultaneous Web Clients Intellex video integration VideoEdge integration SITESVR-8 8 64 64 7,000 6 1 3 included included SITESVR-16 16 64 64 7,000 6 1 3 included included SITESVR-32 32 128 128 12,000 9 1 5 included included
NOTE: CCURE 9000 SiteServer can be used as a client, using local display/keyboard/mouse connected to the VGA port and USB ports. For external CCURE 9000 client workstations, refer to the CCURE 9000 Installation Guide for minimum hardware and software specifications.
Chapter 6.1 Page 4
01/11
Chapter 7.1- CCure Hardware and Common Devices Communication Devices

We have a selection of communication devices to meet your requirements.
Features
Provides communication up to 1,200m Allows up to 16 apCs on a data line Required for systems with no LAN connection Requires 240Vac supply
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Product Description

RS-232 to RS-485 converter. Connects to PC serial port for RS-485 comms line. Up to 1,200m with a maximum of 16 apCs There is no stock coded converter for the EMEA market. This will need to be ordered NSL (non stock listed)
Terminal Servers Features

LAN-attached serial port expansion Selectable for RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 protocols
The availability of the Lantronix UDS Devices server to increase data accessibility and remote management to thousands of devices that connect to the network. The UDS-1100 server allows almost any device with a serial port RS-232 to connect to Ethernet networks quickly and costeffectively.
Product Code
UDS-1100 UDS-1100 Lantronix TCP/IP to Serial communication convertor. Software selectable RS-232, RS-422 or RS485
01/11
Chapter 7.1 Page 1
Chapter 7.1- CCure Hardware and Common Devices
Chapter 7.1 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts Controllers

Software House offers a wide selection of intelligent network controllers - door controllers and alarm monitoring panels that form the basic building blocks of any CoCURE security management system. Renowned for their reliability and their sophisticated access control features, Software House intelligent network controllers are designed to meet even the most demanding security applications. apC/L apC/L is an economical 2-door solution for parking garages, small office buildings, retail outlets and apartment complexes, or for remote site monitoring. apC/L supports RM readers and RM modules only (it does not support direct-wired Wiegand readers).
apC/8X apC/8X is a versatile 8-door controller, featuring modular architecture with optional add-on boards for direct Wiegand wiring or the distributed RM bus. apC/8X has up to 4 MB RAM, supporting up to 160,000 cardholders.
iSTAR eX iSTAR eX supports up to four doors. It features strong 256-bit AES encryption, certified per FIPS 197 and is the perfect solution for security-critical government applications. iSTAR eX is listed for FIPS 140-2, the US government's most rigorous standard for cryptographic products. It also features dual on-board Ethernet ports and a built-in UPS/battery back-up system. Like iSTAR Pro, iSTAR eX includes on-board wiring for inputs, outputs, and Wiegand readers, while at the same time offering connections to the distributed RM bus.
iSTAR Pro iSTAR Pro is available in either 8- or 16-door configurations. It features on-board Ethernet, optional dial-up modem communications, full DHCP and WINS support, and up to 128 MB memory, enough to store over 1,000,000 cardholders. iSTAR Pro includes on-board wiring for inputs, outputs, and Wiegand readers, while at the same time offering connections to the distributed RM bus. The rack-mountable version of iSTAR Pro offers a sleek, 2U design lowering overall installation costs
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 1
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts
iSTAR Pro/iSTAR Pro Rack Mount Networking Embedded 10bT Ethernet port DHCP support for automatically obtaining IP addresses Supports redundant communications paths dial-up, serial (utilizing RAS) or Ethernet Peer to peer with master/slave designations (advanced clustering) Global anti-passback support Asynchronous communication with the host
iSTAR eX Embedded dual Ethernet port 10/100bT auto sensing DHCP support for automatically obtaining IP addresses Supports redundant Ethernet communications paths
apC/8X For Ethernet integration, optional terminal server available for networking Serial and dialup communication support
Communications
Encryption
RC4 encryption, 128-bit
Memory
Readers Input/Output
64 MB RAM standard Field upgradeable to 128MB using industry standard DIMM Module 8-16 reader support Max. 192 inputs (all supervised), 176 outputs per controller
Peer to peer with master/slave Client/server host designations (advanced clustering dependent Local anti-passback with iSTAR eX units only) Global anti-passback support support (all readers Asynchronous communication must be on same apC with the host Synchronous communications with the host AES 256-bit encryption, FIPS 197 Proprietary 64-bit listed, with custom key encryption management and digital certificates 64 MB RAM standard (non 4 MB RAM maximum expandable) (factory upgradeable) 4- or 8 reader support Max. 88 inputs (all supervised), 80 outputs per controller 8 reader support Max 128 inputs (of which, 120 are supervised, 192 outputs per panel Optional power supply required for battery backup
Power
Optional power supply required for battery backup (wall mount only)
Built-in UPS provides up to 4 hours full operational backup time
Expansion Service
Configuration set up and diagnostics vis a web browser on any LAN networked computer LCD for diagnostics and configuration support PCMCIA expansionfor network card, modem, compact flash
Configuration set upand diagnostics vis a web browser on any LAN networked computer LCD for diagnostics and configuration support Compact flash memory for database back up (standard)
apC diagnostic tool via serial connection External modem optional
Dial up
Automatic fall back to dial up Automatic fall back to dial up No automatic fall back to communications or second communications or second dial up communications Ethernet port of network goes down Ethernet port of network goes down Enhanced Intrusion Zones an keypad commands Extended card formats and CHUID support No Asset Management Enhanced Intrusion Zones an keypad commands Extended card formats and CHUID support No Asset Management Enhanced Intrusion Zones an kyepad commands No support for extended card formats ,32-bit card number max No Asset Management
Additional Features
Chapter 7.2 Page 2
03/11

iSTAR Basic Configuration
Host Computer (Server) Member
iSTAR Beldon 8303 Telephone line RAS Server iSTAR Modem Modem RS-232 Soft.Max Master CAT 5/6 Cluster B Member iSTAR CAT 5/6 Hub
TCP/P
Ethernet
CAT 5/6 TCP/P
CAT 5/6
CAT 5/6
iSTAR
iSTAR
iSTAR
Master
Member Cluster A
Member
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 3
Host Computer (Server) apC8X or apC/L
Beldon 985 RS-232 50ft Max
Up to 10 in an RS-485 chain
Beldon 985 RS-232 232-485 Converter RS-485 (4000ft total) apC8X or apC/L
apC8X or apC/L
apC8X or apC/L
Beldon 8303 Telephone Dial or Leased Line
Beldon 8303
RS-232 Modem
Modem
RS-232
apC8X or apC/L
Ethernet
apCL Basic Configuration
CAT 5/6
CAT 5/6 Beldon 9842
Up to 6 in an RS-485 chain
RS-232
RS-485
RS-485
RS-485
Chapter 7.2 Page 4
apC8X or apC/L
Beldon 9855
Belden 9842 Terminal Server RS-232 Terminal Server RS-232 apC8X or apC/L
Belden 9842
apC8X or apC/L
apC8X or apC/L
03/11
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts apC/L Controller

Features
Fast, stand-alone processing 255 time commands for automatic input, output, and reader mode control Support for magnetic tape, Wiegand, and proximity card technologies Card, keypad, or card and keypad access support Reader-by-reader support for variable card formats, site codes, company codes, and card technologies
apC/L Advanced Processing Controller

The apC/L is an intelligent access control and alarm monitoring control panel which serves as a basic building block for all of the CCURE security management systems. It is a two-door version panel making it an economical solution for parking garages, small office buildings, retail outlets, and apartment complexes, or for remote site monitoring. Like the apC/8X, the apC/L has many innovative design features which make it more reliable, easier to service, and less expensive to own than other 2-door intelligent field panels. Multiple card reader technologies and card formats can be used on the same apC/L. This makes it ideal for single and multiple tenant applications and for retrofitting existing systems. In addition, the bus architecture reduces wiring requirements and overall installation costs. The apC/L offers advanced technology, flexibility, and low cost of ownership. apC/L Memory The apC/L event storage capacity is automatically adjusted according to the memory required for storing cardholder information. Increasing the number of cardholder records stored decreases the number of events (transactions) that can be held. Adding optional features may reduce the number of cardholder records and event storage space as the record size increases. Additional Benefits Dynamic memory allocation between card and events storage Communication between host and apC/L through network connection (via com or network ports) or dial-up mode Up to 80 hours onboard memory retention in case of power failure Integrated alarm control Battery backup option 2-wire supervised input capability with optional input modules Flash memory Internal activation and expiration dates for cardholders Real time full year clock and calendar
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 5

apC/L Advanced Processing Controller contd Card to Transaction Storage
RAM SIZE 512 # of Cardholder Records 15,000 12,500 10,000 7,500 5,000 # of Events (Transactions) 12,200 18,700 25,200 31,700 38,200
Configuration Options
Maximum Number Modules Modules per Limit Standard apC/L 1 Optional Modules Input Module 4 Output Module 4 RM1Reader and RM-42 2
1
Reader Ports 2 RS 485
Readers 2
Inputs 8 Class A Supervised 2 Class A Supervised
Outputs 2 8 22
Use Belden Part Number specified or equivalent product. 2 Not required if powered locally.
Wall Transformer Output Power Consumption Auxiliary Hardware Mechanical Height Width Depth Weight apC/L Weight apC/L and Battery Housing Environmental Operating Storage Operating and Storage with Battery 230 VAC 60 Hz 18 VAC at 3.3 Amp max Less than 10 Watts typical Relay contacts rated at 30 V AC/DC 1 Amp inductive, 2 Amps non-inductive 35.56 cm 20.32 cm 8.26 cm 3.71 kg 5.40 kg 16 AWG metal wall mounted locking cabinet with tamper switches on door and rear 0 to 70C -25 to 85C 0 to 50C
Product Codes
AS0101-003 apC/L, 2 readers, 512K memory FLASH Memory. Need an external Power supply AS0101-003MB apC/L motherboard only, 512K Memory FLASH (spare) AS0101-NPS apC/L, 2 reader controller with enclosure No PCB FW-APCL Firmware upgrade kit for apC/L (flash)
Chapter 7.2 Page 6
03/11
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts apC/8X

Features
Fast, stand-alone processing with flash ROM support Distributed database processing for up to 160,000 card holders with optional expansion 255 time commands for automatic input, output, and reader mode control Support for magnetic stripe, Wiegand, and proximity card technologies Card, keypad, or card and keypad access support Reader-by-reader support for variable card formats, site codes, company codes, and card technologies 2-wire supervised input capability
apC/8X Advanced Processing Controller

The apC/8X Advanced Processing Controllers are intelligent access control and alarm monitoring panels which serve as the basic building block for all Software House proprietary security management systems. Many innovative design features make the apC/8X more reliable, easier to service and less expensive to own than other intelligent field panels. The apC/8X is available with up to 4MB static RAM and 4MB EPROM and flash ROM. The panels CMOS static RAM consumes minimal power for data storage, allowing longer onboard memory preservation. The flash ROM makes firmware updates quick and easy. The apC/8X supports optional add-on modules. The modular design along with its innovative firmware make the apC/8X a powerful and flexible platform for a wide variety of access control, alarm monitoring, and integrated security applications. Multiple card technologies and card formats can be used on the same apC/8X, making it ideal for single and multiple tenant applications and for retrofit of existing systems. The apC/8X bus architecture reduces wiring requirements and overall installation costs. Additional Benefits Elevator control Internal activation and expiration dates for cardholders Real time full-year clock and calendar Flash Memory Dynamic memory allocation between card and events . storage Software-linked inputs and outputs for off-line control Communication between host and apC/8X through . direct connect or dial-up mode Up to 80 hours onboard memory retention in case of . power failure Star, bus or combination star and bus reader configuration X.25, Ethernet, Token Ring support for specific configurations CE Compliant
Configuration Options
Module Standard Optional apC/8X Star Coupler1 WSPC1 Mini Star Coupler I/32 R/48
1
Maximum Number of Modules per unit 1 1 1 (set of 2 modules) 1 1 2
Reader Ports 1RS-485
Readers 8 Bus 8 Star or Bus 8 Star 8 Star or Bus
Inputs 8 Class A Supervised 8 Unsupervised 8 Class A Supervised
Outputs 8 8
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 7

apC/8X Controller contd
Card record Size Is a sum of cardholder information. Adding optional Software features, such as elevator control (10 bytes), anti-passback (4bytes), activation and Expiration dates (4 bytes each), and 32-bit Card records increase the size of a Card record and reduce the maximum cardholder per Controller. Average of 26 Bytes. Card Holder Events Size Events are the average number of events that an apC must store between uploads to the Host. A typical value is 1000. A calculation assume an event record memory of 10k bytes The values in this table are approximate. Your exact memory requirements depend on the number of cards and additional features in your system.
If SRAM is Number of Cardholders/No records with Elevator 37,400 77,000 158,000 Number Cardholders/records with one Elevator 27,00 56,000 114,000
1M 2M 4M
Electrical Specifications Autoranging input Output Power Consumption Auxiliary Hardware Mechanical Height Width Depth Weight Housing Environmental Operating Storage 90 to 260 VAC 47 to 440 Hz 12 VDC at 3.3 Amp max. Less than 40 Watts typical (12W typical with 4 RMs, 18W with 8 RMs) Relay contacts rated at 30 V AC/DC 2.5 Amp inductive, 5 Amps non-inductive 61.60 cm 41.91 cm 10.16 cm apC/8X and power supply10.49 kg apC/8X with Star Coupler Module and power supply 10.8 kg 16 AWG metal wall mounted cabinet with tamper switches on door and rear 0 to 70C -25 to 85C
Product Codes
apC/8X Controller AS0100-004 apC/8X 8 Readers 1 MB Memory, Flash ROM with Enclosure and power supply AS0100-008 apC/8X 8 Readers 2 MB Memory, Flash ROM with Enclosure and power supply AS0100- 016 apC/8X 8 Readers 4 MB Memory, Flash ROM with Enclosure and power supply apC/8X without power supply AS0100-004NPS apc/8X 1 MB Flash, Enclosure, No power supply AS0100-008NPS apc/8X, 8 readers, 2MB Flash, Enclosure, No power supply AS0100-004MB apC/8X 1MB Panel motherboard only FW-APC Firmware Upgrade Kit for apC (current firmware) (EPROM) AS0100-008MB apC/8X 2 MB Panel Motherboard AS0100-016MB apC/8X 4 MB Panel Motherboard apC/8X Internal mountable extension boards AS0020-01 apC/8X Mini-Star Coupler (8 readers) AS0054-00 Wiegand/proximity Star Coupler base module AS0054-01 Wiegand/proximity Star Couplerextension module (4 reader/4 input) apC/8X External extension boards AS0060-00 apC/8X power supply with cable (spare) AS0074-000 Eight output reader bus module AS0073-000 Eight input reader bus module
Chapter 7.2 Page 8
03/11

Features
Supports redundant back-up of configuration data Reliably backup your database to non-volatile flash memory DHCP support automatically assigns IP addresses for easy installation Supports multiple cards per cardholder and multiple formats for a highly secure, flexible solution Fully compatible with CCURE 800/8000 with full support of features such as government threat levels and event clearance filters Embedded Windows CE operating system
iSTAR Controllers
iSTAR Pro supports up to 16 readers iSTAR Pro is an intelligent, modular controller designed to integrate various event management applications on one controller, providing ease of installation and interoperability among vital applications. iSTAR Pro has a streamlined design that features the latest technology and a minimum of circuit boards to provide a highly dependable, cost-effective solution for enterprise-wide access control.
iSTAR Pro Electrical Power Input Power Output (of power supply 90 to 240 VAC, 47 to 440 Hz, 0.5 A 12 VDC at 3.3 A maximum
iSTAR eX supports up to 4 readers iSTAR eX is a four door Ethernet-ready controller that provides a FIPS 197- validated 256-bit encryption algorithm. This is ideal for government applications or for any enterprise looking for the highest security available in the industry today.
iSTAR eX 90 to 260 VAC, 47 to 440 Hz, 0.5 A 12 VDC at 6.5 A maximum; internal UPS provides up to 4 hours backup time Relay contacts rated at 30 V AC/DC 2.5 A inductive, 5.0 A non-inductive 61.6 x 41.9 x 10.2 cm 16.8 kg with battery 16 AWG metal wall mounted locking cabinet with tamper switches on door and rear UL294, UL1076, CE, FCC, RoHS 0 to 50C 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing -20 to 70C -20 to 40C iSTAR Pro 64 MB v4 or higher iSTAR Pro 128 MB up to v3.3 iSTAR Pro 128 MB v4 or higher iSTAR Ex 64 MB v4.1 or higher
Auxiliary Hardware Mechanical Dimensions (H x W x D) Unit Weight Construction
Relay contacts rated at 30 V AC/DC 2.5 A inductive, 5.0 A non-inductive 61.6 x 41.9 x 10.2 cm 10.6 kg 16 AWG metal wall mounted locking cabinet with tamper switches on door and rear UL294, UL1076, CE, FCC, RoHS 0 to 50c 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing -20 to 70C 0 to 50C iSTAR Pro 64 MB up to v3.3
Regulatory Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating and Storage with Battery Controller Capacity Firmware version Number of personnel records with 1 clearance, 1 card/person, 10-digit cards Number of personnel records with 10 clearances, 1 card/person, 10-digit cards Number of personnel records with 1 clearance, 5 cards/person, 10-digit cards Number of personnel records with 10 clearances, 5 cards/person, 40-digit cards
500,000
525,000
1,000,000
1,200,000
410,782
295.000
295.000
640,000
680,000
235,774
NA
170,000
NA
375,000
132,820
NA
110,000
NA
250,000
88,546
(a) Memory allocation within iSTAR Pro and iSTAR eX is dynamic and shared between cardholders, event storage, and configuration information. (b) To estimate how much space is needed for the personnel database in iSTAR Pro v4.0 and higher and iSTAR eX for multiple cards and/or extended card capacity, please refer to the CCURE 800 v9.1 README file located in the Member Center of www.swhouse.com. (c) iSTAR can support up to 5 cards for each cardholder record; each card is independent of each cardholder in the system.
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 9
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts iSTAR Pro

Features
Network Ready Rack Mount enclosure option saves wall space. Wide Range of Alarm Monitoring Flexibility in System Design Advanced Clustering for Unmatched Event Control and Monitoring On Board Battery Backup Easy to Install Automatic Failover Support Beyond Dialup Anti-Passback within a Cluster Password-Protected Web-Based Diagnostics Expandable On-Board Memory Secure Communications System for the Future Worldwide Compliance
iSTAR Pro
iSTAR Pro is an Ethernet-ready embedded control panel for enterprise-wide security management. Full DHCP support allows the controller to easily fit into the LAN infrastructure, making it extremely IT-friendly. Two PCMCIA card slots allow support for connection to a second LAN or dial-up connection using standard modems. iSTAR Pro operates with Software House's RM Reader series as well as industry standard Wiegand interface readers. iSTAR Pro is controlled by a General Control Module (GCM). The GCM contains 64 MB of battery backed-up memory, field expandable to 128 MB; two PCMCIA slots; alphanumeric LCD; DIP switches for configuration and diagnostics, as well as various network and serial communications ports. The GCM controls up to two Access Control Modules (ACM), each supporting up to eight Wiegand or RM readers as well as 16 supervised inputs and eight output relays for door control. Peer to peer communications between controllers and between clusters of controllers are supported via TCP/IP over Ethernet. Remote dial-up is also an option as a secondary back-up communications path. This advanced access control networking allows iSTAR controllers to efficiently communicate within the CCURE system without host polling or intervention.
Product Codes
Controllers - with Power Supplies STAR008W-64A iSTAR Pro 64 MB RAM General Controller Module Includes one Access Control Module for up to eight readers (Wiegand or RM), includes enclosure STAR016W-64A iSTAR Pro 64 MB RAM General Controller Module Includes two Access Control Modules for up to 16 readers (Wiegand or RM), includes enclosure Controllers - without Power Supplies STAR008W-64ANPS iSTAR Pro 64 MB RAM General Controller Module Includes one Access Control Module for up to eight readers (Wiegand or RM), includes enclosure STAR016W-64ANPS iSTAR Pro 64 MB RAM General Controller Module Includes two Access Control Modules for up to 16 readers (Wiegand or RM), includes enclosure Boards and Accessories STAR-ACM8-WA iSTAR Pro Add-on Access Control Module (ACM) Includes cable assembly and relay board for an additional eight Wiegand or eight RM readers, iSTAR Pro can support up to two ACMs STARGC-64MBA iSTAR Pro General Controller Module (GCM) with 64 MB RAM Enclosure not included STAR-PS Replacement Power Supply, 12V For wall-mount models only STAR-AP Adapter plate kit to mount one GCM and one 8-reader ACM in an existing apC/8X enclosure Includes 60 watt power supply, wiring for existing tamper switch, manuals and mounting hardware STAR-PCC-NIC iSTAR Pro PCMCIA NIC 10/100 PCMCIA card for 100Base-T communication and/or secondary communication on iSTAR Pro STAR-PCC-MODEM iSTAR Pro PCMCIA Modem PCMCIA modem card for dial-up and/or secondary communication on iSTAR Pro 03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 10
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts iSTAR eX

Features
AES 256-bit Encryption Dual On-Board 10/100base-T Ethernet Ports Built-In UPS Custom Key Management Flexibility in System Design Wide Range of Alarm Monitoring Advanced Clustering for Unmatched Event Control and Monitoring Easy to Install Anti-Passback within a Cluster Password-Protected Web Based Diagnostics System for the Future Worldwide Compliance
iSTAR eX
iSTAR eX is a four- or eight-door, Ethernet-ready embedded control panel for enterprise-wide security management. Featuring strong, on-board AES 256-bit encryption, iSTAR eX exceeds the US Government's FIPS 197 encryption standard, and is the only access controller certified and listed to the FIPS 140-2 standard for secure cryptographic modules. iSTAR eX also features a built-in Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), providing four hours of full operation during a power failure, and automatic backup of all system data to non-volatile compact flash (CF) memory before full discharge of the battery. Initially available with four door support, iSTAR eX is easily field upgradable to eight readers using a new USB security key. Additional RM readers (5-8) can be activated by inserting the security key into a USB port located on the panel. iSTAR eX operates with Software House's RM Reader series as well as industry-standard Wiegand interface readers. Full DHCP support allows the controller to easily fit into the LAN infrastructure making it extremely IT-friendly. Two onboard 10/100bT Ethernet ports allow support for connection to a second LAN for redundant communications. iSTAR eX is compatible with CCURE 800/8000 9.1 and higher and with CCURE 9000 version 1.0 and higher. It comes with 64 MB of on-board RAM (non-expandable) and a local LCD display. iSTAR eX includes many of the advanced iSTAR Pro features including advanced clustering, extended card formats, multiple cards per record, threat levels, and clearance filters and web diagnostics.
Product Codes
STAREX004W-64 iSTAR eX, 64 MB RAM Supports four readers, with power supply, battery, enclosure, UL listed STAREX004-64NB iSTAR eX, 64 MB RAM, no Battery Supports four readers, with power supply, enclosure, without 17.2 Ah battery, UL listed STAREX004-64NPS iSTAR eX, 64 MB RAM, no PSU or Battery Supports four readers, without power supply, without 17.2 Ah battery, not UL listed STAREX008W-64 iSTAR eX, 64 MB RAM Supports eight readers, with power supply, battery, enclosure STAREX008-64NB iSTAR eX, 64 MB RAM, no Battery Supports eight readers, with power supply, without 17.2 Ah battery, enclosure STAREX008-64NPS iSTAR eX, 64 MB RAM, no PSU or Battery Supports eight readers, without power supply, without 17.2 AHr battery, enclosure STAREX008-UPGiSTAR eX Upgrade Dongle Supports 4 readers to eight readers 03/11
Spare Boards and Accessories STAREX-GCM iSTAR eX General Controller Module (GCM) Includes LCD assembly, PMB interconnect cable and RS485 comm cables STAREX-PMB iSTAR eX Power Management Board (PMB) $800.00 B STAREX-CAN iSTAR eX Enclosure Includes tamper switch STAREX-PS iSTAR eX Power Supply 120/240 VAC input, 12V/78W output, includes DC output cable and battery cable PS-12170 iSTAR eX Battery (as supplied by EU DCs) 12V, 17.2 AHr battery STAREX-CF iSTAR eX Compact Flash Card 256 MB CF card 0304-1381-01 iSTAR eX LCD Assembly
Chapter 7.2 Page 11
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts iSTAR Pro 2U rack Mount

Features
Saves wall space and lowers installation costs Leverages standard IT server racks Controls up to 16 readers using space-saving 2U enclosure Patent-pending design allows fast field wiring using quick connects Front panel LCD and LEDs enable quick diagnostics and troubleshooting Industrial handles and slide rails ensure easy installation Hinged cover provides easy access to diagnostic port Dual network LAN ports for redundant network connection Compatible with CCURE 800/8000 and CCURE 9000 Optional external 2U rack power supply can provide lock power Supports multiple cards per cardholder and multiple card formats, including FIPS 201 extended formats, for a highly secure, flexible solution
iSTAR Pro 2U Rack Mount

The space-saving Software House iSTAR Pro 2U Rack Mount controls up to 16 readers and supports most types of Wiegand and RM output card readers. Coupled with removable wire connectors that enable quick installation, iSTAR Pro Rack Mount reduces the space requirements and costs associated with installing a panel on the wall, making it a desirable solution for IT professionals. The patent-pending rack design allows administrators to centrally install and monitor the panel in a standard depth 4-post IT rack or a standard 2-post Telco rack, saving valuable wall space. When used with an external 2U lock power supply that requires minimal wiring, installation costs are further reduced while taking advantage of the controlled environment of an IT server room. The stable temperature and ideal environmental conditions of the IT server room help to preserve the life of the unit, thereby saving maintenance and replacement costs over the long term. iSTAR Pro Rack Mount supports Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to simplify and expedite installation. For easy setup, this device also supports Domain Name Services (DNS), Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS), Fully Qualified Domain Naming (FQDN), and provides a comprehensive approach to network management. A front panel LCD displays real-time system diagnostics for quick troubleshooting. LED status lights indicate power and high temperature. With external diagnostics and status lights, administrators and IT staff can view and easily handle system duress without having to open the enclosure. These security features significantly reduce the risk of system downtime and, with remote web diagnostics, you can find and fix performance issues remotely from anywhere in your facility. Each controller has front and rear tamper switches to ensure it is not accessed by unauthorized personnel. With encrypted communications, protection against network intrusion, dual network paths, and optional dial-up secondary communications, iSTAR Pro Rack Mount is a highly secure network device that even the most cautious IT manager will trust.
Number of personnel records with one clearance, one card/person, ten-digit cards Number of personnel records with ten clearances, one card/person, ten-digit cards Number of personnel records with one clearance, five cards/person, ten-digit cards Number of personnel records with ten clearances, five cards/person, 40-digit cards
Controller Capacity 64 MB 525,000 295,000 170,000 110,000
Controller Capacity 128 MB 1,200,000 680,000 375,000 250,000
Chapter 7.2 Page 12
03/11

Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) 8.9 x 48.3 x 58.4 cm Rack Space Requirements 2U (standard rack units) Environmental 0 to 50C 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing Weight 15 kg High Temperature Alarm 60 +/- 6C Electrical Power Requirements 90/264 VAC, 50/60 Hz Input Protection 4A/250V fuse Power (Max) 75W Heat Dissipation (Typical) 320 BTU/h Memory and RTC Backup Onboard, rechargeable NimH batteries provide minimum 12 hrs retention of RAM and RTC Network Communications 10/Base-T Ethernet onboard Using optional 10/100 PCMCIA Second LAN Port network card Indicators and Switches LED for power, high temp LCD for diagnostics System Memory 64 MB RAM standard; expandable to 128 MB Regulatory Tested and certified by ETL per ANSI/UL standard 294 2004 CE FCC Part 15 Class B RoHS Power supply certified to CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 Reader, Inputs and Outputs Reader Ports 16 Reader Support RM readers or RM reader modules, or Wiegand output readers Reader Technologies Supported Multi-Technology Proximity Smart Card Wiegand Magnetic Stripe Maximum Distance to Door RM: 1,219 m Wiegand: 150 m RM Bus Communications RS-485 half duplex, two wire, plus optional two wires for device power Supervised Inputs 32, double-resistor Input Expansion Up to 128 additional inputs using I8 input modules on RM bus Outputs 16 dry contact relay outputs Output Rating 30 V AC/DC, 2.5A inductive, 5.0A non-inductive Output Expansion Up to 128 additional Form C Relay outputs using R8 output modules onRM bus Tamper Switches Two, front and rear cover
Product Codes
STAR008-2URM-EU iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 8 Readers via RM bus. 64MB RAM GCM. 16 alarm I/Ps & 8 alarm O/Ps. Can be field upgraded to 16 readers, pre-loomed for second ACM. US and EU Power Leads included STAR016-2URM-EU iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 16 Readers via RM bus. 64MB RAM GCM. 32 alarm I/Ps & 16 alarm O/Ps. US and EU Power Leads included STAR008-2UW-EU iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 8 Wiegand compatible readers. 64MB RAM GCM. 16 alarm I/Ps & 8 alarm O/Ps. Can be field upgraded to 16 readers, pre-loomed for second ACM. 1 RM port for additional I/O. US and EU Power Leads included STAR016-2UW-EU iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 16 Wiegand compatible readers. 64MB RAM GCM. 32 alarm I/Ps & 16 alarm O/Ps. 2 RM ports for additional I/O. US and EU Power Leads included STAR008-2URM-UK iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 8 Readers via RM bus. 64MB RAM GCM. 16 alarm I/Ps & 8 alarm O/Ps. Can be field upgraded to 16 readers, pre-loomed for second ACM. US and UK Power Leads included STAR016-2URM-UK iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 16 Readers via RM bus. 64MB RAM GCM. 32 alarm I/Ps & 16 alarm O/Ps. US and UK Power Leads included STAR008-2UW-UK iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 8 Wiegand compatible readers. 64MB RAM GCM. 16 alarm I/Ps & 8 alarm O/Ps. Can be field upgraded to 16 readers, pre-loomed for second ACM. 1 RM port for additional I/O. US and UK Power Leads included STAR016-2UW-UK iSTAR Pro, 19" 2U rack mount chassis. Supports up to 16 Wiegand compatible readers. 64MB RAM GCM. 32 alarm I/Ps & 16 alarm O/Ps. 2 RM ports for additional I/O. US and UK Power Leads included
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 13
Chapter 7.2 CCure Common Parts iSTAR Edge 2 or 4 reader Edge Device
Features
Controls and powers all access control devices at the door to minimise installation costs Optional Power over Ethernet (PoE) plug-in module features PoE (802.3af) and PoE Plus (802.3at) with enough power for two doors Powerful iSTAR feature set including antipassback and advanced peer-to-peer clustering Localised access control decision making with storage for over 400,000 personnel records Full complement of inputs/outputs for two doors plus optional I/O expansion modules Flash new firmware directly from the host for the latest functionality Local LCD and LEDs provide clear startup and troubleshooting information Onboard 256-bit AES network encryption Two reader model is compatible with CCURE 800/8000v10 and CCURE 9000. the Four reader model is compatible with CCURE 9000 v1.93 or later
iSTAR Edge Four-Reader IP Edge Device

iSTAR Edge is a powerful addition to the iSTAR range of door controllers in the form of a two or four reader IP edge device which provides a strong feature set including advanced iSTAR clustering, peer-to-peer communication, intrusion zones and keypad commands, extended card numbers, advanced door monitoring, and anti-passback. Its optional Power over Ethernet (PoE) module provides ample power for two doors, and allows the iSTAR Edge to leverage existing network infrastructure to reduce installation costs. iSTAR Edge increases overall system reliability by providing localised decision-making at each door with a robust local cardholder database of over 400,000 and local alarm and event buffering in the event communication to the host is unavailable. iSTAR Edge communicates with CCURE 9000 and other Software House controllers to provide even the most demanding applications with a solution they can use across their entire corporation. Whether installed at the corporate headquarters with thousands of employees, or at the regional sales branches with only a few employees, iSTAR Edge ensures that the same security policies and procedures are implemented at each location. iSTAR Edge has been designed to drastically lower installation and startup costs. Embedded lock power management, including powered (wet) lock outputs with individual resettable fused protection, eliminates the need for additional power supplies and fused power distribution boards normally required for traditional installations. Combined with removable connectors, a local display for quick troubleshooting, and status LEDs, iSTAR Edge streamlines even the toughest installation. Furthermore, with remote web diagnostics, you can find and fix performance issues from anywhere in your facility using a web browser. The iSTAR Edge enclosure has expansion capability for up to two input/output modules, and is protected with a built-in tamper switch to ensure the controller is not accessed by unauthorised personnel. Security risks are significantly reduced with encrypted communications and denial-of-service protection against network intrusion, making iSTAR Edge a highly secure network device perfect for even the most cautious IT manager
Ethernet Network
Ethernet Network
Control PSU
iSTAR Pro
RM-DMC
Fused power distribution board Exit Device
Exit Device Reader Door lock Door Contact
Door lock
Reader
Door Contact
Chapter 7.2 Page 14
03/11

Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Enclosure 305 x 305 x 101 mm Board 190 x 146 x 25 mm Enclosure Material 18g steel, with lock and tamper Expansion Includes mounting standoffs for two point expansion modules (I8, I8-CSI or R8) Environmental 0 to 50 C 5 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing Weight with Enclosure 4.2 kg System Memory 64 MB RAM, 128 MB flash EEPROM Cardholder capacity One clearance, one card/person, ten-digit cards . . . . 400,000 Ten clearances, one card/person, ten-digit cards . . . 230,000 One clearance, five cards/person, ten-digit cards . . . 130,000 Ten clearances, five cards/person, 40-digit cards . . . 85,000 Note - Memory allocation is dynamic and shared between cardholders, event storage, and configuration information. Electrical Power Requirements Board only: Eight, single or double-resistor Tamper switch, power fail, and low battery Input Expansion Up to 32 additional inputs using I8 input modules on RM bus (64 additional with 4-reader model) Auxiliary Power Available for Inputs 12 VDC; two (350mA each) Outputs Outputs Four, individually configurable via jumper as power sourcing (wet), or dry contact relay Output Power, Wet 12V or 24 VDC, 0.75A (If iSTAR Edge powered locally, output voltage follows input voltage. If using PoE/PoE Plus, 12V only) Output Protection, Per Output PTC resettable fuse, 0.75A, snubber, transzorb Output Rating, Dry 30V AC/DC, 1 A Output Expansion to 32 additional Form C relay outputs using R8 output modules on RM bus(64 additional with 4reader model) Regulatory IEC 60950, UL 294, UL 1076, UL 2043, cUL 294, cUL 1076 UL 294B (new standard for the use of Power over Ethernet (PoE) in access control systems) FCC Part 15 Class A (Class B with shielded Ethernet cable) CE, including EN50133 C-Tick RoHS & WEEE Compatibility Fully compatible with CCURE 9000 v1.92 and CCURE 800/8000 v10.0 or later Inputs Supervised Inputs Additional Inputs
12/24 VDC, auto-sensing 400 mA, max 3.8A @ 12 VDC, 3.1A @ 24VDC for board plus all attached devices
Readers inputs and Outputs Number of Readers Supported Two or Four Types of Readers Supported Wiegand and RM Reader Technologies Supported Multi-Technology Proximity Smart Card, incl. PIV II & TWIC Wiegand Magnetic Stripe (RM only) Maximum Distance to Door RM: 1,219 m (4,000 ft) Wiegand: 150 m Reader Power Available 12 VDC, 1.5 A total (including aux power and RM port power) RM Bus Communications Three ports, RS-485 half duplex, two wire, plus optional two wires for device power
Product Codes
iSTAR Edge 2 reqader controller with enclosure ESTAR002-POE1 iSTAR Edge 2 reader controller with enclosure and PoE/PoE PLUS module ESTAR002-MB iSTAR Edge 2 reader controller PCB only ESTAR-POE1 iSTAR Edge PoE/PoE PLUS module only ESTAR004* iSTAR Edge four reader controller iSTAR Edge controller with enclosure ESTAR004-RM* iSTAR Edge four reader controller iSTAR Edge plus 2 x RM-4 module pre mounted in enclosure ESTAR002
*4 reader iSTAR Edge devices are compatible with C.Cure 9000 v1.93 onwards only and will not allow readers 3 & 4 to be configured if used with C.Cure 800 version 10.0 onwards
03/11
Chapter 7.2 Page 15
Chapter 7.2 Page 16
03/11
Chapter 7.3- CCure Hardware and Common Devices CCure Personality Modules and I/O Devices
Software House Reader interface
When using non RM series readers, either Weigand boards must be included in the apC/8X or iSTAR or an RM-4 must be used. Then, standard Wiegand or clock and date readers can be connected to the system subject to the format being made available. The range of RM-4 PCBs can be supplied at the door position and will require an enclosure. Where local lock power is to be used (at the door) then an ARM-1 relay module will be required for the lock power switching. The range of HID Proximity or MR Access Mag stripe reader can then be connected to the CCURE 800 range of controllers - system operation being subject to the card format in all cases. Note: An RM-4 board or RM Series reader MUST be used with the apC/L.
Product Codes
RM-4K RM-4 RM-4E Series Personality Module with Keypad Cable Assembly with tamper switch. Requires ARM-1 relay for lock output (131-912) RM Series Personality Module with tamper switch and support for keypad data via Wiegand data stream. Requires ARM-1 relay for lock output (131-912) Enhanced RM-4E has two additional door relays requires 12Vdc -280mA max (excluding lock & reader)
Housing and other Accessories for Reader interface Product Codes

RM-DCM-2 RM-BAT RM-LCD RM4-18-08-BOX 130-915A 132-183 131-912 KT-0070-000 Door Control Module includes RM-4E in a UL 294 Listed enclosure. Possibility to mount two I/O boards Optional battery - 12VDC for RM-DCM-2 Optional LCD for RM-4E Integration box for 2 RM-4., 1 I8 board, 1 O8 board. Heater kit less transformer for MRM/RM 220v applications Security screwdriver for MRM/RM series readers ARM - 1 auxiliary reader relay module for MRM/RM series readers RM-4 connector kit (spare kit)
01/11
Chapter 7.3 Page 1
Chapter 7.3- CCure Hardware and Common Devices
Chapter 7.3 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 8.1 Cards and Readers HID 125kHz Proximity

Features
Standard Prox 125kHz operating frequency Format Sizes available up to 84 bits Corporate 1000 available for Global Customers Read Ranges up to 60cm
HID Cards and Readers

HID has become in many countries the generic name for 125kHz proximity cards and readers and is recognised as the industry standard for physical access control. Featuring 125 KHz RFID technology HID prox products are robust, affordable, and seamlessly integrate with access control system. HID 125kHz proximity readers are common throughout the range that in that they are not formatted. The range of cards, tags & fobs on the other hand are formatted and this needs to be identified with each order. Tyco Fire & Security has generally used four formats: H10301 26 bit Industry standard Wiegand Format H10302 - 37 bit HID tracked Wiegand Format H10304 37 bit Sensormatic Wiegand Format S10701 37 bit Software House Wiegand Format As you can see from the above there are two 37bit formats which have been supplied to Tyco Fire & Security over the years. It is therefore essential when ordering cards for existing projects that the correct format is specified. For new projects requiring 37bit format we would recommend the use of the H10304 format. The H10302 format is not detailed further in this chapter as is used mainly with the Non PC based network Solution Galaxy Dimension. All HID parts are now ordered direct from HID Europe. This allows Tyco Fire & Security to manage locally the card ordering database and benefit from the One Tyco Pricing offered by HID. All readers in this section can however be used with the dimension solution.
Reader & Tag Selection Chart

Read Range Chart Card/ Reader Prox Card II Card ISOProx II Card DuoProx II Card ProxKey II Keyfob MicroProx Tag Read range is also dependant on local installation conditions ProxPoint Plus MiniProx 5.1- 7.6cm 10.2 - 14.0cm 3.8 - 6.35cm 7.6 - 12.7cm 3.8 - 6.35cm 7.6 - 12.7cm 2.5 - 3.8cm 2.5 - 5.1cm 1.2 - 5.1cm 1.2 - 6.4cm ThinLine II 10.2 -14.0cm 7.6 - 12.7cm 7.6 - 12.7cm 2.5 - 5.1cm 2.5 - 7.6cm Prox Pro 14.0 - 20.3cm 10.2 - 17.8cm 10.2 - 17.8cm 2.5 - 7.6cm 2.5 - 10.2cm MaxiProx 40.6 - 73.7cm 38.1 - 50.8cm 38.1 - 50.8cm 15.2 - 43.2cm 10.2 - 38cm
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 1
Chapter 8.1 Cards and Readers

Features
Combines proximity technology and offers photo identification capability on a single card Graphics quality surface for use with direct image printers Same size and thickness as a standard credit card Vertical or horizontal slot punch capability
ISOProxII
The ISOProx II provides a solution for companies wishing to use proximity technology and Photo ID badging. The card accepts either horizontal or vertical card punching (slot location identified on the card) and meets ISO standard thickness for use with direct card printers.
Product Codes
1386LGGMN-H10301 HID:1386LGGMN-H10301 ISO Prox II programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Front & Rear supplied in PVC plain white gloss finish. Card numbering matching - internal & external. NOT slot punched. 1386LGGMN-H10304 HID:1386LGGMN-H10304 ISO Prox II programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand.Front & Rear supplied in PVC plain white gloss finish. Card numbering matching - internal & external NOT slot punched. 1386LGGMN-S10701 HID:1386LGGMN-S10701 ISO Prox II programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Front & Rear supplied in PVC plain white gloss finish. Card numbering matching - internal & external. NOT slot punched. 1386LGSMN-H10301 HID:1386LGSMN-H10301 ISO Prox II programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Front & Rear supplied in PVC plain white gloss finish (Back has standard HID ISO II artwork). Card numbering matching internal & external. NOT slot punched.
Chapter 8.1 Page 2
08/11

Features
Combines proximity technology and offers photo identification capability on a single card Graphics quality surface for use with direct image printers Same size and thickness as a standard credit card Vertical or horizontal slot punch capability Magnetic stripe technology Thin enough to be used with standard swipe or insert readers
Duo Prox II
Proven, Reliable Technology Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable environmental conditions, even when close to keys and coins. Thin/Practical Size Can be carried with credit cards in a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a photo ID badge. Photo ID Compatible Print directly to the card with a direct image or thermal transfer printer. Slot punch vertically or horizontally for easy use. Cross-reference A cross-reference list correlating the external card number and the programmed ID number is provided for easy system administration. Magnetic Stripe Ready to be encoded by the customer (see card construction). Long Life Passive, no-battery design allows an infinite number of reads. Durability Strong, flexible and resistant to cracking and breaking.
Product Codes
1336LGGMN-H10301 HID:1336LGGMN Format:H10301 DuoProx II Card programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with moulded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1336LGGMN-H10304 HID:1336LGGMN Format:H10304 DuoProx II Card programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with molded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1336LGGMN-S10701 HID:1336LGGMN Format:S10701 DuoProx II Card programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with molded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1336LGGMV-S10701 HID:1336LGGMV Format:S10701 DuoProx II Card programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Front & back are plain white PVC with Gloss finish. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch.
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 3

Features
Offers universal compatibility with all HID proximity readers Provides an external number for easy identification and control Can be placed on a key ring for convenient entry
Prox KeyII
Proven, Reliable Technology. Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable environmental conditions, even when close to keys and coins. Small and Convenient Can be carried with keys in pocket or handbag. Cross-reference A cross-reference list correlating the external card number and the programmed ID number is provided for easy system administration. Long Life Passive, no-battery design allows for an infinite number of reads. Durability ABS package is resistant to cracking and breaking.
Product Codes
1346LSSM-H10301 HID:1346LSSM Format:H10301 ProxKey II keyfob programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Supplied with HID logo on the front back is standard finish. Numbering is sequential internal & external 1346LSSM-H10304 HID:1346LSSM Format:H10304 ProxKey II keyfob programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Supplied with HID logo on the front back is standard finish. Numbering is sequential internal & external. 1346LSSM-S10701 HID:1346LSSM Format:S10701 ProxKey II keyfob programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Supplied with HID logo on the front back is standard finish. Numbering is sequential internal & external.
Chapter 8.1 Page 4
08/11

Features
The size of a coin, the Tag easily attaches to all non-metallic materials The Tag can be programmed in any HID proximity format, and is compatible with all HID proximity readers The Tag is RF-programmable for ease of encoding with HID's ProxProgrammer Experience the convenience of proximity without the expense of rebadging
MicroProx
The MicroProx Tag provides the convenience of HIDs proximity technology in a small disk-shaped transponder. Simply attach the adhesive-backed Tag to any non-metallic card or device, and you instantly have a proximity card! With the MicroProx Tag you can: Seamlessly upgrade from Wiegand, magnetic stripe or barium ferrite technologies by simply adhering the Tag to your existing access card. Easily and cost-effectively turn a plastic ID badge or contact smart chip card into a proximity credential! Add proximity access control capability to users cell phones, PDAs and other similar non-metallic device
Product Codes
391LKSMN-H10301 HID:1391LKSMN Format:H10301 MicroProx tag programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Supplied in black finish with HID logo. Sequential internal/external numbering (inkjetted). 1391LKSMN-H10304 HID:1391LKSMN Format:H10304 MicroProx tag programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Supplied in black finish with HID logo. Sequential internal/external numbering (inkjetted). 1391LKSMN-S10701 HID:1391LKSMN Format:S10701 MicroProx tag programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Supplied in black finish with HID logo. Sequential internal/external numbering (inkjetted).
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 5

Features
Ideal for companies that want to add smart card applications to an existing HID proximity technology access control system Supports all HID proximity card formats, including Corporate 1000 13.56 MHz operating frequency provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity. MIFARE technology ensures high security (mutual authentication, data encryption, unique 32-bit serial number) Meets ISO standards for thickness; use with all direct image and thermal transfer printers.
HID Proximity and MIFARE Card

The HID Proximity and MIFARE card combines contactless smart card technology with the benefits of HID's proven proximity technology. This card can be used for diverse applications such as access control, public transportation, road toll, park & ride, airline ticketing, customer loyalty and photo ID cards. Read/write Functionality for Multi-functional Memory Applications Sixteen securely separated files (sectors), each protected by a set of two keys and programmable access conditions, allow complex applications and provide for future expansion. Each sector potentially represents a different application. Arithmetic functions are used for expanding the capabilities of the chip. Different keys can protect read/write operations in order to build key hierarchies in the system. Security mechanisms such as mutual authentication and encryption are efficiently combined with fast processing and data communication, resulting in transition times of less than 100 milliseconds for a typical secure ticketing transaction. Proven, Reliable Technology Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable environmental conditions, even when close to keys and coins. Thin/Practical Size Can be carried with credit cards in a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a photo ID badge. Photo ID Compatible Print directly to the card with a direct image or thermal transfer printer. Slot punch vertically for easy use.
Product Codes
1431LGGMNN-H10301 HID:1431LGGMNN / Format:H10301 Proximity & MIFARE card. Prox encoded for 26 bit Wiegand - MIFARE chip unencoded. Front & back plain white PVC with Gloss finish. Sequentially numbered internally & externally (inkjetted) for the 125kHz. Card has printed location for slot punch position. MIFARE chip is unencoded. 1431LGGMNN-H10304 HID:1431LGGMNN / Format:H103041 Proximity & MIFARE card. Prox encoded for 37 bit Wiegand - MIFARE chip unencoded. Front & back plain white PVC with Gloss finish. Sequentially numbered internally & externally (inkjetted) for the 125kHz. Card has printed location for slot punch position. MIFARE chip is unencoded. 1431LGGMNN-S10701 HID:1431LGGMNN / Format:S10701 Proximity & MIFARE card. Prox encoded for 37 bit Wiegand - MIFARE chip unencoded. Front & back plain white PVC with Gloss finish.Sequentially numbered internally & externally (inkjetted) for the 125kHz. Card has printed location for slot punch position. MIFARE chip is unencoded.
Chapter 8.1 Page 6
08/11

Features
Price competitive with all other card technologies Thin enough to carry in a wallet or purse Offers universal compatibility with all HID proximity readers Provides durable packaging and consistent read range Provides an external number for easy identification and control Supports formats up to 85 bits, with over 137 billion codes Custom pre-printed artwork available. A PVC overlay allows for on-site photo ID using most direct image printers
ProxCard II
Proven, Reliable Technology Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable environmental conditions, even when close to keys and coins. Thin/Practical Size Can fit into a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a photo ID badge. Cross-reference A cross-reference list correlating the external card number and the programmed ID number is provided for easy system administration. Long Life Passive, no-battery design allows for an infinite number of reads. Durability Strong, flexible and resistant to cracking and breaking.
Product Codes
1326LMSMV-H10301 HID:1326LMSMV / Format:H10301 ProxCard II programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with moulded HID logo. Sequentially numbered internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1326LMSMV-H10304 HID:1326LMSMV / Format:H10304 ProxCard II programmed for Software House 37 bit Weigand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with moulded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1326LMSMV-S10701 HID:1326LMSMV / Format:S10701 ProxCard II programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with moulded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1326LGSMV-S10701 HID:1326LGSMV / Format:S10701 ProxCard II programmed for Software House 37 bit Wiegand. Plain White PVC with Gloss finish. Base with molded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1326LGSMV-H10301 HID:1326LGSMV / Format:H10301 ProxCard II programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Plain White PVC with Gloss finish. Base with molded HID logo. 1326LSSMV-H10301 HID:1326LSSMV / Format:H10301 ProxCard II programmed for 26 bit Wiegand. Plain White Vinyl with Matte finish. Base with molded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch. 1326LSSMV-S10701 HID:1326LSSMV / Format:S10701 ProxCard II programmed for SoftwareHouse 37 bit Wiegand. Plain ProxCard II Artwork - with Matte Finish. Base with molded HID logo. Sequentially numbered - internal & external. With vertical slot punch.
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 7

Features
Offers high reliability, consistent read-range and low power consumption in an easy-to install package Mounts directly onto metal with no change in read range performance Provides multi-colour LED, compatibility with all standard access control systems and internal or host control of LED and beeper Available with either pigtail or terminal strip (terminal strip only for Hazardous Location version)
MiniProx
Mounting: unobtrusive design mounts directly onto metal such as door mullions. Hazardous Location MiniProx reader Mounting: designed to mount onto a junction box included with each reader. The junction box is attached to an appropriate surface location utilising four holes. Audio-visual indication: when a proximity card is presented to the reader, the red LED flashes green and the beeper sounds. The multi-colour LED and beeper can also be controlled individually by the host system. Diagnostics: on reader power-up, an internal self-test routine checks and verifies the setup configuration, determines the internal or external control of the LED and beeper, and initialises reader operation. An additional external loop-back test allows for the reader outputs and inputs to be verified without the use of additional test equipment. Indoor/outdoor design: sealed in a rugged, weatherised polycarbonate enclosure designed to withstand harsh environments, providing reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance. Additional Benefits Encapsulated Reader Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. Hazardous Location version is UL104 Class I & II DIV 2 and Class III listed. Power Requirements: 5 -16 VDC Current requirements 20mA avg/110mA peak at 12 VDC Classic Series covers available in black, grey, white or beige 45cm wire pigtail standard; consult factory for 2.7m pigtail available by special order
Product Codes
5365CGP00 HID Miniprox in grey with 18" (45.7cm) Pigtail cable. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on card read. HID Miniprox in grey with terminal strip. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on card read. HID Miniprox in grey with hazardous area back box. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on card read.
5365EGT00
5365EGH00
Chapter 8.1 Page 8
08/11

Features
Ideal for medium-range applications Sealed for indoor or outdoor use Optional glass mount kit available for mounting the reader behind glass Power requirements: 10-28.5 VDC Current requirements: 100mA avg/120mA peak Dimensions: 12.7 x 12.7 x 2.54 cm Affords high reliability, consistent read range characteristics, and low power consumption in a single, easy-to-install package
ProxPro
The ProxPro proximity card readers weatherproof design and architecturally attractive enclosure allows easy mounting indoors or out. The ProxPro Reader is ideal for applications requiring a larger read range. Mounting: holes fit standard U.S.A. single-gang switch boxes (vertically mounted) to simplify installation. Field adjustable for mounting directly to metal, exhibiting only minimal effects on read range. A selectable jumper setting provides for improved performance. Audio-visual indication: when a proximity card is presented to the reader, the red LED flashes green with a sounder tone. The multi-colour LED and sounder can also be controlled individually by the host system. Diagnostics: on reader power-up, an internal self-test routine checks and verifies the setup configuration, determines the internal or external control of the LED and beeper, and initialises the readers operation. An additional external loop-back test allows the reader outputs and inputs to be verified without the use of additional test equipment. Indoor/outdoor design: sealed in a rugged, weatherised polycarbonate enclosure designed to withstand harsh environments, providing reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance. Easily installed in any location, even with the optional keypad. The unit includes a tamper switch to provide notification of reader tampering. Recognises card formats up to 84 bits, with over 137 billion unique codes. Keypad option: available with an optional, integrated weatherised keypad, which provides an additional level of security by allowing the use of a personal identification number (PIN). The keypad interfaces with the host system either by sending the keypad data over the data output lines, or via a direct connection to the host keypad interface. Additional Features Features multi-colour LED, internal or host control of the LED, and/or beeper and a beeper off switch for silent operation. Offers an optional, fully integrated personal identification number keypad for heightened security. Keypad data and card data can be sent on the same cable, or on a separate cable using 2 of 7 or 3 x 4 matrix.
Product Codes
5355AGN00 HID ProxPro reader in grey - Wiegand output. Configured with Beep on, LED normally red, flashes green on card read. HID ProxPro reader in grey with Wiegand output and Wiegand 8 bit burst keypad. Configured with Beep on, LED normally red, flashes green on card read. HID ProxPro reader in grey with Wiegand output and 3 x 4 matrix keypad. Configured with Beep on,LED normally red, flashes green on card read.
5355AGK00
5355AGS00
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 9

Features
Small sized, low cost reader features a beeper and multi-colour LED which can be host and/or locally controlled Potted reader suitable for indoor or outdoor use Power requirements: 5-16 VDC Current requirements: 20mA avg / 75mA peak at 12VDC 45 cm wire pigtail standard; consult factory for 9 (2.7 m) pigtail available by special order Beeper and multi-colour LED Can read HID cards with formats up to 85 bits Designed for mounting directly onto metal with no change in read range performance Compatible with all standard access control systems Includes multilingual installation manual
Prox Point Plus

Mounting: unobtrusive design can be mounted directly onto metal such as door mullions. Audio-visual indication: when a proximity card is presented to the reader, the red LED flashes green and the beeper sounds. The multi-colour LED and beeper can also be controlled individually by the host system. Diagnostics: on reader power-up, an internal self-test routine checks and verifies the setup configuration, determines the internal or external control of the LED and beeper, and initialises reader operation. An additional external loop-back test allows for the reader outputs and inputs to be verified without the use of additional test equipment. Indoor/outdoor design: sealed in a rugged, weatherised polycarbonate enclosure designed to withstand harsh environments, providing reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance. Easily interfaced: Wiegand output model interfaces with all existing Wiegand protocol access control systems. Clock-and-Data (magnetic stripe) model interfaces with most systems that accept magnetic stripe readers.
Product Code
6005BGB00 HID ProxPoint Plus in grey with 45.7cm pigtail cable. Reader is configured with Beep on, LED normally red, reader flashes green on.
Chapter 8.1 Page 10
08/11

Features
The size of most standard U.S. switch plates Potted reader suitable for indoor or outdoor use Power requirements: 5-16VDC Current requirements 20mA avg / 115mA peak at 12VDC Dimensions: 11.9 x 7.6 x 1.7 cm 45 cm wire pigtail standard; consult factory for 2.7 m pigtail available by special order Provides high reliability, consistent read range and low power consumption Features include multi-colour LED and internal control or host control of the LED and beeper Mounts directly on metal with minimal impact on the read range performance Includes multilingual installation manual
ThinLine II
Mounting: mounts on a single-gang electrical box for easy installation. Mounts directly on metal with minimal impact on read range performance. Audio-visual indication: a red LED flashes green and the beeper sounds when reader is presented with a proximity card. The multi-colour LED and beeper can also be controlled individually by the host system. Diagnostics: on reader power-up, an internal self-test routine checks and verifies the setup configuration, determines the internal or external control of the LED and beeper and initialises reader operation. An additional external loop-back test allows for the reader outputs and inputs to be verified without the use of additional test equipment. Indoor/outdoor design: sealed in a rugged, weatherised polycarbonate enclosure designed to withstand harsh environments, providing reliable performance and a high degree of vandal resistance.
Product Code
5395CG100 HID ThinLine reader in grey with Wiegand output. Configured with Beep on, LED normally red, flashes green on card read.
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 11

Features
Long read range distance (up to 8 with ProxPass) Autotune allows read range to be maintained within four inches of metal Parking hold feature ensures accurate detection of vehicles in parking lanes Dimensions: 30.5 x 30.5 x 2.54 cm Power requirements: 12 or 24 VDC (configurable) Current requirements: 200mA avg /700 mA peak at 12VDC; 260mA avg /1.2A peak at 24 VDC
MaxiProx
Mounting: mount on non-metallic surfaces for optimal read range performance. Audio-visual indication: when a proximity card is presented to the reader, the red LED flashes green and the beeper sounds. The multi-colour LED and beeper can also be controlled individually by the host system. Indoor/outdoor design: sealed in a rugged, weatherised polycarbonate enclosure designed to withstand harsh environments as well as provide a high degree of vandal resistance for reliable performance anywhere. Security: includes a tamper switch to provide electronic notification of reader tampering. Recognises card formats up to 85 bits. Additional Benefits Compatible with all HID cards and tags with formats up to 85 bits Multi-colour LED with internal or host control of the LED and beeper Two MaxiProx units can operate one meter apart for HI-LO (truck and car) installations.
Product Codes
5375AGN00 HID MaxiProx reader in grey with Wiegand output. Configured with beep on, LED red, flashes green on card read. Read distance up to 8' with ProxPass.
Chapter 8.1 Page 12
08/11

Features
Aesthetically Pleasing Weather Proof IP65 Maintenance Free Internal & External Applications Vandal Resistant Sterile Wipe Helps meet DDA Guidelines Extended Read Range
Mv-2 Versatile HID 125kHz Reader

The Mv-2 Versatile Reader has been designed to be both aesthetically pleasing and tough. The unit incorporates 125kHz proximity technology from HID and is capable of reading the full range of HID Proximity cards and tokens. Being vandal resistant, weatherproof and attractive means the unit is suitable for use in both internal and external applications. The reader fully supports all of the features and performance expected of the HID range, including the ability to be used with existing HID 125kHz PROX reader applications. The unit also offers high reliability and good read range characteristics.
Typical read range Card approx 5cm Key fob approx 2cm Dimensions 50mm x 100mm x 16mm Material 316 Stainless Steel Power supply 12 Volts DC Maximum current 120mA Operating temperature -30 to 65 C Operating humidity 0-95% Relative humidity non- condensing Weight Unpacked 350g Transmit frequency 125kHz Certifications CE Cable Lead 5m Flying lead, 8 core with overall screen Cable distance 125m Recommended cable is BELDEN 9538 (22 AWG) 8 conductors, drain wire & overall shield or equivalent.
Product Codes
105069ADT 109018ADT Morley Mv-2 HID 125kHz Prox Vandal Resistant Reader Morley Mv Series Spacer (for mounting on metal surfaces)
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 13

Features
High Security proximity reader for all external applications Extended read range for superior performance Fully encapsulated one-piece housing Stainless steel finish Supplied complete with 5 metre connecting lead Compatible with all Weigand formats Fully compatible with existing HID readers/tokens Bi-colour reader status LED and sounder control
VandalProx Proximity Door Readers

VandalProx is a range of vandal resistant proximity readers using HID taken technology to enable the VandalProx range to be used on any HID reader site. VandalProx offers a stainless steel reader enclosure, exceptional read performance and easy installation for all increased security applications. VandalProx reader is supplied in stainless steel finish.
Typical maximum read range Proxcard II card up to 4cm ISOProx II card up to 4cm ProxkeyTM II Keyfob up to 2.5cm Proxcard plus card upto 4 cm Dimensions 100 dia. x 18 mm deep Material 304 Stainless Steel Weight Unpacked (reader & cable) 314g Packed weight 435g Common Reader Specifications Power Supply 4.75-16 VDC Linear power supplies are recommended Maximum current requirements Current (DC) Average 35mA peak 60 mA Operating temperature -30o to 65oC Operating humidity 0-95% relative humidity non-condensing
Product Codes
105047ADT 109019ADT Morley VandalProx HID 125kHz Reader Morley Vandal Spacer Kit (for mounting on metal surfaces)
Chapter 8.1 Page 14
08/11

Features
Compact desktop unit No installation required Connects to PC via a USB port Inputs card data directly into a PC application window Configurable via user-friendly software Selectable terminating character Supports both Weigand data formats
DT2 USB Desk Mounted Enrolment Readers

This desktop reader supports HID 125kHz card formats. It can be used to input data from proximity cards, smart cards directly into Access Control software running on a PC or into databases, spreadsheets and other PC software applications. The data output from the reader is in Wiegand format. The interface is powered from the USB port, which is suitable for powering attached readers requiring a 5VDC supply. However, an external PSU is necessary for readers requiring other voltages or where the current exceeds 50mA.
Electrical Supply Voltage: Powered via the USB port on the PC. For the DT2, if the reader requires greater than 5V @ 150mA, an appropriate power supply should also be connected DT2: 155 x 120 x 48 (L x W x H) (excluding attached reader) USB2.0 (backward compatible) Wiegand: up to 80 bits input from the reader, up to 32 bits output as the card number
Product Codes
DT2-HID-6005 Nortech HID 125kHz enrolment reader with USB lead and software on CD Tested with Kantech, SGA & C.Cure using formats H10301 & H10302. Instructions to configure for these formats included. Other formats can be configured by the engineer on site
Physical Dimensions (mm): Inputs/Outputs PC Interface: Reader compatibility:
Operational Internal Buzzer Operation: On/off selectable
08/11
Chapter 8.1 Page 15
Chapter 8.1 Page 16
08/11
Chapter 8.2 Cards and Readers HID 13.56MHz Proximity iCLASS

Features
Encrypted communications - advanced security between card and reader Technology that meets a wide range of industry standards - multiple applications from one card Choice of credential and reader styles - designs to meet most smart card requirements Third party partners - a large number of HID approved companies to choose from for non physical access control applications Secure formats - available in open or closed Wiegand formats to suite the application (including ADT EMEAs own tracked format)*
*A tracked format ensures that no card duplication can take place
iCLASS
HID Global provides a wide variety of 13.56 MHz credentials including cards, tags and keyfobs. Some credentials also include combination technology, used in upgrading endusers from 125 kHz proximity to the benefits of 13.56 MHz smart card technology. These multiple technology credentials are ideal for companies preparing to transition from proximity technology to the additional speed and applications of high frequency smart card solutions. Optimised to make physical access control more powerful, iCLASS 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card technology provides versatile interoperability and is used in a wide range of applications including access control, network log-on security, automotive vehicle identification, cashless vending, time and attendance, event management and biometric verification. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications and can support future capabilities. iCLASS smart cards and readers make access control more powerful, more versatile, and most important of all, offers enhanced security through encryption and mutual authentication. At the same time, iCLASS is user-friendly, delivering the convenience, affordability and reliability of proximity technology for which HID is known worldwide. Encrypted Communication The communication between an iCLASS reader and card is encrypted using a secure algorithm so the transaction between the card and reader cannot be "sniffed" and replayed to a reader. The encryption protocol uses a combination of diversified keys, unique 64-bit card serial numbers and mutual card and reader authentication. Capability to Add Other Applications The iCLASS chip not only stores HID access control information, it also has memory space available for other applications. iCLASS cards are currently available with 2k bit, 16k, and 32k bit memory capacities, and depending on the amount of memory available and the number of memory areas, iCLASS cards can serve as multi-application credentials that can be used for many purposes. Since the memory can securely store any kind of information, applications for iCLASS include biometrics, secure computer/network authentication, health record management, time and attendance, digital cash (cafeteria & vending) and many, many more. Imagine an affordable, single-card, contactless solution that allows you to not only read data securely and quickly, but also to securely write data to the card for many applications.
ADT EU Tracked Format At this time three Wiegand Formats have been set up in JDE for the selected stock coded range of cards and tags. This includes 26bit Wiegand, a 34bit tracked format generally available to all companies and used for all of our standard products including the Galaxy Dimension range PLUS an ADT Europe 39bit tracked format. This is exclusive to ADT and is tracked by HID to ensure that there is no duplication of card ID AND secures future card business to your group.
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 1

Features
13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card technology provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication, encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure HID access control application area. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2K Byte) or 32k bit (4K Byte) configurations. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal transfer printers Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.
iCLASS Cards
The iCLASS Card offers iCLASS 13.56 MHz contactless read/write smart card technology along the ability to add a magnetic stripe, barcode, and anti-counterfeiting features including custom artwork or a photo identification directly on the credential. The iCLASS Card meets strict ISO thickness standards for use with direct image and thermal transfer printers. Offers extremely consistent read range. Unaffected by body shielding or variable environmental conditions. Can be carried with credit cards in a wallet or purse. Use with a strap and clip as a photo ID badge. Print directly to the card with a direct image or thermal transfer printer. Slot punch vertically for easy use. This is a passive card technology, the no-battery design allows for an estimated minimum 100,000 reads. All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Available in two application area configuration only. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other application area for user customization. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control installation. All 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates. 16k available in a two or sixteen application area configuration. 32k available with 16k memory configured in either 2 or 16 application areas, plus an additional 16k user configurable memory. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the HID standard access control application, and support future growth. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.
Chapter 8.2 Page 2
02/12

Typical Maximum Read Range* R10 2.0-3.0" (5.0-7.6cm) R30/RW300 2.0-3.5" (5.0-8.9cm) R40/RW400 2.5-4.5" (6.3-11.4cm) RK40/RWK400 3.0-4.0" (7.6-10.1 cm) *Subject to environmental conditions. Dimensions 5.40 x 8.57 x 0.084 cm max. Weight 5.7 g Card Construction Thin, flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) laminate. Operating Temperature -40 to 70 C Operating Humidity 5-95% non-condensing Operating Frequency 13.56 MHz RF Interface As suggested by ISO/IEC: 15693 read/write 14443B mode - 106 kbps Transaction Time <100 ms typical Baud Rate 14443 B2 mode - 212 kbps 15693 mode - 26 kbps Memory Type EEPROM, read/write Multi-application Memory 2k bit (256 Byte) card - 2 application areas 16k bit (2k Byte) card - 2 or 16 application areas 32k bit (4k Byte) card - 16k bits in 2 or 16 application areas plus 16k bits user configurable. Write Endurance Min. 100,000 cycles Data Retention 10 years
26bit Weigand Format - H10301 2000PGGMN-H10301 iCLASS ISO card - 2k bits with 2 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for 26bit Wiegand. Order must state site code and ID range order in multiples of 50 2002PGGMN-H10301 iCLASS ISO card - 16k bits with 16 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for 26bit Wiegand. Order must state site code and ID range order in multiples of 50 H10302 37bit 2000PGGMN-H10302 iCLASS ISO card - 2k bits with 2 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for tracked 34bit Wiegand. Order in multiples of 50. The next available number range will be supplied. 2002PGGMN-H10302 iCLASS ISO card - 16k bits with 16 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for tracked 34bit Wiegand. Order in multiples of 50. The next available number range will be supplied.
Product Codes
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 3

Features
The iCLASS 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart key technology provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication, encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure HID access control application area. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte) or 32k bit (4k Byte) configurations. Molded plastic enclosure provides durability in harsh environments. Can be placed on a key ring or clipped to a lanyard for convenient entry.
iCLASS Smart Key

The iCLASS Key provides the convenience of iCLASS 13.56 MHz contactless read/write smart card in a molded plastic key fob enclosure that is durable in a harsh environment. This key fob is the size of a typical automotive key and offers custom artwork printing capabilities directly on the key fob credential. You now can offer a credential that can be placed on a key ring or lanyard for such diverse applications including access control, network log-on security, automotive vehicle identification, cashless vending, time and attendance, and biometric verification. iCLASS was specifically designed to make access control more powerful, more versatile, and more secure. All radio frequency data transmission between the key and reader is encrypted using a secure algorithm. By using industry standard encryption techniques, iCLASS reduces the risk of compromised data or duplicated keys. For even higher security, the key data may also be protected with DES or triple DES encryption. Multiple securely separated application areas are each protected by 64-bit diversified read/write keys which allow complex applications and provide for future expansion. Security mechanisms such as mutual authentication and encryption are efficiently combined with fast processing and data communication, resulting in transaction times of less than 100 milliseconds for a typical secure e-purse transaction. Additional Benfits All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Available in two application area configuration only. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other application area for user customization. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control installation. All 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates. 16k available in a two or sixteen application area configuration. 32k available with 16k memory configured in either 2 or 16 application areas, plus an additional 16k user configurable memory. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the HID standard access control application, and support future growth. Meets ISO 15693 and14443B for contactless communications.
Chapter 8.2 Page 4
02/12

Typical Maximum Read Range* R10 1.0 (2.5 cm) R30/RW300 1.0 (2.5 cm) R40/RW400 1.0 (2.5 cm) RK40/RWK400 1.0 - 1.5 (2.5 cm - 3.8 cm) *Dependent upon installation conditions. Dimensions 3.43 x 3.18 x 3.84 cm Weight 4.9g Keyfob Construction Ultrasonically welded polycarbonate shell. Operating Temperature -40 to 70 C Operating Humidity 5-95% non-condensing Operating Frequency 13.56 MHz RF Interface As suggested by ISO/IEC: 14443B read/write (16k only) 15693 read/write Transaction Time <100 ms typical Baud Rate 14443B mode - 106 kbps 15693 read/write - 26 kbps Memory Type EEPROM, read/write Multi-application Memory 2k bit (256 Byte) key 2 application areas 16k bit (2k Byte) key 2 or 16 application areas 32k bit (4k Byte) card 16k bits in 2 or 16 application areas plus 16k bit user configurable. Write Endurance Min. 100,000 cycles Data Retention 10 years
26bit Weigand Format - H10301 2050PKNMN-H10301 iCLASS contactless smart Key - 2k bits with 2 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for 26bit Wiegand. Order must state site code and ID range - order in multiples of 100 2052PKNMN-H10301 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 16k bits with 16 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for 26bit Wiegand. Order must state site code and ID range - order in multiples of 100 H10302 37bit 2050PKNMN-H10302 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 2k bits with 2 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for tracked 34bit Wiegand. Order in multiples of 100 The next available number range will be supplied. 2052PKNMN-H10302 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 16k bits with 16 application areas. Supplied plain white on both sides - encoded for tracked 34bit Wiegand. Order in multiples of 100 The next available number range will be supplied.
Product Codes
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 5

Features
13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card technology provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication, encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure HID access control application area. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2K Byte) or 32k bit (4K Byte) configurations.
iCLASS Tag
The iCLASS Tag provides the convenience of iCLASS technology in a coin-sized, disk-shaped transponder that can be simply attached to any nonmetallic card or device to instantly have 13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card technology to utilize as a transition device during the rebadging process. You can seamlessly upgrade from Wiegand, magnetic stripe or barium ferrite technologies and can easily and costeffectively turn an existing plastic ID badge or contact smart card into a contactless proximity credential. iCLASS was specifically designed to make access control more powerful, more versatile, and more secure. All radio frequency data transmission between the tag and reader is encrypted using a secure algorithm. By using industry standard encryption techniques, iCLASS reduces the risk of compromised data or duplicated tags. For even higher security, the tag data may also be protected with DES or triple-DES encryption. Multiple securely separated application areas are each protected by 64-bit diversified read/write keys which allow complex applications and provide for future expansion. Security mechanisms such as mutual authentication and encryption are efficiently combined with fast processing and data communication, resulting in transaction times of less than 100 milliseconds for a typical secure e-purse transaction. Additional Benefits All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Available in two application area configuration only. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other application area for user customization. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control installation. All 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates. 16k available in a two or sixteen application area configuration. 32k available with 16k memory configured in either 2 or 16 application areas, plus an additional 16k user configurable memory. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the HID standard access control application, and support future growth. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.
Chapter 8.2 Page 6
02/12

Typical Maximum Read Range* R10 1.0 (2.5 cm) R30/RW300 1.0 (2.5 cm) R40/RW400 1.0 (2.5 cm) RK40/RWK400 1.0 - 1.5 (2.5 cm - 3.8 cm) *Dependent upon installation conditions. Dimensions Diameter: 1.285 (3.264 cm) Thickness: 0.070 (0.178 cm) Weight 1.18 g Outer Shell Material Lexan Operating Temperature -40 to 70 C Operating Humidity 5-95% non-condensing Operating Frequency 13.56 MHz RF Interface As suggested by ISO/IEC: 14443B read/write (16k only) 15693 read/write Transaction Time <100 ms typical Baud Rate 14443B mode - 106 kbps 15693 mode - 26 kbps Memory Type EEPROM, read/write Multi-application Memory 2k bit (256 Byte) tag 2 application areas 16k bit (2k Byte) tag 2 or 16 application areas 32k bit (4k Byte) card 16k bits in 2 or 16 application areas plus 16k bits user configurable. Write Endurance Min. 100,000 cycles Data Retention 10 years
26bit Weigand Format - H10301 2060PSSMU-H10301 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 2k bits with 2 application areas. Supplied in grey with internal number injetted on the tag. Encoded for 26bit Wiegand Format. Order must state site code and ID range - order in multiples of 100 2062PSSMU-H10301 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 16k bits with 16 application areas. Supplied in grey with internal number injetted on the tag. Encoded for 26bit Wiegand Format. Order must state site code and ID range - order in multiples of 100 H10302 37bit 2060PSSMU-H10302 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 2k bits with 2 application areas. Supplied in grey with internal number injetted on the tag. Encoded for 34bit Tracked Wiegand Format. The next number range will be supplied. Order in multiples of 100 2062PSSMU-H10302 iCLASS Contactless Smart Key - 16k bits with 16 application areas. Supplied in grey with internal number injetted on the tag. Encoded for 34bit Tracked Wiegand Format. The next number range will be supplied. Order in multiples of 100
Product Codes
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 7

Features
13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity. iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication, encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities. Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure HID access control application area. Available in 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2K Byte) or 32k bit (4K Byte) configurations. Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal transfer printers. Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.
iCLASS Prox Card

The iCLASS Prox Card combines iCLASS 13.56 MHz contactless read/write smart card and Prox 125 kHz proximity technology on a single card with the ability to add magnetic stripe, barcode, and anti-counterfeiting features including custom artwork or a photo identification directly on the credential. Your iCLASS Prox Card can now be utilized for such diverse applications including access control, network log-on security, automotive vehicle identification, cashless vending, time and attendance, and biometric verification. As you integrate and/or migrate to an iCLASS platform from proximity technology readers. And, you have the option of assigning various security levels to the cards depending on the credential holder. The iCLASS Prox Card meets strict ISO thickness standards for use with direct image and thermal transfer printers. iCLASS was specifically designed to make access control more powerful, more versatile, and more secure. All radio frequency data transmission between the card and reader is encrypted using a secure algorithm. By using industry standard encryption techniques, iCLASS reduces the risk of compromised data or duplicated cards. For even higher security, the card data may also be protected with DES or triple DES encryption. Multiple securely separated application areas are each protected by 64-bit diversified read/write keys which allow complex applications and provide for future expansion. Security mechanisms such as mutual authentication and encryption are efficiently combined with fast processing and data communication, resulting in transaction times of less than 100 milliseconds for a typical secure e-purse transaction. Additional Benefits All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Available in two application area configuration only. Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other application area for user customization. Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications. Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control installation. All 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features: Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates. 16k available in a two or sixteen application area configuration. 32k available with 16k memory configured in either 2 or 16 application areas, plus an additional 16k user configurable memory. Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the HID standard access control application, and support future growth. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications. Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.
Chapter 8.2 Page 8
02/12

Typical Maximum Read Range* R10 2.0-3.0" (5.0-7.6cm) R30/RW300 2.0-3.5" (5.0-8.9cm) R40/RW400 2.5-4.5" (6.3-11.4cm) RK40/RWK400 3.0-4.0 (7.6-10.1 cm) *Dependent upon installation conditions. Dimensions 5.40 x 8.57 x 0.084 cm Weight 6.8 g Card Construction Thin, flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) laminate. Operating Temperature -40 to 70 C) Operating Humidity 5-95% non-condensing Operating Frequency 13.56 MHz 125 kHz
RF Interface As suggested by ISO/IEC: 14443B read/write (16k only) 15693 read/write Transaction Time <100 ms typical Baud Rate 14443 B mode - 106 kbps 15693 mode - 26 kbps Memory Type EEPROM, read/write Multi-application Memory 2k bit (256 Byte) card 2 application areas 16k bit (2k Byte) 2 or 16 application areas 32k bit (4k Byte) card 16k bit in 2 or 16 application areas plus 16k bit user configurable. Write Endurance Min. 100,000 cycles Data Retention 10 years
This multi technology card allows easy changeover from 125kHz to 13.56M Hz Smart Cards on a site. This format can be the same or different in the technologies. Due to the numerous options for open & tarcked formats to be applied to either the low or high rgequency technology in this card, we have not stock coded these items. An HID card order form must be supplied with your NSL (Non Stock Listed) order directly stating the format and site code/ID range etc..
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 9

Features
Format Portability - Upgrading is completely transparent since the same Prox format and user identification numbers are brought across to your iCLASS credentials, including HID Corporate 1000 formats. Also, Elite custom key program is available for a higher level of security. Secure - All RF data transmission between the card and reader is encrypted using a secure algorithm. By using industry-standard encryption techniques and advanced key management systems, iCLASS reduces the risk of compromised data or duplicated cards. Interoperability - iCLASS is based on ISO interoperability standards providing compatibility with many popular card technologies (ISO 15693, ISO 14443A and ISO 14443B). Optimal Read Range Performance - An auto-tuning feature automatically adjusts the reader for optimal read range performance on any mounting surface.
iCLASS Readers
iCLASS readers are user-friendly, delivering the same convenience and reliability of HID's world-renowned Prox technology, with state-of-the-art features, driven by evolving industry requirements. Upgrading from Prox to iCLASS technology has never been so simple. All iCLASS readers provide the same wiring connections, low-current consumption and 5 to 16 volt operation as our Prox readers. Additionally, you can transfer your Prox format and user identification numbers to iCLASS credentials, making the change completely transparent to your access control system. Additional Benefits Security 64-bit authentication keys are extremely secure. Readers and cards require matching keys to function. All RF data transmission between the card and reader is encrypted using a secure algorithm. The key management system reduces the risk of compromised data or duplicated cards. Elite Custom Keys Custom keys provide the highest level of security, where cards and readers are uniquely matched to individual sites or customers, and are non-interchangeable. Combining Elite custom keys with our Corporate 1000 can offer companies a scalable solution that can be implemented in facilities worldwide. Audiovisual Indication Audio sounder provides various tone sequences to signify access granted, access denied, power up and diagnostics. Visually impaired cardholders can easily distinguish between access granted and access denied. A highintensity light bar provides a clear visual status indication in red, green or amber, even in bright sunlight. Note: Light bar will illuminate amber when a FIPS 201/PIV card is read. Easily Interfaced The reader's Wiegand output easily interfaces with most existing Wiegand and Clock-and-Data protocol access control panels. The reader reads standard proximity format data from HID iCLASS cards and will output data as encoded. When reading ISO 14443A cards (MIFARE/ DESFire), the reader can be configured to output 26-bit, 32-bit (MSB), 32-bit (LSB), 34-bit, 40-bit or 56-bit Wiegand formats based on the CSN (card serial number).
Chapter 8.2 Page 10
02/12

Indoor/Outdoor Design Rugged, weatherised polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh environments, provides reliable performance and is suitable for both internal and external applications
R10 R40 6100C 6120C iCLASS Card : Up to 3.25" (8.9 cm) iCLASS Card : Up to 4.75" (12.1 cm) iCLASS Key/Tag : Up to 1.5" (3.8 cm) iCLASS Key/Tag : Up to 2.0" (5.1 cm) MIFARE / DESFire Card MIFARE / DESFire Card (CSN) (CSN) : Up to 2.0" (5.1 cm) Up to 2.5" (6.4 cm) Mounting The R10 are physically the smallest The R40 is designed to mount and cover readers and are ideally suited for single gang switch boxes primarily used in the mullion-mounted door installations, United States and includes a slotted mounting U.S. single-gang J-box or any flat surface plate for European and Asian back box spacing. (Reader will not cover junction box). Dimensions 4.8 cm x 10.3 cm x 2.3 cm 8.4 cm x 12.2 cm x 2.4 cm Power Supply 5-16 VDC, Linear supply recommended Current Requirements 55mA AVG, 116mA PEAK 55mA AVG, 121mA PEAK Operating Temperature -35 to 65 C Operating Humidity 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing Transmit Frequency 13.56 MHz Cable Distance Wiegand Interface 500ft (150m) 22 AWG Card Compatibility 15693 - read only; 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte), 32k bit (4k Byte) iCLASS credentials, serial number 14443B - read only; 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte), 32k bit (4k Byte) iCLASS credentials serial number 14443A - read only; MIFARE and DESFire (serial number) US Government PIV FeliCa IDm (Transit Readers Only) CEPAS CAN/CSN (Transit Readers Only) Environmental IP55 Certifications UL294/cUL (US), FCC Certification (US), IC (Canada), CE (EU), C-tick (Australia, New Zealand), SRRC (China), MIC (Korea), NCC (Taiwan), iDA (Singapore), RoHS Housing Material UL94 Polycarbonate Warranty Warrantied against defects in materials and workmanship for life. (See HID complete warranty policy for details - www.hidglobal.com.) * Model Numbers ** Read Range
Product Codes
ADT branded readers 6100CKN0000ADT1 6120CKN0000ADT1 6130CKN0000ADT1 Unbranded readers 6100CKN0000 6100CKT0000 6120CKN0000 6120CKT0000 6130CKN000000 ADT branded HID R10 iCLASS reader with 45.7cm pigtail ADT branded HID iCLASS R30 READER - 32 BIT with 45.7cm pigtail ADT branded HID RK40 iCLASS red + PIN with 45.7cm pigtail
6130CKT000000
iCLASS R10 contactless smart card reader - mullion mounted - black. Supplied with 18" (0.5m) pigtail. Provides a Wiegand output to the access control system. iCLASS R10 contactless smart card reader - mullion mounted - black. Supplied with terminal block. Provides a Wiegand output to the access control system. iCLASS R40 contactless smart card reader - EU back Box mount - black. Supplied with 18" (0.5m) pigtail. Provides a Wiegand output to the access control system. iCLASS R40 contactless smart card reader - EU Back Box mount - black. Supplied with terminal block. Provides a Wiegand output to the access control system. iCLASS RK40 contactless smart card reader with keypad - EU back Box mount - black. Supplied with 18" (0.5m) pigtail. Provides a Wiegand output for card and Wiegand bust for keypad to the access control system. iCLASS RK40 contactless smart card reader with keypad - EU Back Box mount - black. Supplied with terminal block. Provides a Wiegand output for card and Wiegand bust for keypad to the access control system.
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 11

Features
Simple Migration from the most popular proximity technologies to iCLASS Open Architecture Design allows project specific formats and keys Provides flexible options for processing multi-technology cards and configuring the reader's audio/visual characteristics All HID card formats carryover Reads: 125 kHz - HID, (Indala - special order) or AWID proximity, 13.56 MHz - iCLASS, DESFire - ISO 15693 CSN (MyD, I Code, Tag It), ISO 14443A CSN (MIFARE)
iCLASS RP15
The RP15 is a multi-technology card reader designed for customers upgrading their current card system from some of the most popular proximity formats to iCLASS credentials. With the RP15 reader, the customer has the ability to transition to smart cards over time while incorporating the use of multiple card technologies within a single building or across multiple facilities. The RP15 multiCLASS reader is specifically designed to assist customers with the transition from the popular HID MiniProx and other mullion mounted reader form factors. The RP15 features the same mounting dimensions as the MiniProx to allow for an easy direct replacement. Only the multiCLASS family of products provides true iCLASS security, the ease of Prox, the power of smart cards and the confidence of choosing HID, the worldwide leader in access control. 13.56 MHz contactless smart cards ISO 15693 - read only; 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte); serial number ISO 14443A - read only; MIFARE (serial number) ISO 14443B - read only; 2k bit (256 Byte) and 16k bit (2k Byte) Sony FeliCa IDm (requires Transit p/n 6144) CEPAS CAN or CSN (requires Transit p/n 6144)
Typical Read Range iCLASS Card 7.5 - 9.0 cm iCLASS Key/Tag 2.5 - 4.0 cm HID Prox ISO Card 6.5 - 9.0 cm HID Prox Clamshell Card 9.0 - 10.0 cm HID Prox Keyfob/Tag 3.2 - 4.5 cm Indala Proximity ISO Card 4.0 - 5.0 cm Indala Proximity Clamshell Card 4.5 - 5.5 cm Indala Proximity Keyfob/Tag 2.5 - 3.2 cm Dimensions 15.6 cm x 4.8 cm x 2.3 cm Card Compatibility 125 kHz Proximity HID or Indala proximity cards, key fobs, and tags. AWID Credentials
Product Code
6145CGN000 HID multiCLASS mullion reader - grey cover. Supplied with 18" pigtail. This reader will provide a Wiegand output from HID 125kHz prox and iCLASS credentials.
Chapter 8.2 Page 12
02/12

Features
Aesthetically Pleasing Weather Proof IP65 Maintenance Free Internal & External Applications Vandal Resistant Sterile Wipe Helps meet DDA Guidelines Extended Read Range
Mv-1 Versatile Reader Featuring iCLASS

The Mv-1 Versatile Reader has been designed to be both aesthetically pleasing and tough. The unit incorporates the latest iCLASS technology from HID and is capable of reading the full range of HID iCLASS cards and tokens. Being vandal resistant, weatherproof and attractive means the unit is suitable for use in both internal and external applications. The reader fully supports all of the features and performance expected of the HID range, including the ability to be used with existing HID iCLASS reader applications. The unit also offers high reliability and good read range characteristics.
Typical read range Card approx 5cm Key fob approx 1cm Dimensions 50mm x 100mm x 18mm Material 316 Stainless Steel Power supply 12 Volts DC Maximum current 120mA Operating temperature -30 to 65 C Operating humidity 0-95% Relative humidity non- condensing Weight Unpacked 350g Transmit frequency 13.56MHz Certifications CE Cable Lead 5m Flying lead, 8 core with overall screen Cable distance 125m Recommended cable is BELDEN 9538 (22 AWG) 8 conductors, drain wire & overall shield or equivalent.
Product Codes
105068ADT 109018ADT Morley Mv-1 iCLASS Vandal Resistant Reader Morley Mv Series Spacer (for mounting on metal surfaces)
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 13

Features
Expanded eForce platform with integrated HID Prox Contactless Card Reader Interfaces with any Wiegand protocol access control system Supports HID iCLASS 13.56MHz credentials Integrated antenna Models to operate Adams Rite latches, exit devices, and MS Series deadbolts Audible beep upon card presentation Red/green LED lock/unlock status Surface-mounted with concealed fasteners Non-handed with clutched lever protection Mortise cylinder control override (1" to 1-1/2" range with AR/MS cam) Die cast housing and lever in Satin Chrome and Dark Bronze finish Full outdoor rating temperature range from -35C to 66C Hardwired (7 conductor) installation with ElectroLynx connectors
eForce iCLASS
This new addition to the eForce family incorporates a contactless proximity reader into the proven eForce platform. The eForce iCLASS proximity card readers control access with Adams Rite deadbolts, deadlatches and exit devices. Card presentation is confirmed with an audible beep and visual change in the red/green LED indicator displaying the locked/unlocked status. Supporting HID 13.56 MHz (eForce iCLASS) credentials, the eForce iCLASS interfaces with any Wiegand-compatible access control system. The sleek-looking eForce iCLASS measures 1-3/4" wide x 15-3/8" high, and is compatible with aluminum, steel and wood doors from 1-3/4" to 2-1/4" thick. The eForce retrofits to Adams Rite MS Series Deadbolts, 4500, 4700, 4900 Deadlatches and 8000 Series Exit Devices in 31/32" backsets and greater. Adams Rite has long been recognized as a leading manufacturer of hardware for aluminum entrances. The eForce iCLASS is a strong addition to this family of products, and the obvious choice to pair with Adams Rite deadbolts, deadlatches and exit devices. Install with confidence. No one makes door hardware like Adams Rite.
Handle Clutch-protected cast zinc alloy, finished to match housing. Special Features/Requirements Hardwired installation: 18-22 AWG recommended (seven conductor stranded and shielded) Temperature range: -35C to 65C and 5-95% humidity (non-condensing) 500 ft. max. distance to host Housing The sleek-looking eForce measures 1-3/4" wide x 153/8" high, with Satin Chrome (626) and Powdercoat Dark Bronze (121) finishes. Electrical Specs: eForce Prox Integrated HID 13.56MHz iCLASS contactless card reader Interfaces with any Wiegandcompatible access control system Recognizes HID Prox 26-39 bit formats FCC Part 15 (USA & Canada) 12Vdc/150mA average 300mA Peak Chapter 8.2 Page 14
Product Codes
3090C-01-626 Adams Rite eForce iCLASS in satin hrome finish. Reads any iCLASS credential
02/12

Features
Compact desktop unit No installation required Connects to PC via a USB port Inputs card data directly into a PC application window Configurable via user-friendly software Selectable terminating character Supports Weigand card data formats
DT2 USB Desk Mounted Enrolment Readers

The desktop reader range supports most HID iCLASS 13.56MHz card technologies and software applications. It can be used to input data from proximity iCLASS cards directly into Access Control software running on a PC or into databases, spreadsheets and other PC software applications. The data output from the reader will be in Wiegand format. The interface is powered from the USB port, which is suitable for powering attached readers requiring a 5VDC supply. However, an external PSU is necessary for readers requiring other voltages or where the current exceeds 150mA.
Electrical Supply Voltage: Powered via the USB port on the PC. For the DT2, if the reader requires greater than 5V @ 150mA, an appropriate power supply should also be connected DT2: 155 x 120 x 48 (L x W x H) (excluding attached reader) USB2.0 (backward compatible) Wiegand: up to 80 bits input from the reader, up to 32 bits output as the card number
Product Code
DT2-HID-6100 Nortech HID iCLASS enrolment reader with USB lead and software on CD Tested with Kantech, SGA & C.Cure using formats H10301 & H10302. Instructions to configure for these formats included. Other formats can be configured by the engineer on site
Physical Dimensions (mm): Inputs/Outputs PC Interface: Reader compatibility:
Operational Internal Buzzer Operation: On/off selectable
02/12
Chapter 8.2 Page 15
Chapter 8.2 Page 16
02/12
Chapter 8.3 - Cards and Readers Software House Multi-tech and Multi-format Readers
Sell Smart!
Sell Smart! You should all know the benefits & uses to the end user of carrying a smart card rather than a standard proximity card. Not only does the card provide secure access control, allowing them access to their site and secure areas and provide visual identification by photo ID (from on-site software or card bureau service). Smart cards can store additional data to provide IT security (logical access), cashless vending, Time & Attendance and transport biometric data and much much more.
and you havent sold the benefits of Smart Card Technology yet! Now carry on selling! You have many existing and potential partners to provide the end user with a one stop shop for all the services that smart cards can offer. Make these local contacts now and gain a new lead generating service for each other! Smart Cards Presentations? With the introduction of the Software House Multi-Technology & Multi-Format readers, your local EMEA ACVS contacts will be able to provide overviews and arrange training.
The Smart Card Challenge Often a customer is looking to future proof their company by wise investment. For many years customers have asked for smart cards, not needing the benefit at that time but making sure the decisions they make at that time cannot be questioned at a later date when funds are requested to update an access control system. Now, there is no balance between spend and future requirements to be made. Smart card technology can now be provided at similar or even lower initial outlay. The customers ongoing costs are lower!
Key Decision Drivers: Ongoing Costs With the cost of MIFARE cards being lower than standard 125KHz prox cards. A customers ongoing costs for new starters and replacement cards will be lower. Usage For the system users the card operates in the same way as any other prox card. Benefits Supplying the customer with a smart card opens up a wide range of additional service for the customer at no additional outlay at the start
How can I show the savings? By offering a smart card alternative with every access control quotation simply replace the requested reader with a Software House Multi-Tech or Multi-Format reader and upgrade. Upgrade the access cards to MIFARE. The more cards required on the system the greater the saving. Now show the customer the ongoing cost for replacement cards Some proximity card supplier estimate up to 30% of system cards are replaced each year. The system running cost is lower with smart card technology.
05/11
Chapter 8.3 Page 1
Chapter 8.3 - Cards and Readers

Multi Tech/Multi Format Reader Feature Summary
Software House's innovative suite of fully open, multi-protocol readers includes the industry's most versatile Multi-Technology Reader to simultaneously read HID Proximity cards, MIFARE encrypted sector cards, HID iCLASS, PIV II Government cards, as well as other proximity and smart card formats. The Multi-Technology Readers are listed on the GSA's FIPS 201 Approved Products List. Software House Multi-Technology Readers provide a flexible multi-protocol, multi-frequency solution for customers who either want to transition to smart cards over time or who want to utilize both smart cards and proximity cards in their facility. The suite also includes Multi-Format Proximity Readers that read 125 KHz card formats from multiple manufacturers and Multi-Format Smart Card Readers that read 13.56 MHz card formats from multiple manufacturers.
Flex Models (firmware upgradeable) Model Form HID Number Factor RUSCO
Multi-Tech
SWH-4000 SWH-4100 SWH-4200 SWH-2100 SWH-2400
Smart
Mullion Single Gang Keypad Single Gang Single Gang
P P P
Card Technology CASIDeister ISO14443 MIFARE Prox Prox A/B SN Sector ProxLite P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
ISO1563 SN P P P P P
FIPS 201 PIV-II P P P
DESFire SN P P P P P
iCLASS SN P P P P P
Proximity Multi-Tech
Fixed Models (no firmware upgrades) Model Form HID Number Factor RUSCO SWH-3000 SWH-5000 SWH-5100 Mullion Mullion Single Gang P P P
CASIProx ProxLite P P P
Card Technology Deister ISO14443 MIFARE Prox A/B SN Sector P P P
ISO1563 SN P
FIPS 201 PIV-II
DESFire SN P
iCLASS SN P
Chapter 8.3 Page 2
05/11

Features
Software House Readers and Cards are priced competitively Protecting your existing card investment without having to re-badge Enabling the transition to smart card technology at your own pace Preventing the obsolescence of the reader - Future Proof - with the ability to flash new firmware
Software House Multi-Tech & Multi-Format Readers

This new innovative product from Software House shows the companies commitment to open standards whilst providing the security industry with a transition from yesterday's proximity cards to today's smart cards. The new line of Multi-Technology Readers is a leap forward in open systems, allowing companies to transition from a proximity system to a more advanced smart card system at their own pace simply and affordably. Additional Benefits Software House Multi-Format Proximity Readers HID 125 KHz Deister 125 KHz CASI-RUSCO ProxLite Software House Multi-Format Smart Card Readers iCLASS Serial Number MIFARE Serial Number DESFire Serial Number ISO 14443A Serial Number ISO 14443B Serial Number ISO 15693 Serial Number MIFARE Sector
Software Houses Multi-Format Proximity Readers can read 125 KHz card formats from multiple manufacturers, providing a cost-effective solution for businesses struggling with disparate proximity access control cards throughout the organisation. The new line of Multi-Format Smart Card Readers offers enhanced security through encryption and is compatible with nearly every smart card format in the industry. Before making any commitment to 3rd party card or reader compatibilities, we strongly advise that you arrange for the cards to be tested in advance. Some 3rd party manufacturers or distributors provide product that will not be 100% compatible with ISO norms and standards. This means we cannot approve third party products without detailed testing. Please contact your pre-sales support representative.
05/11
Chapter 8.3 Page 3

Features
Reads Multiple 125 KHz Formats HID Proximity Deister Proximity CASI ProxLite Outdoor/Indoor Use Wiegand Output Format
Multi-Format Readers
The Multi-Format Proximity Readers are compatible with cards from multiple manufacturers which makes them an extremely versatile access control solution. The new Proximity readers combine multiple configuration options with an appealing, discreet design and economical price. The Proximity readers are ideal for numerous applications. The readers encapsulated electronics make them ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications.
Agency Certifications Minimum Wiring Colour Dimensions Model SWH-5000 Model SWH-5100 Operating Temperature Range Humidity Range Index of Protection Power Supply Read Range (Optimal) Read Time Terminal Block -35 to 67C 0 to 100% IP65 8 16 VDC 125 mA max @ 12 VDC from 7,5 cm (SWH-5000) Technology Dependent (typically < 300 msec) 12 pos 3.5 mm Screw Terminals Plug-in 120mm x 45mm x 25mm, Mullion 84mm x 84mm x 28mm, Single Gang (Not in EMEA) FCC Part 15, CE, UL 294 Full Outdoor (pending) 4 Conductors Black or Light Grey
Cable Recommendations 22 AWG, Stranded
Product Codes
SWH-5000 Software House black mullion style multi-format 125K prox reader. Reads HID, Casi Prox-Lite & Deister 125K prox. Gives a Wiegand output - can be configured by programming card Software House grey mullion style multi-format 125K prox reader. Reads HID, Casi Prox-Lite & Deister 125K prox. Gives a Wiegand output - can be configured by programming card.
SWH-5000G
Chapter 8.3 Page 4
05/11

Features
Read multiple Smart Cards ISO 14443A DESFire MIFARE ISO 14443B ISO 15693 My-D SLI-2 iCLASS MIFARE Sectors Configurable Wiegand Output Reads Unique Serial Number or Programmed Sector Data Two Wire RS485 (Flexible readers)
Multi-Format Smart Card Readers

Software House's Smart Card readers allow customers to combine the power of enhanced security with other critical business applications. The Smart Card readers are ISO compliant and read serial numbers from the following card technologies: ISO 14443A (including DESFire, MIFARE serial number and sectors), ISO 14443B and ISO 15693 (including My-D, SLI-2, iCLASS, and many more), providing an incredibly versatile access control solution. The Smart Card reader SWH-2100 is a Flex model that allows users to update the readers with new functionality or enhancements at any time with flash firmware. The Flexible readers save significant time and money by allowing users to simply flash new card protocols or formats directly to the reader. Flexible versions also support the capability to read MIFARE sectors. Software Houses Smart Card readers are available in a wide variety of configurations and deliver a convenient, affordable smart card solution.
Agency Certifications Minimum Wiring Colour Dimensions Model SWH-2100EG Environment Operating Temperature Range Humidity Range Index of Protection Power Supply Read Range SWH-2100EG Read Time Up to ~10 cm Technology Dependent (typically < 300 msec) -35 to 67C 0 to 100% IP65 8 16 VDC 125 mA max @ 12VDC 84mm x 84mm x 28mm, Single Gang UL Listed for Interior or Exterior FCC Part 15, CE, UL 294 Full Outdoor (pending) 4 Conductors Black or Light Grey
Cable Recommendations 22 AWG, Stranded
Product Code
SWH-2100E Software House Smart Card Flex Reader Contactless smart card reader; reads 13.56 MHz serial number and MIFARE sectors; single gang mount for Europe; Wiegand output; Flex version supports flashing new firmware; Light Grey.
05/11
Chapter 8.3 Page 5

Features
MIFARE Sectors Configurable Wiegand Output Reads Unique Serial Number or Programmed Sector Data Flexible version available allowing users to simply flash new card protocols or formats directly to the reader.
Multi-Technology Readers
Software Houses Multi-Technology Readers provide the industrys first single reader solution for reading serial numbers from multiple 13.56 MHz smart card technologies, MIFARE encrypted sectors, and most common 125 KHz Prox cards, providing an incredibly versatile access control solution. This cost-effective solution enables customers to transition from proximity to smart cards over time or to utilise both smart cards and proximity cards in their facility. The Multi-Technology Readers are available as a basic Fixed model or a Flex model that allows users to update the readers with new functionality or enhancements at any time with flash firmware.
1 Reader continuously cycles between 125 KHz and 13.56 MHz and depending on the frequency cycle when card is presented, reader will either output the proximity card number or the unencrypted smart card serial number.
The Flexible readers save significant time and money by allowing users to simply flash new card protocols or formats directly to the reader. Flexible versions also support the capability to read MIFARE sectors. Additional Benefits Read multiple Proximity Cards HID 125 KHz Casi-Rusco ProxLite Deister 125 KHz Read Multiple Smartcards ISO 14443A DESFire MIFARE ISO 14443B, ISO 15693 My-D SLI-2 iCLASS
Agency Certifications (pending) Minimum Wiring Cable Recommendations Colour Dimensions Model SWH-3000 Model SWH-3100 Model SWH-4100 Model SWH-4200 Environment Operating Temperature Range Humidity Range Index of Protection Power Supply Read Range Read Time FCC Part 15, CE, UL 294 Full Outdoor 4 Conductors 22 AWG, Stranded Black or Light Grey
120mm x 45mm x 25mm, Mullion 84mm x 84mm x 28mm, Single Gang 84mm x 84mm x 28mm, Single Gang 84mm x 84mm x 28mm, Single Gang with Keypad (Not in EMEA) UL Listed for Interior or Exterior -35 to 67C 0 to 100% IP65 8 16 VDC 125 mA max @ 12 VDC Up to 10 cm depending on technology of card Technology Dependent (typically < 300 msec)
Product Codes
SWH-3000 Black mullion style Multi-Technology 125K and smart card reader. Reads HID, Casi Prox-Lite & Deister 125K prox PLUS MIFARE serial, Desfire serial & iCLASS serial numbers. Gives a Wiegand output can be configured by programming card. Grey mullion style Multi-Technology 125K and smart card reader. Reads HID, Casi Prox-Lite & Deister 125K prox PLUS MIFARE serial, Desfire serial & iCLASS serial numbers. Gives a Wiegand output - can be configured by programming card. Grey wall switch style Multi-Technology 125K and smart card reader. Reads HID, Casi Prox-Lite & Deister 125K prox PLUS MIFARE serial, Desfire serial & iCLASS serial numbers. Gives a Wiegand output - can be configured by programming card. Grey wall switch Multi-Technology Flex Reader Contactless smart card and proximity reader; reads 125KHz proximity cards, 13.56 MHz serial number, and MIFARE sectors; single gang mount for Europe; Wiegand output; Flex version sup-ports flashing new firmware; Light Grey. Access Control Catalogue 05/11
SWH-3000G
SWH-3100EG
SWH-4100EG
Chapter 8.3 Page 6

Features
Truly universal smart card reader reads over five different types of contactless smart cards Extended read range, 200300 mm Perfect for parking applications Unique easy-tune adjustment improves performance, reduces impact of nearby metallic objects Secure transmission of card data through data encryption and custom keys Indoor/outdoor use, IP65 rated Future-proof download reader firmware to support new functionality or enhancements Built-in tamper switch provides for secure installation Plug-in screw terminals reduce installation time FCC, CE, and ISO compliant
Extended Range Smart Card Reader

With a 200300 mm read range, the Software House Extended Range Smart Card Reader (SWH-2400) is ideal for parking entrances, warehouses, and other access control applications where the convenience of a longer read range is desired. The Extended Range Smart Card Reader is ISO compliant and provides robust security by reading encrypted sector data from MIFARE cards, using standard or custom read keys. It also reads card serial numbers from the following smart card technologies: ISO 14443A (including DESFire and MIFARE), ISO 14443B, and ISO 15693 (including MyD, SLI-2, iCLASS), providing an incredibly versatile access control solution. The Extended Range Smart Card Reader is housed in a rugged, IP65 rated enclosure. Optimum read range is assured through its unique easy-tune feature, which provides a quick method to tune the reader and reduce the impact of nearby metallic objects on the read range. New functionality or enhancements to the extended range reader can be easily added in the field through its firmware download feature, saving significant time and money by allowing you to simply flash new card protocols or formats directly to the reader.
Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Minimum Wiring Cable Recommendations 22 AWG (60 m max) or 18 AWG (150 m max) stranded Plug-in screw terminals Power and ground Two-wire Wiegand signal (data 0, data 1) External green and red LED control External beeper control Two-wire RS485 for updating firmware Light grey 300 x 300 x 30 mm 5 conductors including one LED control line Operational Read Range Nominal 200-300 mm1 200 mm for ISO 14443 A/B cards 250-300 mm for ISO 15693 cards Technology dependent (typically < 300 msec)
Read Time
Wiring Terminations Wiring Details
Programming and Format Information Card Technologies Supported MIFARE encrypted sectors ISO 14443A serial number MIFARE serial number DESFire serial number ISO 14443B serial number ISO 15693 serial number iCLASS serial number Output Configurations Using Program Card
Colour Electrical Power Supply
8-30 VDC 300 mA max @ 12 VDC (Independent local power supply required)
Environmental Environment Operating Temperature Humidity Range Index of Protection
Indoor/Outdoor -35oC to 67oC 0 to 95% IP65
Pass-through2 Fixed length3 (26-bit, 32-bit, 35-bit, 37-bit, 64-bit) MIFARE sectors Select a sector (0-15) Customize encryption keys Specify data format (number of bits output)
Regulatory Agency Certifications FCC Part 15, CE Open Standards Compliance ISO 14443 A/B, ISO 15693
Depends on the technology of the card and environmental conditions. Pass-through - the default setting for Software House Multi-Technology Readers that allows the reader to send all the data on the card. 3 Fixed length - the reader can be configured to output a fixed length by padding or truncating data on the card.
2
Product Code
SWH-2400 Long Range Multitech reader Chapter 8.3 Page 7
05/11

Features
Low cost proximity card solution Multiple applications can be loaded on to one card Suitable for photo ID
MIFARE Classic (Standard)

The MIFARE Classic card is a memory storage device, where the memory is divided into segments and blocks with simple security mechanisms for applications such as access control, time and attendance, logical access and cashless vending etc. Thanks to its reliability and low cost, these cards are widely used. The card operates on 13.56MHz frequency and is a contactless smart card. The MIFARE Classic 1k offers 1024 bytes of data storage, split into 16 sectors (0-15); each sector is protected by two different keys, called A and B. They can be programmed for operations like reading, writing, increasing value blocks, etc.). MIFARE Classic 4k offers 4096 bytes split into forty sectors, of which 32 are the same size as in the 1K with eight more that are quadruple size sectors. The first sector (sector 0) contains the serial number of the card (CSN) and certain other manufacturer data. The Mifare CSN is a 32bit ID which can be read by CSN card readers and output in Wiegand format to an access control system. This number is not 100% unique though - so it is always preferable for access control to encode a sector and secure with a specific read key. That brings the net storage capacity of these cards down to 752 bytes for Classic 1k and 3440 bytes for Classic 4k.
Product Codes
01485.000 01482.000 Mifare Classic 1k memory smart card - unencoded Mifare Classic 4k memory smart card - unencoded
Features
Strong adhesive - ideal for fixing to ISO cards and other surfaces Supplied un-encoded - but all sectors with transport keys so can easily be encoded for access control, cashless vending or other purposes Allows transition from older card technologies without the need to change all cards on site. Card serial Number (CSN) can be read by access control readers for entry level Mifare solutions.
Mifare 1k label
ADTs MIFARE Adhesive Sticker Tag can turn a plastic ID badge into a MIFARE Smartcard. Effortlessly upgrade from prox, magstripe or barium ferrite technology by simply attaching the small, square MIFARE Tag to your existing card. The MIFARE Adhesive Tag will also adhere to any non-metallic device, to instantly create a contactless smartcard. This MIFARE Adhesive sticker is ideal for diverse applications such as access control, cashless vending, public transportation, corporate and campus applications, event ticketing, customer loyalty and photo ID cards. Manufactured to the highest quality standards, MIFARE products have the memory structure and capacity to store multiple applications on a single credential. Securely separated sectors, each protected by a set of two keys and programmable access conditions, allow complex applications and provide for future expansion. The data on the sticker is protected with encryption keys used in the mutual authentication process. Therefore, no important data will be shared until the tag and reader have been authenticated to each other.
Product Code
MIF1KSA1 Mifare 1k self adhesive label -34 x 34mm Order in multiples of 100
Chapter 8.3 Page 8
05/11
Chapter 8.4 Cards and Readers ADT 34bit MIFARE Proximity

Tyco Fire & Security's 34bit Mifare format reinforces our commitment to provide customers with a flexible and highly secure solution. Mifare is a cost effetive alternative to yesterdays' proximity technology. Providing ease of use for a customer and flexibility for future needs.
Features
Technologically more advance Provides higher level of security using encryption keys to protect the physical access ID credential Supports multiple applications on a single card such as physical access, logical access, e-purse Has larger memory capacity to store biometric template
MIFARE Readers/Cards
The cards are preprogrammed for secure access control use - but all other sectors in the Mifare card are left with industry standard transport keys on the sectors allowing the customer to use these for both security and non security purposes. We have not locked the sectors as this would have required the customer to use our card bureau for non accesscontrol applications. Typical applications which take advantage of the Mifare cards flexibilty are cashles vending, logical access for PCs, loyalty schemes, health & safety records, ID/biometric storage etc. What is MIFARE? MIFARE stands for Mikron Fare Collection Philips acquired Mikron in 1996 World's most widely deployed contactless smart card technology- 400 Million Served Implementation of ISO 14443A standard (Mifare = ISO14443A ) Transmission Card - Reader is 13.56MHz
Technical Specification Reader Technical Data

Dimensions (mm) Installation Housing material Power consumption Operating frequency Electrical protection 80 x 80 x 16 Semi-Flush and surface fixing ASA 8... 30V/DC o <80mA 13,56 MHz Reverse polarity and transient protection Protection IP 65 Operating temperature -25C to +70C Reading distance Up to 50 mm, depending on transponder and environment Protocol Wiegand. Data formats: Unique ID number programmed sector 1 Connection 12-pin screw terminal connector Accessories Chameleon Cover CCS, distance plate SPS, distance frame AP5, tamperswitch plate TSS, Tamper-protection Optional spacer with tamper magnet frame, reed contact
Mifare Memory
Authentication Keys Read Range Operating frequency ID Numbering Sector use ID Format MAD AID Printing
Memory: 8192 Bits (1K Byte), 16 x 64 byte Sectors, 4 Blocks per Sector 3 pass mutual 2 x 48-bit keys per sector Up to 10 cm (4") subject to reader type 13,56 MHz Sequential internal programmed number, hot stamp printed Sector 1 34 Bit secured by unique Tyco Key 517A Tyco Fire and Security, EMEA Access Control Purposes. Suitable for use with direct image or thermal transfer printers.
Product Codes
RDR-MIF-34B SWH Branded MIFARE Smartcard reader. Programmed to read the Tyco EMEA 34 BIT ID Code in Sector 1. Supplied with Spacer and SWH Branded cover. TPM3014 Mifare 34 BIT Sector 1 programmed card 1K, (85mm x 55mm) Tyco Standard Keys, Tyco AID, Sector 1 for Access Control. All other Sectors Empty and set with Std Mifare Shipping Keys PVC Plain White. Chapter 8.4 Page 1
Card Technical Data

SO standard Dimensions Weight 05/11 ISO 14443 Type ISO Standard CR80 85.6mm x 54mm x 0.76mm. 6g
01501.000
Chapter 8.4 Page 2
05/11
Chapter 8.5 - Cards and Readers ioProxTM Proximity Readers

Features
Choose from Kantech eXtended Secure Format (XSF) or 26-bit Wiegand format Digital Signal Processing (DSP) ensures quick and reliable card reading Weatherproof design for indoor and outdoor applications Integrated piezo buzzer & bicolour reader LED Quick connect terminal blocks (P225 and P325 series) allows for easy wiring and saves time and money Up to 73 cm read range (P600)
Integration by Design Kantech ioProx readers and cards provide an ideal access control solution. They are a secure and easy-to-install solution to manage and control access all the while ensuring people, materials and operations are safe. ioProx readers and cards seamlessly integrate with Kantech access control systems including door controllers and EntraPass Security Management Software. Secure Card Formats All ioProx cards are dual encoded with both 26-bit Wiegand format and Kantech eXtended Secure Format (XSF). These same ioProx cards can be used either with 26-bit Wiegand or XSF format card readers. Kantech XSF readers are compatible with Entrapass Software which allows access to over 4 billion codes, protecting against card duplication. ioProx Readers support dual authentication by combining ioProx card presentation along with a Personal Identification Number (PIN) entered on the readers integrated keypad. Presenting Our Credentials ioProx cards feature proven, reliable technology that s eamlessly integrates with ioProx readers. Cards are available in a variety of shapes and materials. They offer a flexible design and can be attached to a key ring, badge clip or lanyard. In the case of disk shaped P50TAG, it can be attached to any non-metallic surface such as a smart phone. And some cards are suitable for dye sublimation printing. Selecting The Right Reader Choose the right ioProx reader for the specific application: single gang box, mullion, integrated keypad and long read range. Readers can also be selected based on reading distances, output options and other considerations.
Read Range Depending on the model selected and the operating conditions, read range varies from 16.5 cm to 73 cm. With its extended range, the P600 Long Range Reader is ideal for parking lots and other long read range applications. Appealing/Durable Readers ioProx readers are attractive, compact, weatherized and vandal-resistant, making them suitable for installation in a variety of indoor and outdoor environments. The bicolour reader LED indicates system status. The LED turns green to indicate a successful read when the card is presented to the reader. In addition, the LED can indicate if the alarm system is armed or disarmed. The piezo buzzer provides audible indication of a successful read.
02/11
Chapter 8.5 Page 1

Common ioProx Card Reader Specifications Both XSF and 26-bit Wiegand format ioProx readers are compatible with ioProx cards Transmission Frequency125 kHz LED Indicator Bicolour (Red, Green) Piezo Buzzer Integrated Operating Temperature Range -35C to 65C Certifications FCC Part 15 Class B, CE, UL Environmental RoHS, WEEE Colour Black
Model Number
Maximum Distance From Controller P225/ 11.4 x 4 .4 x 2.1 Up to 16.5cm XSF or 26-bit 4.5 to 14 VDC, Input Power: 5 VDC P225KP Wiegand max. 45 mA 137 m 12 VDC Mullion 300 m P325/ 11.5 x 7.1 x 2.1 Up to 20.5cm XSF or 26-bit 4.5 to 14 VDC, Input Power: 5 VDC P325KP Wiegand max. 45 mA 150 m 12 VDC Single Gang - 300 m P600 285 x 285 x Up to 73cm XSF or 26-bit 12 to 28 VDC, Input Power: Long Range 31.5 Wiegand, max. 1 A 12 VDC - 137 m configurable 28 VDC - 300 m
Dimensions cm
Read Range
Format
Input Power
Cable Type
Tamper
Unshielded #22 AWG Optional Belden #8742, 3 twisted pairs Unshielded #22 AWG Optional Belden #8742, 3 twisted pairs Unshielded #18 AWG Integrated Belden #5304UE, 6 conductor
ioProx Card Selection Chart

ioProx Cards Common Operating Temperature Range Model # Card Type P10SHL Standard ABS/ PVC Clamshell P20DYE PVC laminate Thin Card P30DMG PVC laminate Thin Card & Unencoded Mag Stripe P40KEY Welded ABS P50TAG Self-Adhesive Colour Dimensions cm White 8.5 x 5.4 x 0.1 White 8.5 x 5.4 x 0.07 White 8.5 x 5.4 x 0.07 -45C to 70C Weight 6.8 g 6.8 g 6.8 g Read Range by Reader Model P225/P225KP P325/P325KP P600 Up to Up to Up to 16.6 cm 20.8 cm 73 cm Up to 8.5 cm Up to 8.5 cm Up to 48 cm Up to 8.5 cm Up to 8.5 cm Up to 48 cm Direct Print Non-printable Both sides Both sides Slot Vertical No+ No+
Grey
5 x 2 x 0.5
5g 1g
Up to 9.3 cm Up to 8.4 cm
Up to 10.4 cm Up to 10.4 cm
White 2.5 cm diameter
Up to 40 cm Up to 27 cm
Non-printable Non-printable
Key Ring Hole No
+ Card contains marks for user to make horizontal or vertical slot punch.
Chapter 8.5 Page 2
02/11

Product Codes
P225XSF P225W26 ioProxTM Reader MULLION XSF Format , Typical read range up to 16.5 cm, Dimensions: 114.3 x 44.5 x 21.3mm ioProxTM Reader MULLION Wiegand 26 Format , Typical read range up to 16.5 cm, Dimensions: 114.3 x 44.5 x 21.3mm
P225KPXSF P225KPW26
ioProxTM MULL Reader with Keypad , XSF Format, Typical read range up to 16.5 cm, Dimensions: 114.3 x 44.5 x 21.3mm ioProxTM MULL Reader with Keypad, Wiegand 26 Format, Typical read range up to 16.5 cm, Dimensions: 114.3 x 44.5 x 21.3mm
P325XSF P325W26
ioProxTM Reader XSF FORMA , Typical read range up to 20.5 cm, Dimensions 115.6 x 71.1 x 21.3mm ioProxTM Reader Wiegand 26 Format , Typical read range up to 20.5 cm, Dimensions 115.6 x 71.1 x 21.3mm
P325KPXSF P325KPW26
ioProxTM S/GANG Reader with Keypad, XSF Format, Typical read range up to 20.5 cm, Dimensions 115.6 x 71.1 x 21.3mm ioProxTM S/GANG Reader with Keypad, Wiegand 26 Format, Typical read range up to 20.5 cm, Dimensions 115.6 x 71.1 x 21.3mm
P600
P600 ioProxTM proximity long range reader, unshielded cable, Extended Secure Format and Weigand 26 bit selectable (Black). P600 Compatible proximity cards: P10SHL (Standard card), P20DYE (Dye-Sub card), P30DMG (Dye-Sub card with non encoded mag-stripe) and P40KEY(Keytag).
P-TAMP
Tamper switch for P225 P325 readers.
K1-W26
Keypad for internal or external use. Provides 26 bit Wiegand output.
02/11
Chapter 8.5 Page 3
ioProxTM Cards
Features
Dual Encoded Cards - Kantech eXtended Secure Format (XSF) - 26-bit Wiegand format (W26) Read range up to 73 cm using P600 Long Range reader Long-life passive card for unlimited number of reads 5 models to meet the requirements of any application
ioProxTM Proximity cards ensure increased security with dual XSF and W26 encoded formats, whilst providing customers with the flexibility to choose from multiple card designs.
What about Site Codes?

Site codes or families were originally created to provide for the production of a larger number of 26 bits cards by duplicating cards rather than increasing the available number of user codes. The cards were ordered for a specific site and the manufacturers, in the beginning, were keeping track of what had been shipped where. When a new site was installed, the site was provided with a site code that had never shipped to that immediate geographic area, thus, maintaining the level of security of the card. Also, the fact that all the cards on a specific site had the same site code, the control equipment did not have to store the site code in each of the users code, thus reducing memory requirements on the hardware. As the market for access control exploded, it became almost impossible to maintain such a strategy. Although there are still some manufacturers working this way (the change represents considerable modifications to both hardware and software), the trend is to provide cards with a greater number of bits and making obsolete the notion of site codes. This new method also means faster delivery of cards, even for add-ons to existing sites, right out of the manufacturers or distributors regular stock. As long as the card number is unique, such as the serial number on currency bills, the security is maintained. Manufacturers should all be requested to provide a written statement certifying that their cards are unique and will never be duplicated.
ioProxTM Cards
P10SHL ioProxTM Standard Shell Card ioProxTM Standard shell tag/card for use with ioPassTM and Kantech EntraPassTM, ioProxTM readers. Part No .....................................................P10SHL Typical read range P100XSF Mini .......................................up to 10cm P200XSF Mullion ..................................up to 12.5cm P300XSF Single Gang..........................up to 14 cm P400XSF Double Gang ........................up to 15 cm Dimensions (H x W x D) cm. ...................8.6 x 5.40 x 0.18 Dimensions (H x W x D)in .......................3.375 x 2.125 x 0.070 Card Construction ...................................P10SHL proximity cards are slot punched and are .................................................................compatible with most adhesive photo pouches Operating temperatures ..........................-45C to 70C Colour ......................................................White Weight ......................................................6.8g Certifications ............................................UL, CE,FCC ioProxTM Dye sublimination card (suitable for direct card printing) for use with with ioPassTM and Kantech EntraPassTM,ioProxTM readers.. The card is dual format - XSF & the industry standard 26 bit Wiegand. Part No .....................................................P20DYE Typical read range P100XSF Mini........................................up to 7.5cm P200XSF Mullion...................................up to 9cm P300XSF Single Gang ..........................up to 10 cm P400XSF Double Gang ........................up to 11.5 cm Dimensions (H x W x D) cm ....................8.6 x 5.4 x 0.079 Dimensions (H x W x D)in........................3.375 x 2.125 x 0.031 Card Construction....................................P2DYE Cards are thin, flexible polyvinyl chloride laminates Operating temperatures...........................-45C to 70C Colour.......................................................Glossy white on both sides Weight ......................................................6.8g Certifications.............................................UL, CE,FCC
P20DYE
ioProxTM Dye-Sub Card
Chapter 8.5 Page 4
02/11

P30DMG ioProxTM Dye-Sub Card (with unencoded mag stripe) ioProxTM Dye sublimination card (suitable for direct card printing) for use with with ioPassTM and Kantech EntraPassTM ioProxTM readers.. The card is dual format - XSF & the industry standard 26 bit Wiegand. Part No .....................................................P30DMG Typical read range P100XSF Mini........................................up to 7.5cm P200XSF Mullion...................................up to 9cm P300XSF Single Gang ..........................up to 10 cm P400XSF Double Gang ........................up to 11.5 cm Dimensions (H x W x D) cm ....................8.6 x 5.4 x 0.079 Dimensions (H x W x D)in........................3.375 x 2.125 x 0.031 Magnetic stripe..........................................Unencoded Card Construction....................................P2DYE Cards are thin, flexible polyvinyl chloride laminates Operating temperatures...........................-45C to 70C Colour.......................................................Glossy white on both sides Weight ......................................................6.8g Certifications.............................................UL, CE,FCC
P40KEY
ioProxTM Keytag
ioProxTM proximity keytag for use with ioPassTM Kantech EntraPassTM ioProxTM readers. The keytag is dual format - XSF & the industry standard 26 bit Wiegand. Part No......................................................P40KEY Typical read range P100XSF Mini........................................up to 3.8cm P200XSF Mullion...................................up to 3.8cm P300XSF Single Gang...........................up to 4.0 cm P400XSF Double Gang.........................up to 4.5 cm Dimensions (H x W x D) cm.....................5.0 x 2.0 x 0.5cm Dimensions (H x W x D)in........................1.96 x 0.79 x 0.19 Keytag Construction.................................P40Key package is strong and resistant to cracking and breaking Operating temperatures............................-45C to 70C Colour........................................................Black Weight.......................................................5g Certifications.............................................UL, CE,FCC
P50TAG
Adhere the tag to any non metallic devices to provide access control capability to users. Ideal to upgrade from Wiegand, magnetic stripe or ferrite technologies Part No.....................................................P50TAG Typical read range P100XSF/W26 .....................................up to 4.58 cm P200XSF/W26 .....................................up to 4.59 cm P300XSF/W26 .....................................up to 5 cm P400XSF/W26 .....................................up to 5.78 cm P555KPXSF/W26 ................................up to 5 cm P600 ....................................................up to 27 cm Tag dimensions cm ................................2.5 cm diameter Tag construction .....................................PVC, back with self adhesive Colour .....................................................White Operating temperature ...........................-45C to 70C Weight ....................................................1 g Certifications............................................UL, CE,FCC
Security: The readers recognise over 4 billion unique codes. Using Kantechs XSF cards (eXtended Secure Format) provides increased security and absolute guarantee against card duplication.
02/11
Chapter 8.5 Page 5
Chapter 8.5 Page 6
02/12
Chapter 8.6 CCure RM Series Readers RM Series Card Readers

Features
Universal packaging accommodates magnetic stripe and proximity technologies Keypad and backlit LCD display 2 supervised inputs and 2 control point outputs Operates in Star or Multi-drop configuration Built-in tamper switch Readers electronics are coated against dust and moisture UL 294/1076, FCC, CE, C-Tick compliant
RM Series Card Readers

The RM Series Card Readers offer you a choice technologies For EMEA we support both Proximity and Magnetic Stripe. This universal design lets you mix and match different technologies on the same system while maintaining a consistent appearance. All RM Series readers come with three separate LEDs (red, green, amber), which indicate a range of conditions. An audible alert can also be set from the system host. The readers also provide two supervised inputs and two outputs. The RM Series also supports the ARM-1 relay module. A keypad version (RM2 series) can also be provided for PIN use. Optionally, a backlit LCD display (RM2L Series) can be added to any RM Series Reader. The display shows the time, date, system conditions, and various user prompts (in English). The RM Series Card Readers are compatible with existing apC/8Xs and MRM readers, although it may be necessary to upgrade the apC/8X firmware. All RM Series Readers use the same wire and connectors, which simplifies installation and service.
Product Codes Proximity Range

RM1-PH RM2-PH RM2L-PH RM3-PH Software House Proximity Reader HID Version Software House Proximity Reader HID Version with Keypad Software House Proximity Reader HID Version with Keypad and LCD Display Software House Mullion Proximity Reader HID Version Standard Mag-Stripe Card Reader (Panasonic head) Standard Mag-Stripe Card Reader with Keypad Mullion Mag-Stripe Card Reader (Panasonic head) Standard Mag-Stripe Card Reader with Keypad and LCD Display
Mag Stripe Range

RM1-MP RM2-MP RM3-MP RM2L-MP
05/11
Chapter 8.6 Page 1
Chapter 8.6 CCure RM Series Readers
Chapter 8.6 Page 2
05/11
Chapter 8.7 Cards and Readers Nedap AVI Introduction

Do you know whos inside? We do! The story of the Trojan Horse holds a relevant message even today. For real security and peace of mind, you must not only identify an approaching vehicle, but also the driver inside. Identifying only the vehicle rather than the driver could encourage theft of a vehicle to access your facilities, making the vehicle a Trojan Horse by giving automated access to what is perceived as an authorized vehicle. Expand your protection zone With a Nedap driver based AVI security system, you are assured a vehicle can never get access to a secured area unless occupied by an authorized driver. This enhanced functionality expands the protection zone beyond your buildings doors to the perimeter of your property. Driver and vehicle identification has become a security standard. It is no longer enough to just identify the vehicle, which could easily be stolen or or have it's license plates copied. Nedap has led the development in this area for the last decade, with our offering of in-vehicle Booster devices, which can read and boost standard access credentials up to distances of 10 m at speeds up to 200 km/h. How does driver based AVI work? A driver based tag is made up of two components: The Booster is mounted behind the windshield of the vehicle. The building access card (driver ID) is inserted into it to identify the driver. The Booster reads the card and transmits an amplified signal to the TRANSIT reader at ranges up to 33 ft [10 m]. This will allow plenty of time for the back end security controller to activate the barrier or gate opening prior to the time the vehicle arrives. The Booster device will in effect act as the lock and the building access card as the key. In some models the Booster features an imbedded vehicle ID, allowing the system to match the right driver with the right vehicle. Removal of the Driver ID is ensured as it is required for building access once the driver leaves his vehicle. Only the Booster, which in itself can not activate the barrier or open the gate, is left behind in the vehicle.
Booster (a contactless building access card) Personnel ID card (an in-vehicle reader/transmitter)
Join the list of driver secured facilities with TRANSIT AVI! Applications include airport and port security, defense, utility, corporate and education campuses, police, fire brigades, public transport vehicles and other installations where vehicles must be assigned to a specific driver. The system allows for mixed use of vehicles from trucks, vans or passenger cars to enter the same gate without the need to install multi-level readers, which are often hit by approaching vehicles.
Vehicle based AVI Vehicle based tags are also available. These tags are programmed with a unique ID number which, are mounted either to the windshield of the vehicle or to the exterior of the vehicle. Vehicle based tags are used for convenient long range vehicle access, parking, automated truck weigh scales, yard management, waste management etc. Operating Principle AVI The AVI system is made up of a reader and a tag. The tag is identified up to 33 feet [10 meters] as soon as it comes into range of the reader. Operating Principle AVI The AVI system is made up of a reader and a tag. The tag is identified up to 33 feet [10 meters] as soon as it comes into range of the reader. Booster card technology interfaces The Booster offers easy front end integration by using a common building access credential. No authorization of new numbers in the host system is required. Supported card technologies are; HID Prox & HID iClass LEGIC MIFARE EM Nedap 05/11 Access Control Catalogue Chapter 8.7 Page 1
Chapter 8.7 Cards and Readers Nedap AVI Readers & Accessories
Nedap has a wide range of AVI (Automatic Vehicle Identification) solutions - offering various read distances and card technologies tomeet a customer requirements.
Features
Compact industrial design Read range up to 10 meters Object speed up to 200 km/h Well defined adjustable read range Multi-channel frequency offset Variety of integrated interfaces Included wall mounting
Nedap TRANSIT Standard reader

The TRANSIT Standard reader is a long-range vehicle identification reader with built-in antenna and a wide variety of interfaces to ensure seamless and flexible integration. The TRANSIT Standard reader consists of a controller with a built-in antenna for quick, easy installation. The TRANSIT Standard reader enables automatic identification of AVI tags from distances up to 10 meters [33 ft] with traveling speed up to 200 km/h [125 mph]. Due to the long read range, the reader can be installed out of the reach of vandals. The identification lobe of the reader is a directed beam, offering precise determination of the detection area. Frequency offset The TRANSIT reader operates on a frequency, selected and set at factory. The frequency offset allows multiple reader to operate in close vicinity of each other without interference. Proximity antenna connection The NEDAP 120 kHz module is integrated in the Standard version of the TRANSIT reader and allows connection of an additional proximity antenna directly to the reader Read range adjustment The reader efficiently resolves typical multi-lane, entry and exit reader challenges. The read range of the TRANSIT standard reader can be adjusted to offer secure and reliable identification in a specific application. Weather proof protected housing The TRANSIT Standard reader is weatherproof protected with an IP65 [approx. NEMA 4x] certified housing. The reader continues to operate reliable under harsh environmental conditions and is able to withstand exposure to rain, snow and ice Interfaces & protocols The TRANSIT Standard reader is designed for seamless and flexible integration to existing management systems in the industry, such as parking management, traffic control, loading control and access control systems. Several communication interfaces to the host system are available such as RS232, RS422, 20mA Current Loop, Profibus DP and TCP/IP Also open industry standards such as Wiegand . and Omron are supported. On request also customer specific protocols can be implemented.
Operating frequency
Europe: 2.400 2.482 GHz US: 2.438 2.457 GHz Dimensions 310 x 250 x 100 mm Weight 5 kg [9.9 pounds] Housing Stainless steel (AISI304) housing with ABS cover Protection IP65 [approx. NEMA4x] Detection range Up to 10 meters Range check Acoustic by built-in beeper Operating temperature -30+60C Object speed UP to 200 km/h [125 mph] at appropriate distance Power Europe: 230 VAC +10%, 100 mA, 50-60 Hz / 2230 VDC, max 1A US: 22..30 VDC, max. 1A Power consumption <25VA (on AC), <20 Watt (on DC) Frequency offset 138 channels [US 32 channels] channel spacing 600 kHz to avoid interference, to be used when TRANSIT readers are installed in close vicinity of each other Chapter 8.7 Page 2
Product Code
NED-9990410
NEDAP TRANSIT Standard long range vehicle identification reader - suitable for external use - ideal for vehicle access, car park and automatic vehicle identification through toll barriers. This includes the HID interface board*. This is the EU version requires 2230 VDC, max 1A
05/11

Features
Complete stand alone vehicle access system Stores 1.000 authorisation Remote web based access Read range up to 10 meters Well defined
Transit Edge
The TRANSIT Edge is a complete stand alone system developed to allow for quick, easy and cost efficient deployment of perimeter security access to a wide range of facilities.
The HID Interface Board enables decoding of HID prox cards in the TRANSIT Standard when using Boosters in combination with HID prox cards.
Product Code
NED- 9876510
NEDAP TRANSIT EDGE long range stand alone long range vehicle access system suitable for stand alone applications such as gated community access, resort access, perimeter security, special event access and remote employee parking facilities where a stand alone long range vehicle access solution is required without complex installation
Transit Standard & Edge Mounting Accessories Stock Codes

NED-5626595
Description
NEDAP Pole mounting kit Stainless steel pole mounting kit suitable for Nedap TRANSIT Standard reader, attaches to wall mounting bracket Key results; Min. 40 mm round pole and max. 190 mm round pole Max. 150 mm square pole
NED-7562640
NEDAP Weather protection hood Long range reader weatherproof cover, required for extreme weather conditions with long lasting exposure to sun or rain Recommended to apply a weather protection hood to protect the reader from direct water spray, rain or temperature rise by means of long lasting exposure to the sun. The weather protection hood can be mounted on the back side of the TRANSIT Standard or Edge reader.
05/11
Chapter 8.7 Page 3

Features
Consistent reading up to 4m [12 ft] Elegant slim design LED and audible read indication Optional prox/smart card interface On-site adjustable reading Multi-channel frequency offset Weather proof protected housing USB service connection
Nedap TRANSIT Entry Reader

The TRANSIT Entry reader represents the latest in technology for door access and long read range applications. Featuring a slim elegant designed housing the TRANSIT Entry reader makes a perfect fit to any door or vehicle gate environment. Reliable consistent reading The TRANSIT Entry reads AVI tags at distances up to 4 meters [12 ft] reliably and consistently. Variety of interfaces & protocols The TRANSIT Entry reader is designed for seamless integration to existing parking management and access control systems. The USB interface offers easy access to the unit for diagnostics and servicing. Multi-channel frequency offset The multi-channel synthesizer allows on-site adjustment of the frequency channel in case of radio interference LED and audible read indication The built-in beeper and high intensity LED provide audible and visual feedback on the identification of a tag in all operating modes.
Applications Typical TRANSIT Entry reader applications involve handsfree; access to emergency rooms, access for disabled, door access, personnel tracking, gated community access, access to parking facilities.
Operating frequency
Europe: 2.400 2.482 GHz US: 2.438 2.457 GHz Dimensions 200 x 220 x 45 mm Weight 1 kg Housing Aluminium chassis with UL94 ABS cover Protection IP65 [approx. NEMA4x] Detection range Up to 4 meters [12 ft] with AVI tags Range check Acoustic by built-in beeper Operating temperature -30 +60C Power 1224 VDC +10% linear supply recommended Power consumption <20 Watt Frequency offset 32 channels, spacing 600 kHz
Product Codes
NED-9876200
NEDAP TRANSIT Entry reader - designed for door or vehicle entry points. Reads AVI tags. The TRANSIT Entry reads AVI tags from distances up to 4m subject to the environment and conditions. Requires 12 to 24VDC power and is IP65 rated.
Transit Standard & Edge Mounting Accessories Stock Code Description

NED- 9875840 TRANSIT Entry Adjustable mounting Bracket Mounting kit for TRANSIT Entry allowing for easy reader alignment. Pole or wall mounting Max. round pole 133mm Max square pole 100 mm Multi Technology Reader (MTR) module The MTR module is a proximity smartcard interface module, allowing the TRANSIT Entry reader to operate with existing credentials (proximity or and smartcards) when presented to the face of the reader. Supported cards on 120 - 125 kHz; HID prox, EM and Nedap Supported cards on 13.56 MHz; HID iClass CSN, Mifare, Legic Advant UID and other ISO 14443 and 15693 compliant cards
NED- 7816650
Chapter 8.7 Page 4
05/11
Chapter 8.7 Cards and Readers Vehicle Based Tags

Features
Long range single ID tag Suits interior of a passenger vehicle Excellent performance Easy windshield mounting with integrated suction pad Automatic transmission of vehicle ID Option with switch for operator controlled transmission Applications; vehicle access, gated communities, employee vehicle access
Window Button
Long range vehicle tag featured with a single ID and used for vehicle identification / access applications.
Product Code
NED-9882650 NEDAP Window Button Long range vehicle tag for use with Nedap AVI reader. Attaches by suction to inside of windscreen. Must be clear of metallic screen area. Gives up to 10m read range with TRANSIT Standard reader and up to 4m (12 feet) with TRANSIT Entry. Has a built- in lithium battery. Wiegand output.
Features
Long range single ID tag Suits interior of a passenger vehicle Excellent performance Easy windshield mounting with integrated suction pad Automatic transmission of vehicle ID Option with switch for operator controlled transmission Applications; vehicle access, gated communities, employee vehicle access
Nedap Window Button

Long range vehicle tag with switch to allow user to adjust time and distance of read. Once the switch is activated the Window Button Switch will transmit the tag ID to the TRANSIT reader for 5 seconds.
Product Code
NED-9882480 NEDAP Window Button Switch. Vehicle tag with button activation. Button press activates transmitter for 5 seconds. For use with Nedap AVI reader. Attaches by suction to inside of windscreen. Must be clear of metallic screen area. Gives up to 10m read range with TRANSIT Standard reader and up to 4m with TRANSIT Entry. Has a built-in lithium battery. Wiegand output.
05/11
Chapter 8.7 Page 5

Features
Credit card size Identification up to 7 meters Good price/ performance ratio Optional battery low indication Optional Tag Holder for windshield mounting
Compact Tag
The Compact Tag is a slim line RF tag combining long and short range identification of 7 meters in various applications. The Compact Tag has a standardized credit card size and can be identified up to 7 meters with the TRANSIT Standard and TRANSIT Extended readers. Dual side read capability The Compact Tag features bi-faced antenna design allowing the tag to be read from both sides, eliminating the need to present the tag with one particular side facing the TRANSIT reader.
Optional embedded proximity and contact-less smart card technology The Compact Tag can optionally be featured with an embedded proximity or contact-less smart card technology for identification of the compact tag in combination with short range antennas.
Operating frequency
2.45 GHz and optional 120-125 kHz and 13.56 MHz Dimensions 85,5 x 54 x 4,9 mm credit card size Weight 20 gram Protection IP54 [approx. NEMA 2] Colour Grey, according to RAL 7035 Operating temperature -20 ... +85C Storage temperature -20 ... +85C Detection range 7 meters with TRANSIT Standard or Extended reader Humidity 10% ... 93% relative humidity, non condensing Power supply Built-in lithium battery with expected lifetime of 5 years*. Mounting Optional mounting accessories such as card keep and card clip. The card keep can be applied for mounting behind the windshield of a vehicle. Short-range identification Nedap 120 kHz and optional EM4102 compatible Inductive programmable No Identification R/O Read/only decimal number Operating modes A: Continuous transmission of the tag ID (default setting) D: Random transmission of the tag ID Documentation Compact Tag InstallGuide_English Windshield mounted tags_InstallSheet_E
*under normal usage and normal circumstances. Battery lifetime is not affected by the number of times the tag is read or RF fields from other sources
Product Codes
NED-9891900
NEDAP Window Button Long range vehicle tag for use with Nedap AVI reader. Attaches by suction to inside of windscreen. Must be clear of metallic screen area. Gives up to 10m read range with TRANSIT Standard reader and up to 4m with TRANSIT Entry. Has a built- in lithium battery. Wiegand output. Optional Mounting accessories NED-5402956 Tag Holder with suction pad, for easy windshield mounting
Chapter 8.7 Page 6
05/11

Features
ATEX-certified for applications in the petrochemical industry Identification up to 10 m Shock and vibration proof Weatherproof enclosure (IP66) Tamperproof mounting ISO compliant
Heavy Duty Tag ISO
The Heavy Duty Tag is a durable, weatherproof RFID tag ideal for applications requiring reliable long range identification in harsh environmental conditions. Meeting harsh conditions The Heavy Duty Tag complies with the ISO 10374 directive for RFID of Freight containers. This Tag is shock and vibration proof, watertight, UV stable and chemical resistant. Applications in intrinsically safe zones are allowed based on the ATEX-certificate.
The Heavy Duty Tag is ideal for tamperproof mounting by means of screws, bolts or rivets exterior on vehicle chassis. The tag can directly be mounted on a metal surface.
The Heavy Duty Tag features reliable performance up to 10 meters with the TRANSIT reader as soon as it enters the reader s detection area.
Operating frequency Dimensions Weight Protection
Enclosure material ATEX product category Vibration Shock Colour Operating temperature Storage temperature Detection range
2.45 GHz and 120 kHz 170 x 60 x20 mm 112 gram IP66 for exterior mounting to vehicle and container chassis [approx. NEMA 4x] ASA/PC
Product Code
NED-9875980 Intrinsically safe vehicle ID tag for use with Nedap AVI reader. Attaches permanently to the outside of a vehicle, forklift, container or trailer and provides up to 10m read range with TRANSIT Standard reader. Has a built-in Lithium battery expected life time of up to 8 year life (not affected by number of uses). Wiegand output
Humidity Power supply
Hand-held readable User programmable
Identification
II 2 G EEx ia IIC T4 DIN EN 50155, table 3. DIN EN 50155, section 10.2.11.3. Black, according to RAL 5003 -20 ... +80C -40 ... +85C 10 meters with TRANSIT PS270 Standard, TRANSIT PS270 ATEX or TRANSIT Extended reader 5 10 cm with NEDAP RF proximity handheld (ID-Logger) 10% ... 93% relative humidity, non condensing Built-in lithium battery with an expected lifetime of 8 years. Battery lifetime is not affected by the number of times the tag is read or RF fields from other sources Yes, with the ID-logger handheld Yes, the XS110 W programming unit and Label programmer software allow user-programming R/O Read/only decimal number
05/11
Chapter 8.7 Page 7
Chapter 8.7 Cards and Readers Driver Based Tags

Features
Long range driver ID (10 m ) Supported credentials HID prox, EM, Nedap MIFARE, HID iClass, LEGIC Maximizes perimeter security Simultaneous driver & vehicle ID
Nedap Prox-Booster - Single ID
The Boosters enables long range driver identifyca-tion. Driver based ID systems ensure that a vehicle can never get access to a secured area unless occu-pied by an authorized driver. The Booster is used in combination with a personal access credential. It is an easy to integrate solution for vehicle access, which eliminates the need to issue new cards. Driver based identification, how does it work? The driver based tag is made up of two elements. 1) Building access card 2) In-vehicle Booster The Booster is placed on the windshield on the inside of a vehicle. When an authorized building access card is inserted into the Booster it will be read and then boosted to the external Nedap TRANSIT reader.
The TRANSIT reader transmits the credential ID to any standard back end security panel. If the credential is authorized and access is granted the gate will open automatically. Removal of the Driver ID is ensured by designing the system to require that the access card is also used for building access. Removal of the Driver ID is ensured by designing the system to require that the access card is also used for building access
Product Codes
NEDAP Prox-Booster NED-9895736 Single ID. Long range device for driver identification. Supports proximity access control badges such as HID Prox, EM and Nedap. For use with Nedap AVI readers, provides a read range up to 10m (33 feet) with TRANSIT Standard reader. Powered by built-in lithium batteries - 10 years life time. Attaches by suction to windscreen - must be clear of metallic areas in screen.
NEDAP Prox-Booster NED-9895744 Long range in-vehicle device to identify both driver and vehicle simultaneously. For use with Nedap AVI reader, provides a read range up to 10m with TRANSIT Standard reader. Powered by built-in lithium batteries - 10 year life time. Attaches by suction to windscreen - must be clear of metallic areas in screen
NEDAP Smartcard- Booster NED-9895337 Long range in-vehicle device for driver and vehicle identification. Supports both ISO 14443 & 15693 compliant 13.56MHz credentials (Mifare, Legic UID and HID iClass CSN). For use with Nedap AVI reader. Provides a read range up to 10m (33 feet) with TRANSIT Standard reader. Powered by built-in user replaceable AAA lithium battery - 5 year life time. Attaches by suction to windscreen - must be clear of metallic areas in screen. NEDAP Transition-Booster NED-9895752 NEDAP Long range driver and vehicle ID device. In addition to Nedap, EM4102 and HID Prox also supports ISO 14443 and 15693 compliant 13,56 MHz credentials. In order to support HID Prox a HID interface board on reader level is required. Powered by built-in user replaceable AAA lithium battery - 5 year life time.
Chapter 8.7 Page 8
05/11

Technical information Part no. Operating frequency Dimensions Weight Protection Colour Operating temperature Storage temperature Detection range Humidity Mounting Certification Power supply Prox-Booster 9895744 Prox-Booster 9895736 Prox-Booster (single id) 120 kHz /2.45 GHz Smartcard-Booster 9895337 Smartcard-Booster 13.56 MHz / 2.45 GHz Transition-Booster 9895752 Transition-Booster 120 kHz / 13.56 MHz / 2.45 GHz
Operating mode
Inductive readable Identification Driver
Supported prox cards (120-125 kHz cards) Supported smartcards (13.56 MHZ)
Readers
116 x 72 x 27 mm according to Ertico OBU standard 95 gram 120 gram 120 gram IP32 [approx. NEMA 2] Grey, according to RAL 7035 -20 ... +85C -40 ... +85C Up to 10 meters [33 feet] with TRANSIT readers 10% ... 93% relative humidity, non condensing Attaches with suction pads to the windscreens on the inside of a vehicle. In case of a metallised windscreen a metal free communication window is required. EN60950, EMC 89/336/EEC, EN50081-1, EN 50082-1, ETS 0908 and FCC pending Built-in factory replaceable Built-in user replaceable Built-in user replaceable AAA lithium batteries with AAA lithium batteries lithium batteries with expected expected lifetime of 5 years. with expected lifetime of lifetime of 5 years. 5 years. C: After user activation vehicle and C: After user activation C: After user activation vehicle driver ID is transmitted (default) vehicle and driver ID is and driver ID is transmitted A: Continuous transmission of transmitted (default) (default) A: Continuous transmission vehicle ID and driver ID A: Continuous transmission of vehicle ID and driver ID of vehicle ID and driver ID Only the Prox-Boosters embedded Embedded Booster ID Embedded Booster ID Booster ID. (vehicle ID) (vehicleID) Prox-Booster: Driver ID & vehicle ID Driver ID & vehicle ID Driver ID & vehicle ID Prox-Booster single id: Driver ID HID prox, up to 40 bits (HIB HID prox, up to 40 bits (HIB required on reader level required on reader level 7819102) EM/ Nedap 7819102) EM, Nedap SO 14443 1/2A/3A (MIFARE ISO 14443 1/2A/3A (MIFARE CSN and optional sector and optional sector information information) ISO 15693 ISO 15693 1/2/3 (LEGIC Advant 1/2/3 (LEGIC Advant UID, for UID, for LEGIC sector information, LEGIC sector information, see special versions) see special versions) HID ICLASS CSN HID ICLASS CSN 9990410 TRANSIT PS270 Standard reader 9875220 TRANSIT PS270 Standard reader USA
05/11
Chapter 8.7 Page 9

Product name Part nr. Prox-Booster Smartcard-Booster Transition-Booster NED-9895744 Prox-Booster NED-9895337 NED-9895752 NED-9895736 Prox-Booster (single id) 116 x 72 x 27 mm according to Ertico OBU standard IP32 [approx. NEMA 2] Up to 10 meters with TRANSIT Standard , up to 4 meter [12 ft] with TRANSIT Entry Attaches with suction pads to the windscreen on the inside of a vehicle. A metal free communication window is required. Built-in factory replaceable lithium batteries with expected lifetime of 10 years*. C: After user activation vehicle and driver ID is transmitted (default) A: Continuous transmission of vehicle ID and driver ID (not available for Prox-Booster single id Prox-Booster: Driver ID & vehicle ID Prox-Booster single id: Driver ID HID prox, up to 40 bits (HIB required on reader level 7819102) EM/ Nedap Built-in user replaceable AAA lithium batteries with expected lifetime of 5 years*. C: After user activation vehicle and driver ID is transmitted (default) A: Continuous transmission of vehicle ID and driver ID Built-in user replaceable AAA lithium batteries with expected lifetime of 5 years*. C: After user activation vehicle and driver ID is transmitted (default) A: Continuous transmission of vehicle ID and driver ID
Dimensions Protection Detection range Mounting Battery life Note*
Operating mode
Identification Driver
Driver ID & vehicle ID
Driver ID & vehicle ID
Supported prox cards (120-125 kHz cards)
Supported smartcards (13.56 MHZ)
Special versions
ISO 14443 1/2A/3A (MIFARE CSN and optional sector information) ISO 15693 1/2/3 (LEGIC Advant UID, for LEGIC sector information, see special versions) HID iCLASS CSN NED-9895736 NED-9895728 Prox-Booster Single ID, single ID Smartcard-Booster Legic version without embedded vehicle (Dedicated LEGIC version ID, driver ID only which can read LEGIC sector information, see separate Smartcard-Booster Legic_ProdBull)
HID prox, up to 40 bits (HIB required on reader level 7819102) EM, Nedap ISO 14443 1/2A/3A (MIFARE CSN and optional sector information) ISO 15693 1/2/3 (LEGIC Advant UID, for LEGIC sector information, see special versions) HID iCLASS CSN
Chapter 8.7 Page 10
05/11
Chapter 8.8 Cards and Readers uPass Reach Readers

Features
Consistent reading up to 4m Operates with passive UHF tags EPC Gen 2 compatible Competitive pricing On-site adjustable reading Elegant slim design LED and audible read indication Weatherproof protected housing
uPASS Reach
The uPASS Reach reader offers long range vehicle identification up to 4 meters using the latest UHF technology. Based on battery free passive UHF the uPASS Reach reader offers a cost effective and enduring solution for parking access. The system is based on a uPASS Reach reader and a UHF tag. The Reach readers are installed next to the gate on a maximum height of 2 meters. This can be accomplished without any additional mounting accessories or wiring, when upgrading existing proximity Wiegand reader installations. A long range passive UHF tag visible in direct line of sight will be identified up to 4 meters. The UHF tags are battery and maintenance free. The reader output allows the access control or parking system to open the gate when authorized without the need to present a badge. The built-in high intensity LED provides the user visual feedback that the tag has been read. The reader only supports read commands, so it cannot be used to write data into the memory of the tags. Plug & Play operation The uPASS Reach reader has an integrated fine-tuned antenna in a compact enclosure ideal for outdoor as well as indoor applications. Like all Nedaps AVI systems, the uPASS Reach reader supports all common industry communication standards, enabling seamless integration into any existing or new access control or parking management system. EPC global Gen2 The uPASS Reach complies with the ISO 18000-6 c and EPC global Gen2 directive. Nedap formatted tags are available for additional security. Applications The uPASS Reach reader is designed for parking access in residential and commercial applications such as; - gated communities - condominiums - car parks and - employee parking. A Nedap How to Order Guide should be completed with each order placed for tags, labels etc.
Operating frequency
Product Codes
9942319 Long range parking access reader based on UHF for Region 1 (Europe) 9942327 UHF windshield sticker 9942327 UHF windshield tamperproof sticker 9942344 UHF ISO tag 7591152 weather hood for uPASS Reach reader 9943803 pole mount kit for uPASS reach reader 9875840 adjustable wall mount bracket for uPASS Reach
NED-9942319 Region 1: 865 - 868 MHz Region 2&3: 902 - 928 MHz Dimensions 200 x 220 x 45 mm NED-9942327 Weight 0,75 kg NED-9942327 Housing Aluminium chassis with UL94 ABS cover NED-9942344 Protection IP65 [approx. NEMA4x] NED-7591152 Detection range Up to 4 meters with passive Nedap UHF tags NED-9943803 Range check LED Operating temperature -30 +60C NED-9875840 Power 1224 VDC +10% linear supply recommended Current consumption 1A @12VDC, 0.5 A@24VDC Identification Read Only Frequency offset See application note dense reader mode Input 1 dry contact or TTL Relay output 1 relay output (NO, common, NC), 24 VDC 2A Output Wiegand, clock data, magstripe (depending on programmed tag format) Cable distance Wiegand 150 m. 22AWG Interfaces RS232, RS422 and USB service interface 05/11 Access Control Catalogue
Chapter 8.8 Page 1
Chapter 8.8 Page 2
05/11
Chapter 9.1 General Access Products Access Control Ancillary Devices

Access Control Ancillary Devices
This section provides the ancillary devices required to complete any access control system. They allow you to monitor the doors status, leave the secure area without generating alarms of door forced, leave the area in an emergency situation or override the system from the unsecure side of the door in emergency situations. These devices are broken down into the following sections: Standard Egress devices Emergency Egress devices Door status monitoring Local Alarm annunciation devices Standard Egress devices Egress Buttons This section offers devices which allow an access-controlled door to be opened in an authorised manner. Standard methods of egress mechanical handle etc. do not normally provide a signal to the central control equipment. A door forced indication would therefore be generated if monitoring of the access doors were required. Also if magnetic locks or similar are used, a safe means of release is required. Egress detectors The purpose of an exit detector is to provide a means of egress from the secure area without the need to operate a press button. The device is designed to detect the individuals legitimate exit through a supervised door. The detector must capture the individuals hand movement towards the door handle (or panic bar) and, prior to the actual opening of the door, warn the system of a pending exit. When the door opens, the system is able to discriminate between a valid exit and a forced entry. The exit detector can be used on both free exit and controlled exit doors. The exit detector provides automatic and hands free operation. Emergency Override Devices Emergency Break Glass Box These items are wired in series with any fail safe lock (power required to secure the door) and its power supply feed and must be connected as the last item in the circuit before the lock itself. This means that the lock power can be cut off to provide a means of escape from the controlled area. In some circumstances, a break glass may be required on the unsecure side to give access into the secure area for emergency purposes - lift lobbies etc. The latter is a security risk and the break glass and door should be monitored to generate a door forced alarm as soon as the glass is broken. The latest range of break glass units are resettable or switch activated. No replacement glasses are required. Key Override switch There should always be a means of overriding an access control lock for access in case of system failure etc. This is achieved by mechanical key where possible. Where mag locks, shear locks etc are fitted, a key override switch will be required to remove the power from the lock to gain entry. This should be sited where it cannot be tampered with as it does override the system and cutting the cable will have the same effect as operating the switch. A door forced signal will be generated when the door is opened if the door is monitored. Door status monitoring Most access control systems will allow you to monitor the status of the controlled door. This is normally carried out by magnetic door contacts as used with intruder alarms. The contacts can be surface or flush fitted and are available in a wide range of colours and finishes. We have included a selection of devices to meet the needs of the access control system. Door status monitoring covers, door closed, door open, door held/ajar & door forced. The first two door positions are self explanatory. A door held/ajar status is given when for example a user props the door open for a delivery, or holds the door whilst talking to a colleague. This advises the system manager that the security of the site is not complete. Door forced, identifies that the door has been opened by a non approved means (not by card or egress device). This can mean the door has literally been forced open, the emergency break glass or key switch has been used or an override handle has been used. Local Door Annunciation Devices Alarms such as door forced can be annunciated at the system managers or guards PC. However, it may be beneficial to provide a local sounder to raise the alarm at the door so people in the area can investigate (and remove the fire extinguisher from its position propping the door open!!). A small selection of local sounders is included in this section. The noise level (dB rating) should be considered as for some doors it may be necessary for deliveries to open the door for extended periods and not all users will isolate the door from the system.
05/11
Chapter 9.1 Page 1
Chapter 9.1 General Access Products

Features
Heavy duty green dome for standard egress Double pole resettable egress device for fail safe lock override Hinged cover for emergency override unit 12Vdc sounder for door forced and held event notification if required from the door controller Standard triple gang electric surface back box white plastic 304 grade brushed stainless steel plate with PRESS TO EXIT text. Terminal block for egress button and sounder (emergency release terminated directly in unit)
KAC 3 in 1 Egress Device

Designed to be more aesthetically pleasing than individual components around the secure side of the door and to reduce the overall installation time. The unit is supplied with a 3 gang UK plastic surface mounted back box. If required this could be replaced with a 3 gang electrical back box on site for flush fitting. The stainless steel front panel overlaps the plastic back box so that it is suitable for flush mounting covering wall finish/fabric affected by the install etc. Where will this item be used? Any access controlled door requiring an egress button and using fail safe locking would benifit from the installlation of this unit. Providing standard egress via the green dome, therefore initiaing authorised door open signalling and offering local emergency override by the green double pole resetable call point. The unit requires reduced installation time and by adding in the local sounder and plastic cover for the resetable call point - it 'kits' together the items often omitted in individual product selection
Main back plate: Material Finish Dimensions Material thickness Fixings Text Green Domed Button: Operating force Travel Life (nom) Current rating (MAX) Ingress Impact rating Shock Operating temperature 304g stainless steel Brushed 214mm x 93mm x 2mm (H x W) 2mm 2 x 3.5mm counter sunk screws PRESS TO EXIT 12V Buzzer: Sound Pressure Level 80dB min. (12Vdc, 10cm) 3.3 0.5kHz (12Vdc) Oscillating frequency Current consumption 12mA max. (12Vdc) Operating Voltage range3.0Vdc to 20.0Vdc Operating temperature -20C to +70C Plastic back box: Dimensions 87 x 208mm Depth (surface mounted) 34mm Fixings centres 180.9mm Material Formaldehyde & Melamine Urea Knockouts in base and sides for cable entry
7N 2.5mm 2x 106 cycles 10A resistive 250V IP67 20J 50g -40C to +125C
Double Pole Green Resettable Call Point: Cable termination 0.5-2.5mm2 Maximum Voltage 30VDC Current Rating 2 Amps (switch only) Ingress 24D Operating temperature -20C to +70C Humidity
Product Code
CA1015 KAC 3 in 1 Egress device 3 gang metal electrical back box
Chapter 9.1 Page 2
05/11
Chapter 9.1 General Access Products Standard Egress Devices

Tyco Fire & Security introduced some time back a new range of egress devices with an increased range that have been ADT branded. Also included is a DDA (Disability Discrimination Act) items which are now becoming required for key projects.
Features
Wide range of designs Surface or flush mounting options Mechanical or Electro-mechanical options Branded or unbranded
Egress from the Secure Area

Egress buttons Where a door is controlled by card reader for entry but uncontrolled egress is required there are a number of methods available. The normal handle egress is acceptable if the locking mechanism used is motorised / electronic and the handle will actually release the physical item that secures the door for access control purposes. If this is not the case then any use of a handle would cause a door forced event on the access control system as this would not signal the controller that the door was being opened with authority from the inside. For non monitored doors this may however be acceptable. When an authorised means of egress is required and/ or the doors are to be monitored. Then a means of signaling to the access control system that the lock is to be released is required. This can be done by various means. The most common of which is an egress button. DRB001N-PTE
Surface mounted plastic egress switch Product Code DRB001N-PTE
Egress buttons come in various forms plastic, metal, mechanical and electro mechanical. They are also available in various shapes and sizes to suite the environment and the degree of usage and possibly abuse the button is likely to attract. What ever type of device is used the siting of the device is crucial. If a guest / visitor to the site cannot find a means of unlocking the door then the solution is not satisfactory. One means of overcoming this problem is the use of an egress passive infra red like the T.Rex device. This activates on the movement of the person towards the door it can be adjusted to react to the persons hand moving towards the door handle or the push plate etc. This movement is actually detecting the heat from the persons body so areas with a lot of heat movement could see false door releases but unlike standard intruder devices that cover a wide area for their application. The T.Rex can be adjusted on both X & Y axis to reduce this possibility.
DRB001N-PTE-A
Surface mounted plastic egress switch - ADT branded Product Code DRB001N-PTE-A
DRB002F-PTE
Stainless Steel egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRB-SH for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT Product Code DRB002F-PTE
05/11
Chapter 9.1 Page 3

DRB002NF-PTE
Narrow Architrave style Stainless Steel egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT Product Code DRB002NF-PTE
DRB003F-PTE-A
Stainless Steel plate with raised green egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRB-SH for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT - ADT Branded Product Code DRB003F-PTE-A
DRB004F-PTE
Stainless Steel plate with Green Dome egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRB-SH for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT. Product Code DRB004F-PTE
DRB004F-PTE-A
Stainless Steel plate with Green Dome egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRB-SH for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT - ADT Branded Product Code DRB004F-PTE-A
DRB006F-PTE
Stainless Steel egress device with large stainless steel button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRBSH for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT Product Code DRB006F-PTE
DRB007F-PTE-A
White Stainless Steel plate with Green Dome egress button - supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRB-SH for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT - ADT Branded Product Code DRB007F-PTE-A
DRB008F-PTE
Green Stainless Steel plate with raised green egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRBSH-G for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT Product Code DRB008F-PTE
Chapter 9.1 Page 4
05/11

DRB008F-PTE-A
Green Stainless Steel plate with raised green egress button supplied with flush fitting back box. Use DRBSH-G for surface mounting. Screen printed with PRESS TO EXIT - ADT Branded Product Code DRB008F-PTE-A
DDA900-1
Stainless Steel egress device with Disabled logo & push to open text. 110mm x 110mm surface mounted unit. Product Code DDA900-1
PBA850-S
Micro switched push bar (double pole) surface mount silver finish. 850mm long. Product Code PBA850-S
DRB-SH
Stainless Steel surface housing for egress devices Product Code DRB-SH
DRB-SH-W
White finish Stainless Steel surface housing for egress devices Product Code DRB-SH-W
DRB-SH-G
Green finish Stainless Steel surface housing for egress devices Product Code DRB-SH-G
05/11
Chapter 9.1 Page 5
Chapter 9.1 General Access Products Egress Devices

Features
Suitable for use with all access control solutions IP54 rated to survive in the industrial applications Aesthetically please and no moving parts to damage LED indicators for visual feedback to user
TBS Touch Sensitive Switch

The TBS-Touch Sensitive Switch from XPR is an entirely electronic, non-mechanical and ergonomically designed access control device. It can either function as a standalone unit or alternatively, be connected to a controller to facilitate access from a secured area. TBS is activated at the lightest of touches and is triggered by the users own static electricity. It provides a separate terminal block to earth the housing and its onboard dipswitch set for latch or pulse selection.
Electrical Supply Voltage Current consumption Indicators - LED 12/24 V DC/AC Max 30 mA Normal - LED RED Relay operation - Green
Product Code
TBS Touch Sensitive Switch
Environmental Temperature range Operating humidity Relay output Protection Mechanical Dimensions (mm) Housing Touch plate
-15 to +55o C (Internal use) Non condensing up to 95% DPST with 1Amp contacts IP54
85W x 116L x 22H Die-cast zinc alloy Stainless steel
Chapter 9.1 Page 6
05/11
Chapter 9.1 General Access Products T.Rex Smart Exit Detector

Features
New concept in access control exit detection Zone of detection easily adjustable with pinpoint accuracy Unlocks or shunts door automatically Hands free, No buttons to push Integrated 90dB local door alarm sounder independently controlled by access panel 2-relay model available
T.Rex Smart Exit Detector

The T.Rex provides a complete solution to exit detection and door surveillance for access control applications. Outstanding innovations such as X-Y Targeting TM and DSP implementation make the T.Rex the fastest and most reliable exit detector on the market. X-Y Targeting TM targets a specific area of detection. While some exit detectors on the market offer adjustments of the detection pattern with masking or horizontal alignment, the T.Rex is the first detector to offer vertical detection using two adjustable louvres located in the detection chamber. The installer trims the detection area by adjusting these louvres from 90 down to a minute 5. Horizontal adjustment is provided by rotation of the lens. Added security: These two adjustments allow the installer to mount the detector so that the detection area will not hit the floor along the doorjamb. This exclusive feature defeats attempts to circumvent door supervision by sliding objects underneath the door. Such objects would be detected by sensors mounted in a traditional way. DSP (Digital Signal Processing) prevents Door Forced Open alarms. Kantechs T.Rex utilises infrared detection coupled with DSP sampling specifically designed for access control applications. There is a substantial operational difference between a common infrared intrusion motion detector and the T.Rex. An intrusion detector operates at low sensitivity levels and is looking for the positive presence of a human. An exit detector must detect the extremely fast movements of a hand (the target) about to push the door or turn the door handle. Contrary to intrusion applications, a failure to detect in an exit application will actually cause a Door Forced Open alarm.
T. Rex Exit Detector PB-EXIT Exit Button

Infrared sensor encased in an insulation chamber.r The signal is subsequently audited by the on-board computer and filtered using digital signal processing technology (DSP) with automatic environmental compensation.
Tamper switch N.C. Function selection jumpers: Latch, fast/slow detection, LED disable Integrated 90dB piezo for door alarm. Controlled by remote panel or through onboard relay (5-28VDC)
Main relay Lock control relay Lock control relay and main relay terminals
Main relay timer jumpers 16-step digital timer from 0.5 to 60 seconds X-Y TargettingTM using two adjustable louvres to target a specific area of detection such as door handle or panic bar. T.REX-XL2 model shown
Power terminals and tamper output On-board computer
05/11
Chapter 9.1 Page 7

Detector type: Passive infrared Filter technology: Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Detector Lens: Curtain type Fresnel lens Detection Range: One hand: 3m Whole body:6m Power consumption: 12-28VDC, 50mA Piezo buzzer: 90dB at 28V, 5-28VDC, 20mA Main relay contacts: SPDT, A max, at 30 VDC max Main relay timer: Adjustable, 1/2 to 60 sec. Main relay recycle time: Fixed 3/4 sec. off Tamper switch: N.C. 100ma max at 30 VDC max Dimensions (H-W-D)cm: 19.0 x 4.5 x 4.75 Dimensions (H-W-D)in: 7.13 x 1.75 x 1.88 Indicator light (LED): Red/Green Certifications: UL 294, CE, FCC
Product Codes
T.REX-XL T.REX-LT T.REX-XLT2 T.REX-XL2 T.Rex Exit detector with tamper, piezo and timer T.Rex Exit detector with tamper, Europe only TREX with 2-relays no sounder - White colour - with tamper switch, Europe only TREX with piezo/2relays with a sounder with tamper switch
Chapter 9.1 Page 8
05/11

Features
Single or Double Pole devices Branded or unbranded Emergency egress units Test facility and resettable Emergency Break Glass Box Key Override Switch
Key Override Switch
Once an access control system is employed there must always be a means of gaining entry in case the access system needs to be overridden. This could be due to vandalism or simply not having a valid means of entry. From the unsecure side of any access point if the code is lost or tags not available, if the locking system does not have mechanical override (for example with a magnetic lock) then a key switch should be used.
It is important that this device is sited in a secure location that ensure that it is not obvious what the unit is for. Please note that the devices provided from stock have a common key.
KS001
Stainless steel override key switch supplied with flush fitting back box. Single pole change over operation key removable in both positions. All keyed alike. For non standard key contact supplier direct for special. Use DRB-SH-G for surface mounting. Product Code KS001
DRB-SH
Stainless Steel surface housing for egress devices Product Code DRB-SH
05/11
Chapter 9.1 Page 9
Chapter 9.1 General Access Products KAC Emergency Egress Devices

Features
Unique Plug & Play installation concept Total Flex-Ability in the choice of operating element Anti-Tamper Facility Enhanced Aesthetics Backward Compatibility
KAC Emergency Egress Devices
Installation efficiency, flexibility and full compliance with the latest standards are at the heart of the new MCP Indoor emergency release?Call Point range. Installation time and ultimately cost, are of paramount importance to any fir or security installer. The MCP range directly reflects this need by providing a unique plug and play concept designed specifically to reduce installation time. All new MCP products utilise a special terminal block, where all initial installation cabling is terminated.
This terminal block is simply connected to the back of the MCP Simple, but effective with no re-termination required . and no time wasted. Tyco Fire & Security now stock the resettable range of operating elements to provide you with the greatest flex-ability, No other additional parts or alternative products need to be ordered.
Electrical Specification Cable Termination: Maximum Voltage: Current Rating (switch only): 0.5-2.5mm2 30VDC 2 Amps
Product Codes
636.008.152. A
Environmental Specification Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing Operating Temp: -30C to +55C Storage Temp: -30C to +55C Ingress Protection (IP) Rating: IP24D
ADT branded green single pole resettable emergency egress device supplied with surface mount bow, fixing screws, reset/test key and installation leaflet 636.008.155.A ADT branded green double pole resettable emergency egress device supplied with surface mount bow, fixing screws, reset/test key and installation leaflet 636.008.152.Y Tyco branded green single pole resettable emergency egress device supplied with surface mount bow, fixing screws, reset/test key and installation leaflet 636.008.155.Y Tyco branded green double pole resettable emergency egress device supplied with surface mount bow, fixing screws, reset/test key and installation leaflet MCP3A-G000SF-13 Green Call Points for Access Control Systems, single pole changeover contact in resettable operation mode. Indoor use, Ingress protection IP24D MCP4A-G000SF-13 Green Call Points for Access Control Systems, double pole changeover contact in resettable operation mode. Indoor use, Ingress protection IP24D 515.001.045 Test Keys for MSP and CP style call points
Chapter 9.1 Page 10
05/11

Features
Range of accessories to provide protection against accidental damage and extra security Fully compatible with all call points Customised branding available
Hinged Cover
Fitting a transparent hinged cover to a call point provides additional protection from accidental operation. They are particularly useful in high traffic areas such as stairwells and corridors in schools and public buildings, where the volume of traffic can result in accidental operation of the call point causing nuisance alarms. HNGE-1
Product Code
515.001.128 Call point Hinged cover for use on MCP call points models
05/11
Chapter 9.1 Page 11
Chapter 9.1 Page 12
05/11
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Access Control Locking Solutions

Electric strike or electromagnetic lock on access controlled doors?
Locking and unlocking doors is the basic application of any access control system. The system remotely controls the lock to permit or deny access into an area. The controlled doors may be secured all the time or only during user selected schedules. To do this, electrical locking devices are linked to the door controllers provided with Simple rules for most cases: the access control system. The most coon locking devices used in the access control industry are electric door strikes and electro-magnetic locks. To select which locking device should be used on a specific job, the installer must begin with an evaluation that will take into account not only the security requirements, but also the regulations imposed by local or national authorities having jurisdiction.
Rule #1 For Free Exit doors, use electric strikes. Compliance with regulations is usually easier. Rule #2 Add an electromagnetic lock if you want to prevent free exit or to control exit with a card reader or a keypad. Note that you want to add an electromagnetic lock and keep the door strike (to provide physical security) if, as a result of regulations, the electromagnetic lock must be deactivated during a fire alarm signal or building power failure. Rule #3 Always check with local authorities having jurisdiction before installing any locks. Once installed, modifications of systems or removal of locks can be very expensive.
Electric strikes Because of potential regulations affecting the use of other devices, a door strike will generally be he most economical locking mechanism. Always order electric strikes as: 1)fail locked (fail secure) which means the strike will be locked when you remove power; 2) 24VDC, 250ma max.: 3) continuous duty; these specifications correspond to the requirements of access control. Electric strikes are generally more difficult to install than electro-magnetic locks and the services of a competent locksmith may be required. Fire Rating If the door strike is installed on a fire rated door, it may have to be approved for such us to maintain the fire rating of the door. Electromagnetic Locks When the exit must be controlled, it is necessary to provide a fail-safe device, such as an electromagnetic lock, that will keep the door locked not only on the entry side but also on the exit side of the door. In the past, the installation of electromagnetic locks may have been considered to be less costly than the installation of door strikes. As a result, the market for electromagnetic locks has grown exponentially over the pas few years. Unfortunately, a great number of electromagnetic lock installations were not done according to regulations and in some instances were actually jeopardising the safety of occupants. The proliferation of electromagnetic lock installations has caused great concern amongst safety regulators and, now, stringent local regulations and site inspections re common. This has caused a substantial increase in cost of using electromagnetic locks. Because of these extra costs, the use of electromagnetic locks may be more appropriate in situations where they are the only alternative, such as locking a controlled exit door.
Double Doors On double doors, the door strike will be installed on the inactive door which should be bolted down. A door cord or electric-conductive hinge will carry the power of the strike.
Special Situations It may not be possible to install door strikes on special doors such as full glass doors. The only alternative may be to install an electro-magnetic lock.
Regulations National and local building codes and fire ordinances usually regulate the use of locking devices. One must remember that those are usually minimum requirements and that the local authorities may have the last word in interpretation and exceptions. Always check with local authorities before installing any locks. Once installed, it can be quite expensive to replace the locks and repair doors and door frames. Other Locking Devices Mechanical devices (such as electric dead bolts) that prevent free exit are usually not permitted for use in access control applications. Check with local authorities.
Controlled entry and Free exit

A controlled door with Free Exit means that a reader or keypad is installed outside the controlled areas identifying users as they come in but, no control is made during exit of the area.
Controlled exit
A controlled exit door with Controlled Exit means that readers or keypads are installed on both sides of the controlled door. The users are authorised on entry and exit of the area. Sometimes, the controlled exit is enforced only outside of normal work hours. 07/11 Access Control Catalogue Chapter 9.2 Page 1
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products

Features
Range to suit most latches Rim range to suit traditional night latches Fail safe or fail secure options Face plate for wooden or Aluminium frame Monitored or unmonitored options
Electric Releases
There are a wide variety of locks and electric releases available for access control. In the main, there are three options available: Surface or flush is simply the method of installing the lock. This must take account of the aesthetics, security and type of door and frame. Fail-safe is a release that allows access when the power is removed from the operating coil. Failsafe locks therefore draw power from the access system when the door is in its closed state. Fail-secure provides a degree of physical security when the lock has the power removed. This could be either in its normal operation or in a total power failure. This type of installation offers a means of mechanical override for escape from the secure side of the door handle or if acceptable paddle turn and a mechanical override for entry by key. If this is not available then breakglass and keyswitch may be required as for the magnetic lock. Single or double monitored releases are available direct from the manufacturer.
Features
Aesthetically pleasing High holding face Surface or flush mounting Single or double action doors Monitored version available
Sherlocks
These magnetic locks are designed for fitting into the transom or door frame of most aluminium, timber or steel doors. The magnetic force pulls the armature plate onto the locating pins providing a physical mechanism against the side shear force applied to the door. These locks can be fitted to swing through doors but must re-align 2mm laterally to re-lock. Surface mounted shearlock and glass door brackets are available direct from the manufacturers.
Features
Aesthetically pleasing High holding face Horizontal or Vertical Installations Fail surface or fail secure options Single or double action doors
Solenoid Bolt
The solenoid bolt can be fitted into the door and frame either vertically or horizontally. The deadbolt has a 16mm throw. Suitable for single and double action doors (re-align 4mm laterally).
Chapter 9.2 Page 2
07/11
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Armlock 261 & 262

Features
Armlock 261 suits surface mount applications ('L' and 'Z' brackets available for inward opening doors), 262 suits mortice mount Armlock 261 also available as double magnet model Compact case size and clean aesthetics 250kg nominal magnetic holding force User selectable dual voltage - 12 or 24vDC Current draw: 480mA @ 12vDC, 240mA @ 24vDC Optional relay dry contact monitoring with LED
Armlock 261 & 262

Direct-pull magnets To facilitate remote access and exit control of any aluminium, timber or steel door. The Armlock 260 Series combines a compact case size and clean aesthetics whilst maintaining a magnetic holding force of at least 250kg. Offering durability and low maintenance, Armlock 260 Series Magnetic Locks at all times provide positive fail-safe operation (unless power supply continued during power failure by means of battery back-up). Available for outward and inward opening door applications. NOTE: For maximum security specify a Sentine 6TM Deadlock in conjunction with the direct-pull magnet available from Adams Rite as a Non Stock Listed item Tel: +44 (0)845 873 4838
Product Codes
637.008.401 Adams Rite 261-000 non-monitored single magnet 12 Or 24v dc. Medium duty suitable for internal door (up to 250kg x 2). Aluminium & Timber Adams Rite 261-005 monitored single magnet 12 Or 24v dc. Medium duty suitable for internal door. Aluminium & Timber Adams Rite 261-200 non-monitored double magnet 12 Or 24v dc. Medium duty suitable for internal door (up to 250kg x 2). Aluminium & Timber Adams Rite 261-205 monitored double magnet 12 Or 24v dc. Medium duty suitable for internal door. Aluminium & Timber Adjustable L bracket with cover plate for 260 series slim line mag locks from Adams Rite used for outward opening doors Adjustable Z&L bracket with cover plate for 260 series slim line mag locks from Adams Rite used for inward opening doors Adams Rite 262-005 monitored mortice magnet 12 or 24v dc (480mA @ 12V). Medium duty suitable for internal doors up to 250kg holding force. Double 2 Metre Transome Housing for 2 Mortice Magnets - Aluminium & Timber
637.008.402
637.008.403
637.008.404
261-701
261-801
637.008.405
637.008.455
07/11
Chapter 9.2 Page 3
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Armlock 281

Features
Armlock 281 suits surface mount applications ('L' and 'Z' brackets available for inward opening doors) Available as a double magnet model Compact case size and clean aesthetics 250kg nominal magnetic holding force User selectable dual voltage - 12 or 24vDC Current draw: 480mA @ 12vDC, 240mA @ 24vDC Optional relay dry contact monitoring with LED
Direct-pull magnet To facilitate remote access and exit control of any aluminium, timber or steel door. The Armlock 280 Series features clean aesthetics whilst maintaining a magnetic holding force of at least 510kg. Offering durability and low maintenance, Armlock 280 Series Magnetic Locks at all times provide positive fail-safe operation (unless power supply continued, during power failure, by means of battery back-up).
Armlock 281
The 281 has a security pin feature to help prevent unauthorised removal of the magnet from the door frame fixing plate. NOTE: For maximum security specify an MS Deadlock in conjunction with the direct-pull magnet available from Adams Rite as a Non Stock Listed item Tel: 01322 668024
Product Codes
637.008.406 Adams Rite 281-000 non-monitored single magnet 12 Or 24v dc. Medium duty suitable for internal door (up to 250kg x 2). Aluminium & Timber Adams Rite 281-005 monitored single magnet 12 Or 24v dc. Medium duty suitable for internal door. Aluminium & Timber Adjustable L bracket with cover plate for 280 series medium mag locks from Adams Rite used for outward opening doors Adjustable Z&L bracket with cover plate for 280 series medium mag locks from Adams Rite used for inward opening doors
637.008.407
281-701
281-801
Chapter 9.2 Page 4
07/11
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products External Maglock - Armlock 291

Features
Suits aluminium, timber or steel doors Armlock 291 suits surface mount applications, suitable for face or side fix applications 540kg nominal magnetic holding force Compact case size and clean aesthetics Stainless steel housing User selectable dual voltage - 12 or 24vDC Nominal current draw: 500mA @ 12vDC, 250mA @ 24vDC Built-in voltage spike suppressor. Reed switch monitoring as standard 'Z' bracket kit available IP Rating: Independently tested, rated IP67
Armlock 291
External magnet To facilitate remote access and exit control of any external gate/barrier. The Armlock 291 provides a magnetic holding force of up to 540kg. Offering durability and low maintenance, Armlock 291 Magnetic Locks at all times provide positive fail-safe operation (unless power supply continued during power failure by means of battery back-up). One magnet to suit both side and face fix applications.
Product Codes
291-005 Surface mounted external magnet, 12/24vDC, monitored, suitable for face or side fix application. Rated IP67. Z bracket kit in SAA finish for 291 series mag lock
291-800
07/11
Chapter 9.2 Page 5

Features
For timber or steel doors Jaw strength 907kg Internal solenoid, 12 or 24v AC or DC Current draw 1.48A @ 12vAC, 0.332A @12vDC, 0.74A @ 24vAC, 0.19A @ 24vDC Facility to change duty from fail-safe to fail secure and vice-versa Optional monitoring: single - latch only; double - latch and solenoid Strike opening: 36.5mm x 15.9mm x 12.7mm. Faceplate length: 201.6mm (7110) or 260.3mm (7111), case depth: 41.6mm Non-handed
7100 Electric Strike Electronic Releases

There are a wide variety of locks and electric releases available for access control. In the main, there are three options available: Surface or flush fitting Fail safe or Fail secure Monitored or unmonitored. Surface or flush is simply the method of installing the lock. This must take account of the aesthetics, security and type of door and frame. Fail-safe is a release that allows access when the power is removed from the operating coil. Fail safe locks therefore draw power from the access system when the door is in its closed state. Fail secure provides a degree of physical security when the lock has the power removed. This could be either in its normal operation or in a total power failure. Subject to the lock design, this type of installation offers a means of mechanical override for escape from the secure side of the door handle or if acceptable paddle turn and a mechanical override for entry by key. If this is not available then break glass and key switch may be required as for the magnetic lock. Single or double monitored releases are available direct from the manufacturer. Points to consider when specifiying electric releases: Installations that put side pressure on bolt in the jaw as this can prevent opening in an emergency On outward opening doors release can be exposed and then tampered with from exterior. (consider fitting anti-thrust plate). Engagement of bolt can be limited to just a few millimetres and so reduce physical resistance Do not use a sole point of locking on final exit door For single or double leaf timber or steel doors For remote access control of any timber or steel door equipped with Adams Rite 4700 series (or similar) deadlatch. Electrical actuation unlocks the strike jaw, releasing the latchbolt so the door can be opened without operating the latch itself. The compact mechanism fits into a timber or steel jamb section as shallow as 44.45mm. The 7100 Series Electric Strikes held by Tyco Safety Products are supplied with two flat faceplates for mounting in the frame or the inactive leaf of a pair of doors. There is a long faceplate for wooden doors/frames and a shorter face plate for aluminium frames.
Product Codes
7100-310-2
7100-315-2
Adams Rite 7100-Fail Secure 12v DC electric release (340mA) short face plate for Aluminium frames. Longer steel faceplate for timber frame or door. Maximum operational gap (door to frame) 3mm. Jaw strength 900kg Adams Rite 7100-Fail Safe 12v DC electric release (340mA) short face plate for Aluminium frames. Longer steel faceplate for timber frame or door. Maximum operational gap (door to frame) 3mm. Jaw strength 900kg
Chapter 9.2 Page 6
07/11
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Solenoid Bolt

Features
Slimline style allowing the lock to be concealed fitted into the door and frame Stainless steel deadbolt has a 16mm throw, providing a secure method of access control locking Suitable for single and double action doors (with positive centring door closers) Can be fitted vertically or horizontally allowing flexibility in installation User selectable time delay of 0, 2.5 or 5 seconds Door status and lock sensor monitoring CE marked Surface box available
Solenoid Bolt
1391 Electric Solenoid Bolt To facilitate remote access and exit control of aluminium, timber, or steel doors. The slimline style of the 1391 allows the lock to be concealed fitted into the door and frame. The stainless steel deadbolt which has a 16mm throw, provides a secure method of locking on doors requiring access control. Suitable for single and double action doors (with positive centring door closers). The 1391 can be fitted vertically or horizontally (but not in the threshold) allowing flexibility in installation, and at all times provides a positive fail-safe operation (unless power supply continued during power failure by means of battery back-up). Surface Box for 1391 Electric Solenoid Belt Allows the 1391 Solenoid Bolt to be surface mounted onto any flush door and frame. Suitable for timber or hollow metal door applications. Glass door brackets supplied for fitting to 10mm or 12mm thick glass doors.
Product Codes
1391-1042 Adams Rite 1391 Solenoid Bolt, mortice fitting, 12v DC fail-safe requires 900mA to lock (Quiescent 300mA @ 12vDC) Adams Rite 1391 Surface Box, allows the lock to be surface mounted onto any flush door and frame. Suitable for timber or hollow metal door applications. Supplied with glass door brackets for fitting to 10mm or 12mm thick glass doors.
1391-3042
Shown with surface mounting box
07/11
Chapter 9.2 Page 7
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Shear Lock

Features
Compact Size Nominal 1500kg shear holding force Mortice or surface mounted Glass door fixing bracket available Adjustable locking time 1-30 secs Suitable for door gaps up to 8mm Dual coil 12vDC or 24vDC Retry facility as standard Various finishes available on surface housing Non-handed Locking tolerance: 2mm lateral, 5mm longitudinal CE marked
Armlock1354
Mini Electro-Shearmagnet To facilitate remote access and exit of most aluminium, timber and steel doors. The Armlock 1354 combines magnetic field force and physical interference between lock body and armature to create a shear holding force of 1500kg. The product range consists of mortice mounted, surface mounted or glass door versions to cater for single or double action internal doors or external doors where a form of cover is situated above the doorway to prevent direct rain penetration. The product may be fitted in a vertical or horizontal position, but should not be fitted in the threshold. The shearmagnet at all times provides a positive fail-safe operation (unless power supply continued, during power failure, by means of a battery back-up). The slimline style of the shearlock is achieved by having a separate PCB, which can be mounted separately inside the protective box supplied. (Power supply unit is not included).
NOTE: Positive closer required on doors. For maximum security specify an MS Deadlock in conjunction with the direct-pull magnet.
Product Code
637.008.414 Adams Rite Armlock 1354 Mini ElectroShearmagnet mortice fitting - 12 or 24v dc. Up to 1500kg. Requires 1.2 Amps Pull In @ 12 Vdc. (Quiescent 500mA @ 12 Vdc)
Chapter 9.2 Page 8
07/11

Features
Expanded eForce platform with integrated HID Prox Contactless Card Reader Interfaces with any Wiegand protocol access control system Supports HID iCLASS 13.56MHz credentials Integrated antenna Models to operate Adams Rite latches, exit devices, and MS Series deadbolts Audible beep upon card presentation Red/green LED lock/unlock status Surface-mounted with concealed fasteners Non-handed with clutched lever protection Mortise cylinder control override (1" to 1-1/2" range with AR/MS cam) Die cast housing and lever in Satin Chrome and Dark Bronze finish Full outdoor rating temperature range from -35C to 66C Hardwired (7 conductor) installation with ElectroLynx connectors
eForce iCLASS
This new addition to the eForce family incorporates a contactless proximity reader into the proven eForce platform. The eForce iCLASS proximity card readers control access with Adams Rite deadbolts, deadlatches and exit devices. Card presentation is confirmed with an audible beep and visual change in the red/green LED indicator displaying the locked/unlocked status. Supporting HID 13.56 MHz (eForce iCLASS) credentials, the eForce iCLASS interfaces with any Wiegand-compatible access control system. The sleek-looking eForce iCLASS measures 1-3/4" wide x 15-3/8" high, and is compatible with aluminum, steel and wood doors from 1-3/4" to 2-1/4" thick. The eForce retrofits to Adams Rite MS Series Deadbolts, 4500, 4700, 4900 Deadlatches and 8000 Series Exit Devices in 31/32" backsets and greater. Adams Rite has long been recognized as a leading manufacturer of hardware for aluminum entrances. The eForce iCLASS is a strong addition to this family of products, and the obvious choice to pair with Adams Rite deadbolts, deadlatches and exit devices. Install with confidence. No one makes door hardware like Adams Rite.
Handle Clutch-protected cast zinc alloy, finished to match housing. Special Features/Requirements Hardwired installation: 18-22 AWG recommended (seven conductor stranded and shielded) Temperature range: -35C to 65C and 5-95% humidity (non-condensing) 500 ft. max. distance to host Housing The sleek-looking eForce measures 1-3/4" wide x 153/8" high, with Satin Chrome (626) and Powdercoat Dark Bronze (121) finishes. Electrical Specs: eForce Prox Integrated HID 13.56MHz iCLASS contactless card reader Interfaces with any Wiegandcompatible access control system Recognizes HID Prox 26-39 bit formats FCC Part 15 (USA & Canada) 12Vdc/150mA average 300mA Peak
Product Codes
3090C-01-626 Adams Rite eForce iCLASS in satin hrome finish. Reads any iCLASS credential
07/11
Chapter 9.2 Page 9
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Locking Accessories

Features
Compact Various Sizes Choice of two colours
Locking Accessories
Where locks or electric releases are fitted into the controlled door and will require electrical connection to control their operation and/or for monitoring purposes. A door loop will be required for the electrical cable connections so that the cable is physically protected and able to withstand the movement of the door.
There are a wide range of alternatives within the intruder range as well as the following surface and flush fitting options:
Product Codes
DL400 DL350 EDL1-Kit EDL2-Kit Concealed Door Loop Surface mounted door loop - metal 30cm fixed length door loop white Inc 2 EN3-JB9-HD-W & 2 Grommets 25cm white door loop extendable up to 170cm Inc 2 EN3-JB9-HD-W & 2 Grommets 50cm white door loop extendable up to 330cm Inc 2 EN3-JB9-HD-W & 2 Grommets 30cm fixed length door loop Brown Inc 2 EN3-JB9-HD-W & 2 Grommets 25cm Brown door loop extendable up to 170cm Inc 2 EN3-JB9-HD-W & 2 Grommets 50cm Brown door loop extendable up to 330cm Inc 2 EN3-JB9-HD-W & 2 Grommets
EDL3-Kit DL400 Concealed Door Loop
EDL1-BN-Kit EDL2-BN-Kit
EDL3-BN-Kit
DL350 Surface mounted door loop - metal
Chapter 9.2 Page 10
07/11
07/11
Quick Reference Locking Guide

Magnet 550kg Monitored Adjustable L Bracket L&Z Bracket Mortice Magnet 250kg Monitored Transom Housing 2 Metre Electric Strike 12vDC Fail-Safe Electric Strike 12vDC Fail-Secure Compatible Latches Mortice Shearlock 12/24v DC Fail-Safe Mortice Solenoid Bolt 12vDC Fail-Safe Surface Box for Solonoid Bolt
Hollow metal/ Timber Door
Magnet 250kg Non-Monitored
Magnet 250kg Monitored
Magnet 550kg Non-Monitored
Single Door Outward Opening
637.008.401
637.008.402
637.008.406
637.008.407
637.008.451 (250kg) 637.008.454
n/a
n/a
n/a
7100-315-2 Metal/Timber
7100-310-2 Metal/Timber
4710/4750 (metal) Chubb 3R35 (timber)
637.008.414 (metal/ tiimber)
1391-1042 (metal/ timber)
1391-3042 (metal/ timber/glass)
Single Door Inward Opening
637.008.401
637.008.402
637.008.406
637.008.407
n/a
637.008.452 (250kg) 637.008.454 (550kg) n/a 637.008.405 637.008.455 7100-315-2 As above One fixed Leaf
n/a
n/a
7100-315-2 Metal/timber
7100-310-2 Metal/timber
4710/4750 (metal) Chubb 3R35 (timber) 7100-310-2 As above One fixed Leaf 4710/4750 (metal) Chubb 3R35 (timber)
637.008.414 (metal/ timber)
1391-1042 (metal/ timber)
1391-3042 (metal/ timber/glass)
Double Door Outward Opening
637.008.403
637.008.404
A/R*
A/R*
637.0088.451 x 2 (250kg) 637.008.453 X2 (550kg)
637.008.414 x 2 (metal/ timber)
1391-1042 X2 metal/ timber)
1391-3042 X2 (metal/ timber/glass)

A/R* n/a 637.008.452 x2 (250kg) 637.008.454 x2 (550kg) 637.008.405 x2 637.008.455 7100-315-2 As above One fixed Leaf 7100-310-2 As above One fixed Leaf
Double Door Inward Opening
637.008.403
637.008.404
A/R*
4710/4750 (metal) Chubb 3R35 (timber)
637.008.414 x2(metal/ timber)
1391-1042 x2 (metal/ timber)
1391-3042 x2 (metal/ timber/glass)
A/R* - Not consignment stock product available from Adams Rite.
Chapter 9.2 Page 11
Chapter 9.2 - General Access Products Alternative Locking Solutions

Alternative Locking Solutions
Where a higher level of access control has or is being specified or the users requirements are more sensitive it is necessary to supply a locking arrangement that is commensurate with the equipment or risk involved. It is recommended in these cases that electric locks are supplied rather than electromagnets or electric releases. Electric Locks Electrically operated locks differ from electric releases or electromagnets as the power is within the actual mortise lock case. This component, depending on type, is usually cut into the actual door edge with the striking plate fitted in the frame. This gives the strongest possible arrangement and provides the same level of security as a high quality mechanical mortise lock. Additionally this method ensures the installation is aesthetically pleasing with no cables or hardware visible when the door is secured.
The locks in this section supply solutions to most types of door arrangements and are available as Non Stock Listed items but if clarification is needed in any aspect or and unusual door type is experience i.e. glass/double action, please contact ASSA ABLOY Electronic Security +44 (0)1923 255066.
Features
All lock functions are field selectable: Non Handed Multi voltage - 450mA at 12 VDC Fail locked or fail unlocked 20mm monitored deadbolt and request to exit handle Anti-friction bolt ensures no binding under side pressure Complies with the EN179 for panic exit doors CE Marked
ABLOY EL560 Kit 1
The ABLOY EL560 is a DIN solonoid lock suitable for external or internal doors of wooden or metal construction. Ideal for fire exit doors - no break glass or push buttons required. Read in - Free egress at all times. The bolts automatically deadlock when the door closes. The bolt and the anti-friction bolt will be deadlocked when they are thrown into their outer most position. The anti-friction bolt will be unlocked when the bolt is withdrawn. The lock can always open using the inside lever handle or with keys. Lockcases are equipped with integral microswitch to indicate the position of th bolt and Request to Exit monitoring of inside level handles as standard.
The kit includes: EL560 lockcase Strike Plate set of handles with split spindles. These handles conform to the DDA dimensional requirements ABLOY PROTEC High Security Cylinder for key override
Product Code
Order NSL from Abloy Security
Chapter 9.2 Page 12
07/11

Features
Fail locked Non-handed Versatile in its application the EL412 may also be mounted horizontally The option of key/thumbturn override is available at all times Monitored The EL412 is not suitable for fire route doors
ABLOY EL412 KIT 1
The EL412 is a solenoid lock, writable for narrow stile, with a double action bolt. Suitable for external (with additional out of hours security) also internal doors. Fits any construction timber, metal, aluminium, PVC. Ideal for swing through doors. The ABLOY EL412 is faillocked. The door can be opened by pushing or pulling when the electric control is switched on.
When the electric control is switched off, the lock can be operated only by a key or thumbturn. The kit includes: EL412 lockcase, 12V (480mA), 25mm backset Single and double action strikes ABLOY PROTEC High Security Cylinder and turn
Product Code
Features
Fail locked Non-handed Versatile in its application the EL413 may also be mounted horizontally Monitored The EL413 is not suitable for fire route doors
Multipurpose Solenoid Lockcase and Strike

ABLOY EL413 The EL413 is a solenoid lock for narrow stile doors, with double action bolt. Suitable for external (with additional out of hours security ) also internal doors. Fits any construction timber, metal, aluminium, uPVC. Ideal for swing through doors offering more tolerance in fitting than a shearlock. The ABLOY EL413 is a fail unlocked. The door can be opened by pushing or pulling when the electric control is switched off. When the electric control is switched on, the lock can be operated only by key or thumbturn.
Product Code
07/11
Chapter 9.2 Page 13

Features
Non-handed Fail unlocked Meets the prEN13637 european Hardware Standard. The 351 releases instantly and is ideal for use on swing doors and fire routes Releases under a side pressure of 5000N
effeff 351 U80
The effeff 351 U80 is a fail unlocked, double action electric lock. Suitable for use in both single and double action swing doors, allowing correct function when installed into door, door jamb or transom.
Product Code
Order NSL from Abloy Security.
Chapter 9.2 Page 14
07/11
Chapter 9.3 - General Access Products Power Supplies

These batteries provide local power and battery backed power supplies to both control equipment, readers and door locking.
Features
Robust 1.2mm steel box, hinged lid a clam-shell design Comprehensive indication of battery, mains and fault status front and back tamper Overload protection 12 Volt Power supply Units, Standard and Cost effective range
We have included a range of 12Vdc power supplies from 1 to 10 Amps with a wide range of batteries. This range of metal boxes designed to provide flexibility for fitting of ancillary boards are engineer friendly for easy installation and maintenance.
Battery Back Power Supplies
Product Codes
Power Supply 859.001.005 1381N Power Supply Unit in Housing (200x230x80 mm), 12Vdc-1A, 230V +10%, 50- 60 Hz, 13.8Vdc Battery Charging with LED Indicators, Output ripple: 50mV rms max. Battery Size: 1x 7Ah 12V. Fuses: Internal mains, Load output battery. (Europe Only) 859.001.007 1382M Power Supply Unit in Housing (330x335x80 mm), 12Vdc-2A, 230V +10%, 50- 60 Hz, 13.8Vdc Battery Charging with LED Indicators, Output ripple: 50mV rms max Battery Size: 1x 7Ah 12V. Fuses: Internal mains, Load output battery (Europe Only) 859.001.010 1383N Power Supply Unit in Housing (330x355x80 mm), 12Vdc-3A, 230V +10%, 50- 60 Hz, 13.8Vdc Battery Charging with LED Indicators, Output ripple: 50mV rms max. Battery Size: 1x 7Ah 12V . Fuses: Internal mains, load output battery. (Europe Only) G13802N-A 12Vdc 2Amp Power Supply in metal enclosure. Can accept 1 x 7Ah battery G13804BM-4-B 12Vdc 4A mp Power Supply in metal enclosure (380 x 330 x 80 mm) supplied with 4 fused outlets. Can except 1 x 17Ah battery (Not included) PDS-12-10X-10D isis 12Vdc 10 Amp Power Supply in a metal enclosure (380 x 330 x 110 mm) supplied with 8 fused outlet board Battery PS-1270 12 Volt DC, 7 Ah Battery, Power-Sonic Europe Ltd. PS-1270 - 12VOLT 7.0 ampere hour recharge-able sealed lead acid battery - VDS approved (supplied in box of 5) PS-1242 12 Volt DC, 4,5 Ah Battery for apC/L (Cable 0650-1298-01 not Included) , Power-Sonic Europe Ltd PS-1242 - 12VOLT 4.5 ampere hour rechargable sealed lead acid battery PS-12170 12Vdc 17Ah battery used with iSTAR eX
05/11
Chapter 9.3 Page 1
Chapter 9.3 Page 2
05/11
Chapter 9.3 - General Access Products Power Supplies

These batteries provide local power and battery backed power supplies to both control equipment, readers and door locking.
Features
Robust 1.2mm steel box, hinged lid a clam-shell design Comprehensive indication of battery, mains and fault status front and back tamper Overload protection 12 Volt Power supply Units, Standard and Cost effective range
We have included a range of 12Vdc power supplies from 1 to 10 Amps with a wide range of batteries. This range of metal boxes designed to provide flexibility for fitting of ancillary boards are engineer friendly for easy installation and maintenance.
Battery Back Power Supplies
Product Codes
Power Supply 859.001.005 1381N Power Supply Unit in Housing (200x230x80 mm), 12Vdc-1A, 230V +10%, 50- 60 Hz, 13.8Vdc Battery Charging with LED Indicators, Output ripple: 50mV rms max. Battery Size: 1x 7Ah 12V. Fuses: Internal mains, Load output battery. (Europe Only) 859.001.007 1382M Power Supply Unit in Housing (330x335x80 mm), 12Vdc-2A, 230V +10%, 50- 60 Hz, 13.8Vdc Battery Charging with LED Indicators, Output ripple: 50mV rms max Battery Size: 1x 7Ah 12V. Fuses: Internal mains, Load output battery (Europe Only) 859.001.010 1383N Power Supply Unit in Housing (330x355x80 mm), 12Vdc-3A, 230V +10%, 50- 60 Hz, 13.8Vdc Battery Charging with LED Indicators, Output ripple: 50mV rms max. Battery Size: 1x 7Ah 12V . Fuses: Internal mains, load output battery. (Europe Only) G13802N-A 12Vdc 2Amp Power Supply in metal enclosure. Can accept 1 x 7Ah battery G13804BM-4-B 12Vdc 4A mp Power Supply in metal enclosure (380 x 330 x 80 mm) supplied with 4 fused outlets. Can except 1 x 17Ah battery (Not included) PDS-12-10X-10D isis 12Vdc 10 Amp Power Supply in a metal enclosure (380 x 330 x 110 mm) supplied with 8 fused outlet board Battery PS-1270 12 Volt DC, 7 Ah Battery, Power-Sonic Europe Ltd. PS-1270 - 12VOLT 7.0 ampere hour recharge-able sealed lead acid battery - VDS approved (supplied in box of 5) PS-1242 12 Volt DC, 4,5 Ah Battery for apC/L (Cable 0650-1298-01 not Included) , Power-Sonic Europe Ltd PS-1242 - 12VOLT 4.5 ampere hour rechargable sealed lead acid battery PS-12170 12Vdc 17Ah battery used with iSTAR eX
05/11
Chapter 9.3 Page 1
Chapter 9.3 Page 2
05/11
Chapter 9.4 - General Access Products ID Badging Solutions

Features
Enhance access control by recognising unauthorised people in secure areas Produce cards on-site. New starters have their ID on the same day Store images on the access control database for out of hours verification Produce visitor & contractor passes Store images on the access control database for out of hours verification Produce visitor & contractor passes which can be made active and inactive on your access system Personalise your access cards for company/club logo or slogan
ID Badging
ID Card Production - Enhancement to your access control system. Having supplied an access control system to an end user, they may now wish to consider taking advantage of the ID software available for all of the Tyco range of access control solutions. This will allow you to print cards via software loaded onto their PC and enable them to locally manage an ID system for a site or office. Each ID production system would include badging software & a card printer. They may already have staff photographs on a web site or have a digital camera to grab the images. The ID printer can be connected to the access control PC and will allow them to produce cards for staff, temporary staff & visiting contractors. As well as cards which should be worn by authorised visitors etc. Access control allows a customer to manage who goes where and when - ID badging allows staff to identify anyone on site who is not authorised.
08/11
Chapter 9.4 Page 1

In this section we offer a wide range of ID Badging solutions which allow the operator to capture, import, and display images from within the standard access control software. The dedicated ID packages provide powerful photo imaging features such as user-friendly badge layout editor, support for multiple graphic formats, network retrieval of images and in some applications control of the ID cameras iris, and zoom capability.
Digi Watchport USB Digital Camera

Features
Microsoft Video for Windows & Twain scanner support Manual and Automatic gain & shutter control Automatic White Balance (AWB) Enhanced Resolution up to 1280 x 960
CC800-9010DIGI Digital camera with Enhanced resolution up to 1280 x 960, MIcrosoft Video for Windows and TWAIN scanner software support. Manual and automatic gain and shutter control, automatic white balance (AWB), manual colour balance, colour saturation controls
Chapter 9.4 Page 2
08/11

Features
Hand feed slot 100-card hopper, 30-card stacker for batch printing 4 HoloKote options (NSL) Prints on HoloPatch cards Magnetic stripe or combi encoding option (NSL) Field upgradable from single- to double-sided operation LED colour display with buttons for ease of use USB rev.1.1 (USB 2.0 compatible) Compatible with Windows 7, XP and Vista (32 bit) 2 years limited warranty
Enduro Single (Double-sided upgradable) printer for plastic cards

Future-proof The Magicard Enduro can be field-upgraded from single to double-sided ID card printing, with a simple drop-in upgrade. The Enduro Duo is double-sided out of the box. Flexible A 100-card feeder at the rear and a hand-feed card slot at the front provide users with both batch-printing and one-off card printing convenience. Secure The Magicard Enduro features the patented HoloKote watermark technology, printed on the card during the normal print cycle, with no additional consumable costs. Smart Attractive, compact design. Colourful LCD display with simple button menu selections. The USB interface and Microsoft certified plug & play driver make the Magicard Enduro easy to install and easy to use.
Single -sided The Enduro is a single-sided printer which can be easily field upgraded to double-sided by means of a simple drop-in upgrade. Colour dye sublimation and monochrome thermal printing and rewritable technology. The user has the option to print a HoloKote security watermark across the card surface. When used with HoloPatch cards, one area of the HoloKote watermark is highlighted as a high visibility security seal. A choice of 4 fixed HoloKote patterns are selectable from the printer driver. Two years limited depot warranty (North America and EU only). Elsewhere 1 year limited warranty. USB rev1.1 (USB 2.0 compatible). Windows 2000 Professional (SP4), XP Vista & 7 (32/64 bit compatible), , Server 2003 R2 SP2, 2008 (32/64 bit compatible). 100-card feeder, 30-card stacker. 5.5kg External power supply 100-240V 50-60Hz autoranging. 453mm L x 206mm W x 233mm H including hopper and stacker Sheltered office environment 10C to 30C 35 seconds for colour and 7 seconds for monochrome.
Product Codes
3633-0001 3633-0060 Utra Enduro single sided ID printer Enduro Starter pack: 1 x MA300YMCKO colour ID ribbon for up to 300 prints 1 x 3633-0053 Cleaning kit (10 cards & 1 pen) 100 x blank pvc cards for test prints and standard ID passes 100 x Lanyards 100 x Badge holders 1 x Holopatch starter kit 1 x ID Pro DVD 2 x storage boxes MC200 Eduro colour ribbon MC200 Eduro resin black ribbon Cleaning kit 10 cards & 1 pen
Print mode
Visual security
MA300YMCKO MA600KO 3633-0053
Warranty*
Printer interfaces Software drivers
Card capacity Weight Power source Dimensions Environment Print speed
08/11
Chapter 8.4 Page 3

Features
Standard HoloKote with option to customise to an individual design Field upgradable from single to double-sided operation Easy to use four line display 100-card hopper & 70-card stacker for batch printing plus hand-feed slot Built in USB and Ethernet connection with Windows 7, XP and Vista (32/64 bit) compatibility
Rio ProTM
Secure The Magicard Rio Pros patented HoloKote security technology adds a watermark to the card as it is printed - it requires no additional consumables and can be customised to an individual logo design - enabling true security at no extra cost. Secure encoding options include magnetic stripe, contactless and smart card technologies. Expert Built for professionals, the Rio Pros superior card printing quality is enhanced by ICC profiles that seamlessly map colours between software and the printer. The clear 4-line display provides intelligent user information and interaction. Flexible USB and Ethernet interfaces are complemented with a Microsoftcertified plug & play driver. Batch print with the interchangeable 100-card feeder or print one-offs or rewritable cards with the hand-feeder. Upgrade a single-sided Rio Pro to double-sided printing using a simple in-field upgrade kit.
Tough Built with high performance purpose-built materials and advanced components, the Rio Pro is designed and manufactured at Ultra Electronics centre of excellence for manufacturing in the UK and is backed with the market-leading UltraCoverPlus warranty.
Print mode Colour dye sublimation, monochrome thermal printing and rewritable technology. A HoloKote security watermark can be printed across the card surface. When used with HoloPatch cards, one area of the HoloKote watermark is highlighted as a high visibility security seal. A choice of 4 standard HoloKote designs and 1 standard HoloKote Flex design are selectable from the printer driver. For added security, Custom HoloKote enables customisation of the watermark to an individual logo or security design. 3 years UltraCoverPlus warranty and support which includes full printhead coverage and free loaner service - Available in North America, EU and other selected territories. Elsewhere 12 months limited warranty. Printer interfaces USB and Ethernet both fitted as standard. Windows 2000 Professional (SP4), XP Vista and 7 (32/64 bit , compatible),Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2, Server 2008 (32/64 bit stacker. Weight Power source 4.9kg External power supply 100-240V 50-60Hz autoranging. Dimensions 470mm L x 220mm W x 250mm H (18.5 L x 8.6 W x 9.8 H) including feeder and stacker. Print speed *Colour standard mode: 31 seconds, *Colour fast mode: 23 seconds, *Monochrome resin: 6 seconds (*single-sided card) Operating environment Sheltered office environment 10C to 30C
Card security
Warranty
Product Codes
3652-0001 MA300YMCKO MA600KO MA250YMCKOK Magicard Rio Pro: single-sided printer. ULTRA ID Printer 5 panel Colour film ULTRA ID Printer 2 panel Black film ULTRA ID Printer 6 panel double sided film (Printer to be upgraded (NSL) before this cartridge will work).
Software drivers
Chapter 9.4 Page 4
08/11
Chapter 10.1 - Card Bureau Card Bureau Services

Features
Secure & Clean storage of cards Wide range of card technologies & formats available Printing services for photo ID, return address, Health & Safety instructions etc Card Accessories for on site storage of cards and for users to increase card life Fully designed copy card printed for customers approval prior to final print run
The card bureau service is available for those customers who do not wish to produce their cards in-house. Tyco Safety Products card production bureau utilises the latest equipment including image manipulation and digital imaging software. The customer should provide (or the ADT Installation can arrange for) digital images to be sent to the bureau. The Tyco Safety Products Bureau will then provide a sample card for approval and complete the order. After written acceptance cards carrying one or more technologies can also be encoded prior to despatch. A clear overlay for added duability is supplied as standard on all colour printerd cards. The bureau can, on request, store all data and images securely for retrieval at a later date, should cards need to be re-issued. To complete the process the following information will be required before budget/fixed pricing can be supplied: Style of card required Customer supplying artwork Number of colours per design Number of sides to be printed
The customer must supply a rough design layout which meets their requirements, together with any 'corporate' design restrictions, logos and special fonts. The card bureau reserves the right to refuse to undertake printing in the event of the customers' design being deemed to be impractical, e.g. black background with gold lettering The bureau will then print a sample of the card. PLEASE NOTE: Scans and other electronic means of transmitting the card design cannot be used. These will not give a true copy of the card quality and colour rendition. The customer must then sign and return a design approval document prior to the full print run being undertaken. We are able to store customers' cards in a clean environment for call off by the customer, usually for replacement cards or new members of staff. We also have corresponding codes which enable us to print the customers own cards, or cards which are purchased as NSL. Please contact the Tyco Safety Products Card Bureau on +44 (0)1462 667715 for advice.
07/11
Chapter 10.1 Page 1
Chapter 10.1 - Card Bureau

In addition to printing services for our stock coded range of cards, we are able to offer a bureau service for 3rd party cards providing they are supplied in a clean/sterile condition and that sufficient stock is provided for any print failures (around 5% potential). The initial set up order must be approved in writing by the customer for each card type before individual orders can be processed. If mag stripe encoding is required this is to be on track 2 only, and the full string must be approved and tested by the client before the print run is undertaken
Third party supplied cards
CBP001 Card Bureau cost for setting up template and printing a proof copy for customer approval. This requires the end user to have provided a basic design brief and all necessary artwork/logos.. If issuing proof, using customer specific cards (supplied by the customer) they must be in a clean condition (sealed packets ready for printing in a sterile environment). If this is not possible the job will have to be refused. Artwork must be in jpeg or bitmap format for digital imaging, we cannot reproduce from scanned hard copies. The client must receive and sign off a printed card not a scanned image, as electronic images may give the wrong colour and / or positioning of the graphics CBP010 Mag stripe card with printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card - up to three colours NO PHOTO. The cards magnetic stripe is UNENCODED. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP011 Mag stripe card with printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card - with Photo ID. Artwork and photos to be supplied by the customer. The cards magnetic stripe is UNENCODED. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP012 Siteguard format mag stripe card with printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card - up to three colours NO PHOTO.. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP013 Siteguard format mag stripe card with printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card - with Photo ID. Artwork and photos to be supplied by the customer. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP014 Siteguard formatted mag stripe card with printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card - up to three colours NO PHOTO. A single colour print on the reverse of the card (return address) above the mag stripe is also included. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP015 Mag stripe card with ID printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card. Customer to provide artwork and ID photos. A single colour print on the reverse of the card (return address) above the UNENCODED mag stripe is also included. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP016 Siteguard formatted mag stripe card with ID printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card. Customer to provide artwork and ID photos. A single colour print on the reverse of the card (return address) above the mag stripe is also included. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP017 Mag stripe card with a single colour print on the reverse of the card (return address) above the UNENCODED mag stripe. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP018 Siteguard format mag stripe card with a single colour print on the reverse of the card (return address) above the mag stripe. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP019 Mag stripe card with printing by Tyco Card Bureau on the front of the card - up to three colours NO PHOTO. A single colour print on the reverse of the card (return address) above the UNENCODED HiCo mag stripe is also included. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card. CBP020 Encoding only on HiCo Mag Stripe Track 2 to customers own specification. Customer to supply sample card to enable the Card Bureau to read the existing encoding string. Cost excludes the ISO pvc card.
Chapter 10.1 Page 2
07/11

Printed Card Proof Approval Form
Printed Card Proof Approval Form
Customer: Card Title: Date: Order Ref: SU Number: Quantity: Proof approved for production
We have pleasure in sending you the attached proof. Before you sign the form, please check the design. layout and text very carefully. PLEASE INDICATE ANY CHANGES YOU REQUIRE IN THE BOX BELOW Should any amendments be required, a further proof will be sent for your approval. Whilst every precaution has been taken to ensure accuracy, we cannot accept any responsibility for errors overlooked by the customer prior to approval. Please return the signed approval form to: Elaine Grant Tyco Safety Products Card Bureau Dunhams Lane Letchworth Garden City Herts SG6 1BE or fax:01462 667735
Signed .......................................... Date ..............................................
PLEASE NOTE: You must inform the Card Bureau if the customer will be punching the finished cards. This will ensure we leave enough space for the hole.
Proof not approved. Please list changes required.
PLEASE NOTE: WE MUST HAVE YOUR SIGNED APPROVAL FORM IN OUR POSSESSION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH YOUR PRINT RUN We reserve the right to make a further charge for additions or alterations to this proof, which are a departure from the original Printed Card Approval Form F039 Issue 01
07/11
Chapter 10.1 Page 3
Chapter 10.1 Page 4
07/11
Chapter 10.2 - Card Accessories Card Accessories

There are a wide range of card accessories which should be offered to every access control customer using magnetic stripe, or a contactless card technology. We have selected some of the most commonly used items from The Databac Group and detail below these parts and their use. Should you require alternative items, customer specific artwork etc, please contact The Databac Group directly: Databac Tel: +44 (0)208 548 9826 or dbooth@databac.com
Rigid Card Holders sold in 100's

Rigid card holders are a smart way to protect and display ID cards, enabling them to be read quickly and easily by reading systems. Used with magnetic stripe, proximity, contactless smart and other cards, the holders are made from transparent and coloured plastics. A variety of clips, chains and lanyards can be used, which are supplied separately.
Open fronted landscape card holder Product Code

IDP-64-BK Colour - Black
Double Sided landscape card holder Product Code

IDP-64-DS-BK Colour - Black
Enclosed Landscape Card Holder Product Code

TVB-700A Colour - Transparent
01/11
Chapter 10.2 Page 1
Chapter 10.2 - Card Accessories

Vinyl Pouches - sold in 100's
There are a wide range of vinyl card accessories, including card holders, pouches and wallets which can be used for holding and displaying ID badges, vehicle permits, visitor and other types of passes. Over 50 different styles are available off the shelf. All pouches are slotted/holed for use with clips or necklaces.
Double Top Style Product Code

VPA Double top type A pouch - landscape (one side shorter for easy access) 86x58mm
Clips - sold in 100's

This range of ID badge clips has been developed for use with both smart clothing and overalls. Metal clips feature nylon-lined jaws to protect damage to clothes. Special notches in the clip head itself greatly increase the strength of the metal head, for long-term heavy usage without loss of tension. Plastic clips are suitable for use in areas where metal detection is in operation, while neck strap adapters keep ID cards facing outwards.
A Clip Product Code

RSCA (nylon strap with metal poppers) 62mm
C Clip Product Code

RSCC (nylon strap with crocodile clips) 70mm
Chapter 10.2 Page 2
01/11

Lanyards sold in 100's
Neck cords and lanyards are fast becoming a popular method of displaying ID badges and exhibition passes. There is a wide variety of cord and soft braid available. These can be over-printed with logos, text and other graphics. Standard tape width is 10mm (9mm finished), although wider tape can be utilised if required.
Coloured 8mm breakaway lanyard with nylon clip Product Code

LAN-BW-BK Lanyard Length - 900mm Colour - Black
Pre-printed stock lanyards: 8mm breakaway lanyard with nylon clip Product Codes
LAN-STAFF-GR LAN-VISITOR-R LAN-CONT-BL Grey Red Blue
ADT Printed Lanyards

Screen Printed - flat or tubular 15mm or 20mm wide 1 or 2 colour print, on or both sides Optional safety break, and any choice of standard clip Please contact Databac direct on 0208 548 9826 or dbooth@databac.com lead time 3 working weeks from sign-off of artwork approval.
Special Order Only - NSL Product Code

ADT-LAN-BW
Full Colour (Dye sublimation) 15mm or 20mm wide Full colour print, one or both sides. Optional safety break - Any choice of standard clip Please contact Databac direct on +44 (0)208 548 9826 or dbooth@databac.com lead time 3 working weeks from sign-off of artwork approval.

ADT-LAN-BW
01/11
Chapter 10.2 Page 3

End-User Custom Printed lanyards
Screen Printed - flat or tubular 15mm or 20mm wide 1 or 2 colour print, on or both sides. Optional safety break and any choice of standard clip Customer to contact Databac direct on +44 (0)208 546 9826, or dbooth@databac.com lead time 3 working weeks from sign-off of artwork approval

ADT-CUST-LAN-BW
Retractable Card Reels

Retractable badge reels or yoyos are attractive and convenient for displaying all types of badges. These attachments ensure the card snaps back after swiping through a reader and can also be used for attaching keys or light tools.
Mini YoYo 5 +strap Product Code

YOYO-5-BK-STP Colour - Black
Card Storage Solutions

Durable, plastic badge container (right, below) which securely holds up to 500 cards. The container is lockable and comes with a set of two keys. Available in black.
Lockable Badge Container Product Code

LBC-500 Colour - Black
Chapter 10.2 Page 4
01/11

ID Cards sold in 100's & Overlays sold in 200's
Overlays and rewritable cards Data ReWrite from the Databac Group is a rewritable card compatible with rewritable printers from Datacard, Evolis, ClearJet and most others. As it is recyclable, the overall card cost is low with reduced environmental concerns.
Product Codes
CR0180 CR0185 Plain White PVC cards CR80 White Plain White PVC cards with mag stripe White Overlays for Ultra Magicard Rio2e or MC200 ID printer - Clear
M9007-001
Special Order Only

Please contact Databac direct on 0208 548 9826 or dbooth@databac.com NSL ADT Pre-printed Rewrite Cards - STAFF (100, 500 or 1,000 cards) - White + 1 Colour ADT Pre-printed Rewrite Cards CONTRACTOR (100, 500 or 1,000 cards) - White + 1 Colour ADT Pre-printed Rewrite Cards - VISITOR (100, 500 or 1,000 cards) - White + 1 Colour
NSL
NSL
01/11
Chapter 10.2 Page 5
Chapter 10.2 Page 6
01/11
Chapter 11.1 - Door Accessories (UK Only) Door Accessories

Features
Surface or Flush Options Brown or White finishes Choices for wooden or metal doors Standard or heavy duty options
Door Status Monitoring

There is a wide selection of door contacts available from Tyco Fire & Security product range with many options in the intruder catalogue. For Access Control we have selected a range of surface and flush fitting contacts which should meet the needs of most access control systems. QST-GN
Medium surface contact designed to work on large wooden or metal doors. Product Code QST-GN
Within this range we have also included a number of junction boxes which may be required for wiring inputs and outputs into the access control system for monitoring ancillary points such fire exit doors, pedestrian gates, in addition to monitoring the access controlled door etc.
QST-BN-GN
Medium surface contact designed to work on large wooden or metal doors. Available in brown only. Product Code QST-BN-GN
QF-5
A small white flush fitting contact designed to fit on wooden doors 5 x terminals. Product Code QF-5
QF-5-BN
A small brown flush fitting contact designed to fit on wooden doors 5 x terminals. Product Code QF-5-BN
01/11
Chapter 11.1 Page 1
Chapter 11.1 - Door Accessories (UK Only)
Chapter 11.1 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 11.2 - Door Accessories (UK Only) Junction Boxes

Features
Real tamper switch with spring operation Clamp style terminals Choice of models Modern design EN Grade 3 compliant
Junction Boxes
Designed for use in security applications, these junction boxes are provided with a tamper connection which will open circuit whenever the lid is removed.
Product Codes
Elmdene 10 way Grade 3 White JB with Tamper - 8 way plus 2 terminals for Tamper EN3-JB10-BN Elmdene 10 way Grade 3 brown JB with tamper - 8 way plus 2 terminals for Tamper EN3-JB9-HD Elmdene 9 way HD Grade 3 white JB with Tamper and Sealing Gasket - 7 way plus 2 terminals for tamper with environmental class 3 sealing gasket EN3-JB9-HD-BN Elmdene 9 way grade 3 brown JB with tamper with sealing gasket. 7way plus 2 terminals for tamper with environment class 3 sealing gasket EN3-JB26 Elmdene 24 way Grade 3 white JB with Tamper - 24 way plus 2 terminals for Tamper EN3-JB10
01/11
Chapter 11.2 Page 1
Chapter 11.2 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 11.3 - Door Accessories (UK Only) Local Door Annunciators

Features
Available with or without visual indicators Choice of designs to suit the aesthetics of the site Range of Audible output levels to suit the environment
Local Door Annunciation Devices

With both standalone and PC based networked solutions there is always a need to provide local indication of unauthorised door status positioning. This means that there should be a local sounder to advise staff/users of door held and door forced events. This means that local users will close the door or investigate what has happened and also stop would-be offenders leaving the door ajar.
Besson Bandit
Besson bandit 12V Piezo siren. 108db @ 1 metre Product Code 7067
Piezo Strobe
This unit is an internal unit giving audible and visual indication when activated. The unit is particularly useful for use in conjunction with an Exitguard unit. Product Code 676.002.033
Soundguard
Similar to the Piezostrobe but without the visual element. 102dB output. Product Code 676.002.034
01/11
Chapter 11.3 Page 1
Chapter 11.3 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 12 - Cable Cable

A wide range of cables are required for the various systems supplied and supported by ADT here in Europe. Where cables are stocked these will be Belden equivalent cables - meeting the Belden specification for number of cores, core size and twist/screen etc. You should only use the cable specified by the design authority for the access control system. Using any other cable may cause installation issues which could lead to replacement of the cabling at a later date to achieve a stable installation for the client. Where possible we have worked with the design authority for our stock coded access products to have our stock coded cables approved to reduce system overall cost and improve cable supply.
Product Codes
Part Number Location Description Reel size Multi-core flexible alarm cable 355008-WHT-100 UK 355012-WHT-100 UK 355006-BRN-100 UK 355008-BRN-100 UK 355012-BRN-100 UK 355020-WHT-100 UK 355030-WHT-100 UK 355106LSF-WHT100 UK 355108LSF-WHT100 UK 520003-WHT-100 UK 355008LSF-WHT100 UK
8 way flex cable WHITE 12 way flex cable WHITE 6 way flex cable BROWN 8 way flex cable BROWN 12 way flex cable BROWN 20 way flex cable WHITE 30 way flex cable WHITE 6 core Security Screened white LSF sheath cable 8 core Security Screened white LSF sheath cable CW1308 3 pair cable WHITE (solid core telephone cable) 8 core flex security white LSF sheath cable
100m 100m 100m 100m 100m 100m 100m 100m 100m 100m 100m
Cat5E data cable - Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) 350401-GRY-100 Cat5E 4 pair UTP cable - grey sheath 610.001.042 UK Cat5E 4 pair UTP cable - Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSOH) sheath 610.001.043 UK Cat5E 4 pair UTP cable - grey sheath Cat5 patch leads 610.001.040 374002 374003 610.001.041 Belden style/equivalent cable 428723-WHT-100 UK & EU 428723-WHT-250 UK & EU 428723-WHT-500 UK & EU 479503-WHT-100 UK & EU 429504-WHT-100 UK & EU 429506-WHT-100 UK & EU 429536-WHT-100 UK & EU 428442-WHT-250 UK & EU 428760-WHT-250 UK & EU 429841-WHT-100 UK & EU 429842-WHT-100 UK & EU Twin core 1mm lock cable 350492-SLT-100 Low voltage mains cable 320018-WHT-100 UK
100m 305m
0.5 metre RJ45 Cat5 Patch cable 1 Metre Patch lead Cat5E, terminated with RJ45 2 Metre Patch lead. Cat5E terminated with RJ45 3 Metre RJ45 CAT5 Patch cable
0.5m 1m 2m 3m
Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden Belden
8723 8723 8723 9503 9504 9506 9536 8442 8760 9841 8761
equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent equivalent
2 2 2 3 4 6 6 1 2 1 2
pair screened cable with white LSF sheath pair screened cable with white LSF sheath pair screened cable with white LSF sheath pair screened data cable with white LSF sheath pair screened data cable with white LSF sheath pair screened data cable with white LSF sheath core screened data cable with white LSF sheath pair screened data cable with white LSF sheath core screened data cable with white LSF sheath pair screened data cable with white LSF sheath pair screened data cable with white LSF sheath
100m 250m 500m 100m 100m 100m 250m 250m 100m 100m 100m
1mm twin core cable with LSF sheath
100m
Mains flex - 3 cores 1.0mm WT 3183
100m
06/11
Chapter 12 Page 1
Chapter 12 - Cable
Chapter 12 Page 2
06/11
Chapter 13.1 - EMEA Services EMEA Technical Services - Pre and Post Sales Support
Features
Local support in our time zone Pre and Post sales experience in 6+ languages for the approved product ranges Software Registration for C.Cure SSA quotations for C.Cure Testing of third party devices for integration with approved ranges
The Echt Pre and Post sales support group provide a wide range of services for all products supplied through the Tyco Distribution Services. They also carry out product evaluations and pre release testing of both Tyco and third party products and systems. Pre Sales Support The Pre Sales Support service is available through the same contact numbers as Technical support - simply by selecting pre sales you will be routed to the next available assistant. The team has developed its resources over the years and now provides a centralised service covering both technical and administrative issues, assisting with the identification of the correct Tyco Stock Coded part numbers for replacement items, issues regarding the features of these products and system design assistance where necessary. Pre sales may also include testing or creating card reader formats - something that requires a reader and a wide range of cards (at least 12) to be sent to Echt for evaluation. If you have any problems or queries with the procedure, please contact: Tyco International EMEA Technical Services Contact details Operating Hours: 8am to 6pm CET (Mon-Fri except Public Holidays) Contact Numbers: Toll Free: 00 800 CALLTYCO or (00 800-2255 8926) Direct: +31 475 352 722 Fax: +31 475 352 725 Email addresses: Technical Post-Sales Inquiries: tfsemea.support@tycoint.com Technical Pre-Sales Inquiries: tfsemea.presales@tycoint.com Technical Training Inquiries: tfsemea.training@tycoint.com Website:www.tycoemea.com Languages Supported: English German Italian Spanish French Dutch Website:www.tycoemea.com 01/11
Post Sales Technical Support The dedicated Technical Support group based in Echt designed to support the EMEA region and covers the products available from TSP Distribution Centres. The team is backed up by the Tyco and third party vendors - allowing them to handle the second line support once the ADT engineer is on site needing further assistance. Our engineers can then call in the manufacturer / design authority if required and subject to any support agreements that need to be in place.
Local Direct Dial Numbers: UK - (08081 013 753) and (08701 238 787*) France - (0800 90 79 72) and (04 72 79 14 83) Spain - (900 99 39 61) and (900 10 19 45) Germany - (0800 1806 757) Italy - (0800 874 091) Belgium - (0800 76 452) Bahrain - 800-04127 Greece - 00800-31229453 Russia - 81080020521031 Turkey - 00800-31923007 United Arab Emirates - 800-03107123
*Please note that in the UK, some ADT Office switchboards will not allow you to call the 08081 number. If this is the case, please use the 08701 UK
Chapter 13.1 Page 1
Chapter 13.1 - EMEA Services

Software House System Registration. All ADT offices in EMEA can now take advantage of C.Cure 800/8000 and C.Cure 9000 system registration via the EMEA Technical Support team in Echt. Using the on-line registration form at http://www.tycoemea.com/English/swh_software_registration.asp By simply completing this form the license registration file will be returned within 24 working hours (next working day) either by email or fax. This new EMEA service allows registration in the EMEA time zone allowing our business to operate more efficiently. Software Support Agreement C.Cure Software Support Agreements Support for their "mission critical" system guarantees a fast fix time Software and Firmware updates keep their system running smoothly Access to the latest enhancements and patches ensure high system availability SSA Benefits for the Integrator Recurring revenue & account retention A very good reason to schedule a meeting with the end user Chance to upgrade and up-sell Lower service costs; fewer issues An SSA allows access to SWH Technical Support if an issue does arise Please also remember that unless an SSA is in place a customer's site cannot be upgraded to the latest version of software. Keeping your end users informed of the latest features but then not being able to supply due to lack of a current SSA could be embarrassing With an SSA in place version upgrades (software supply on DVD) would then be free of charge. The installation business would then need to allow for the installation of the upgrade subject to the level of service agreement for each site. Arrange your SSA Quotation: An SSA is very simple to quote using the on-line form:http://www.tycoemea.com/Dongle/index.htm The Pre Sales team in Echt will then provide you with a quotation for a single or multiple years as per your request. Multiple year contracts can save your customer even more money Replacement Sentinels There can be many reasons for a replacement C.Cure sentinel to be required for a site. The policy for this replacement service from the Echt Post Sales support team is available via the link below http://www.tycoemea.com/Dongle/indexsec.asp In general terms the policy covers all eventualities and replacement may be chargeable or non chargeable subject to the criteria in the policy. Pease use the web site address above and refer to the criteria to establish how to order your replacement sentinel. 1. Sentinel has been lost or stolen (no evidence that it exists). 2. Faulty sentinel on a site which is out of Warranty period and has no valid SSA 3. Faulty sentinel on a site which is in Warranty period or has a valid SSA 4. Replacement of a parallel sentinel with a USB device on a site which is out of warranty and has no valid SSA 5. Replacement of a parallel sentinel with a USB device on a site which is in warranty or has a valid SSA
Chapter 13.1 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 13.2 - EMEA Services User Training

Features
Courses designed to enable students to explore the capabilities of CCURE Learn best practices in areas such as how to effectively manage a cardholder database See how utilising the functions available can help save time and reduce operating costs
CCure User Training

Our user training courses are designed to enable students to explore the capabilities of CCURE, and how to do the basics well by learning best practices in areas such has as how to effectively manage a cardholder database. Students will also learn how utilising the functions available can help save time and reduce operating costs Training for professionals by professionals. Our Lead User Trainer in EMEA, has 12 years hands-on experience in managing access control within a high security environment where CCURE was pushed beyond access control to become a security management system. We offer training courses both in the classroom and, where possible, at your location.
Some of the key benifits of these two options are: Classroom Based Courses Structured content with course material & demo software to take away Learn without the distractions of your working environment Small class sizes with a maximum of four students Hands-on with each student using their own CCURE system Knowledge share; a classroom based course offers attendees the opportunity to meet other users Courses are held in the UK at the TYCO ACVS offices in Heathrow, and in Barcelona at the Tyco Distribution Centre. On-site at a location of your choice Customised training delivered in your environment and suited to your needs Beneficial to those customers for whom getting staff off-site for training is operationally challenging Can be more cost effective for organisations that require a team of operators to be trained Customers requesting on-site training may be required to cover travel costs for the visiting trainer and shipping costs if any equipment is required.
To view full details of courses, availability & prices please visit the User Training website at http://www.tycoemea.com/English/TrainingSecurityOverview.asp
01/11
Chapter 13.2 Page 1

Course Overview
For further information on courses content and to view the course schedule please visit the user training website http://www.tycoemea.com/English/TrainingSecurityOverview.asp
Course Code Duration Objectives
CCure 800 System Manager 4 days This is a User course designed to cover topics relating to the configuration, management and operation of the CCURE800
No prior knowledge of CCURE is required Attendees must be computer literate An understanding of the basic concepts of Access Control is an advantage Audience This course is designed for new or existing CCURE users that are responsible for the management configuration and operation of a CCURE 800 system (for example: System Manager, Administratoror Senior Operator). Course Code CCure 800 Advanced System Manager Duration 4 days Objectives This is a User course covering the advanced features of the CCURE 800 system. Topics covered include CCTV integration, Intrusion Zones and keypad commands, advanced event programming and areas. For a full list of the content visit the User Training website http://www.tycoemea.com/English/Training SecurityOverview.asp. Pre-Requisites A prior knowledge of CCURE is essential. Attendees must have successfully completed the System Manager course Audience This is a user course intended for high level security system managers and users (for example: System Manager, Administrator or Senior Operator).
Pre-Requisites
CCure 800 Ops 2 days This is a User course, designed to cover most relating to system operation and basic administration of the CCURE 800 access control system No prior knowledge of CCURE is required Attendees must be computer literate. An understanding of the basic concepts of Access Control is an advantage This course is designed for new or existing CCURE users and teaches the skills required to operate and maintain a CCURE 800 system
CCure 9000 System Manager 4 days This is a User course designed to cover topics relating to the configuration, management and operation of the CCURE 9000 system.
No prior knowledge of CCURE is required Attendees must be computer literate An understanding of the basic concepts of Access Control is an advantage This course is intended for new or existing CCURE 9000 users, and those migrating from CCURE 800. The content is designed towards those that are responsible for the management, configuration and operation of a CCURE 9000 system (for example: System Manager, Administrator or Senior Operator).
Chapter 13.2 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 13.3 - EMEA Services Tyco EMEA Technical Training

Tyco EMEA Technical Services offer a comprehensive range of technical training courses in Tyco manufactured access control systems. Kantech EntraPass and CCURE 800/800 and CCURE 9000. For whom Technical courses are available to installation and field service engineers of Tyco EMEA approved dealer/distributors.
Training Locations
UK - Heathrow, Reading & Manchester France - Paris & Lyon The Netherlands - Echt Spain - Barcelona Italy - Milan
Languages Courses are delivered in the following languages: English, Spanish, German, French, Dutch and Italian Cost All technical training is currently FREE of charge when held at one of our training locations. However, we strongly enforce a cancellation fee for delegates who cancel attendance with less than two weeks notice. Course Overview CCURE 800/8000 - Level 1 Provides an understanding of the installation and configuration of both the software and hardware. CCURE 800/8000 - Level 2 Provides an understanding of the advanced features including the integration of 3rd party products. The delegate must have successfully completed Level 1 before attending this course. CCURE 800/8000 - Level 3 Provides an understanding of the AAM redundancy software. CCURE 9000 - Level 1 Provides an understanding of the installation and configuration of both the software and hardware. CCURE 9000 - Level 2 Provides an understanding of the advanced features including the integration of 3rd party products. The delegate must have successfully completed Level 1 before attending this course. CCURE 9000 - Level 3 Provides an understanding of the AAM redundancy software. Kantech EntraPass Provides an understanding of the Kantech system and the differences between the three software editions, along with the skills to install and configure both the software and hardware.
Certification Process All CCURE courses are linked to a certification programme. On successful completion of both a written and practical test delegates will become CCURE Certified and issued with a photo ID card. This qualifies them for two years, at which point they will be invited to re-certify, either by re-sitting the course, taking an online test or attending a course at the next level. E-Learning Additional instructional and reference material can be found on our website http://www.tycoemea.com/English/TrainingSecurityJobAids. asp. The material includes information on the basics of access control and IT networks, and 'job aids' designed to instruct on the configuration of various features. Course Schedule and registration For further information on our courses and to view the course schedule please visit our website http://www.tycoemea.com/English/trainingsecurity.asp To enrol please go via your usual channels or email us at tfsemea.training@tycoint.com If you have a specific question or request regarding your training needs please contact tfsemea.training@tycoint.com
01/11
Chapter 13.3 Page 1
Chapter 13.3 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 14.1 Access Control Survey

Access Control Site Survey Form Customer Details
Surveyor. Customer Contact: Name Tel: Fax:... e-mail Address .. .. Division/Company. Site Details: Address .. .. .. Tel: Site contact
CustomerRequirements:.... Number of Users. Number of Doors
Existing Access Control System on Site? Yes No Details:... ...................................................................................................................... . Are there any access control cards from this or other sites to be used with the system? Yes No Details (manufacturer / Technology). ...................................... .......................................................................................................................... A minimum of 10 cards and a reader will be required for test Communications: Are cable routes available between all access points? .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Can you use LAN WAN (TCP/IP) connections? If so, for which doors/sites?............................................................................................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .Are any remote sites to be managed from this system? Yes No Details ...................................................................................................................... How will these sites be connected? PSTN Fibre Optics TCP/IP Other (specify)............................................................ Details of existing Access Control System ManufacturerSoftware version.............
C.CURE/Kantech EntraPassTM Special/Corporate
Software model/capacity...............................................................
C.CURE Model 5
Controller type Number of controllers....................Number of cards...................

KT-300/128K / apC/8x
Number of readersReader type........Reader make......Reader style/colour.....................................

Prox/mag/smart Indala/HID/ioProxTM Wall switch/mullion
Network cable typeReader cable typeLocking methods....Egress methods...............................
Summary of Product Requirements:

System Type: Standalone Yes No Single PC Yes No Networked Yes No (Multiple PCs) QTY............................ Reader Type: Keypad Magnetic Stripe Proximity Smartcard Hands Free Biometrics Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Miscellaneous: DDA Friendly Photo ID / Badging Card Bureau Yes Yes Yes No No No
01/11
Chapter 14.1 Page 1
Chapter 14.1 Access Control Survey

Access Control Door Survey Form (page per door)
Door Name/Number Area:... Connected to Controller Located. Distance to Controller..
Type 2
Type 2
Type 1 Type 3 Secure Area
Type 1 Type 3 Secure Area
Type 4
Door type: Single Leaf Double Leaf Door Material Door Frame Material Door Dimensions Door Closer Fitted Emergency Escape Route Wood Wood Height..mm Yes Break Glass Unit Fire Alarm Link Metal Metal Width.....mm No Crash Bar Mechanical Override 1 1 2 2 Glass Glass 3 3 PVC PVC 4
Thickness....mm
Electrically Operated
Yes No Door Gate Barrier Turnstile Other (specify)............................................................................. Reader In RTE Out
(Request To Exit)
Readers
Reader In /Reader Out
Entry Reader Type
PIN only
Card Only
Card + PIN
Biometric
Reader Mounting Height(s).mm
Side of Door from Unsecure Side. (indicate on sketch of door type) Card Only Card + PIN Biometric
Egress Reader Type
PIN only
Reader Mounting Height(s).mm
Side of Door from Secure Side (indicate on sketch by door type above) Type of Locking Required... T.Rex Monitored Push Bar Hands Free Handle
Existing Locking............. R T E type

(Request To Exit)
Button
DDA Requirements
(Disability Discrimination Act)
Dual Height Readers Audio Only
Door Entry System Required ?
Audio/Video
Chapter 14.1 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 14.2 CCure Power Consumption Chart

Power Consumption Chart
Current Draw at 12VDC*

Panels and Boards iSTAR GCM boards iSTAR ACM boards RM4 board RM4-E board iSTAR Relay Board I/8 option board R/8 option board apC/L apC/8X Star Coupler Mini Star Coupler R/48 I/32 MRM WPSC lower WPSC upper RM1-IC RM2-IC RM2L-IC Readers Software House Readers Indala ASR-101, 103, 105, 110, 112 Indala PR5, 10, 12 Indala ASR-120, 122 Indala PR20, 22 Sensor Eng WR1, WR2 HID MiniProx HID ProxPro HID MaxiProx Barantec HID iCLASS RM with Mag Stripe RM with Mag Stripe with LCD RM with Mag Stripe Mullion RM with Indala Proximity RM with Indala Proximity with LCD RM with HID Proximity RM with HID Proximity with LCD RM with HID Proximity Mullion Wiegand: RM1-W ARM-1 Relay Module Wyreless PIM Wyreless Reader Interface (WR1) T.Rex Request to Exit Detector 3rd Party Options PCMCIA Modems Hayes Accure v.90/K56 PCMCIA Ethernet Linksys PCM100 290mA 180mA 75mA 175mA without LCD 35mA 150mA 150 mA (no active relays add 17mA per active relay) 120mA 120mA 80mA (no active relays add 17mA per active relay) 40mA 60mA (no active relays add 17mA per active relay) 310mA 140mA 60mA 70mA 160 mA 160 mA 225 mA 125mA 150mA 130mA 350mA 350mA 30mA 60mA 100mA 200mA 150mA 100mA 80mA 180mA 80mA 80mA 180mA 135mA (avg); 250mA (peak) 235mA (avg); 350mA (peak) 135mA (avg); 250mA (peak) 80mA 17mA (relay active) 300mA 300mA 50mA
220 mA 260 mA
*These currents are estimates. Voltage tolerance on 12 VDC input is +/- 15%.
01/11
Chapter 14.2 Page 1
Chapter 14.2 CCure Power Consumption Chart
Chapter 14.2 Page 2
01/11
Chapter 14.3 CCure Cable Specifications

Addendum 3 Cable Specifications
Detailed in the chart below are the recommended cables for use with C.CURE 800.
Signal RS-232 3 wire RS-232 4 wire Dial-up RS-232 5 wire RS-485 4 wire Reader bus
From Host Host Host Host apC
To apC apC apC apC RM/MRM input/output Modules RM/MRM input/output Modules Door Strike Contact switch Switch Contact ARM-1 Wiegand Prox Reader HID Indala Sensor Mag Reader
Belden Ref 9855 9855 8303 9842 9841
AWG 22 22 22 24 24
# Pairs Shielded Max Length 2 Yes 15m 2 Yes 15m 3 Yes 15m 2 Yes 1,200m 1 No 1,200m
Reader bus Power
apC
8442/8461 22/18
No Distance subject to volt drop No Distance subject to volt drop 600m 600m 600m 5m 50m (subject to CSA) 50m (subject to CSA)* 50m (subject to CSA)* 50m (subject to CSA)* 3m
Control Supervised Input REX Door Contact Relay Prox Reader (Wiegand) Proximity Reader Proximity Reader Proximity Reader Magnetic Stripe Reader
apC ARM Input Module RM-4, 4E RM-4, 4E RM-4, 4E RM-4, 4E Wiegand Star Coupler Wiegand Star Coupler Wiegand Star Coupler RM-4, 4E
8461 8442/8461 8442/8461 8442/8461 9462 9536
18 22/18 22/18 22/18 22 22
1 1 1 1 1 3 3 5 Wire 2 No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
9536/9537 24 9941 8723 22 22 22
* The distance that a Wiegand reader head can be from the star coupler, RM-4, or RM-4E is dependant upon the gauge of the wire.
AWG Wire Gauge 18 20 22/24
Maximum Distance 150m 100m 50m
01/11
Chapter 14.3 Page 1
Chapter 14.3 CCure Cable Specifications
Chapter 14.3 Page 2
01/11
Tyco International EMEA Pre-Sales & Post-Sales Technical Support Toll Free: 00 800 CALLTYCO or (00 800-2255 8926) Direct: +31 475 352 722 Fax: +31 475 352 725 Hours: 8am to 6pm CET Technical Post-Sales Inquiries: tfsemea.support@tycoint.com Technical Pre-Sales Inquiries: tfsemea.presales@tycoint.com Technical Training Inquiries: tfsemea.training@tycoint.com www.tycoemea.com Local Direct Dial Numbers: UK (08081 013 753) and (08701 238 787)
Please note that in the UK, some ADT Office switchboards will not allow you to call the 08081 number. If this is the case, please use the 08701 UK number.
European Distribution Centre - Echt, Holland: (Warehousing/Distribution/ Purchasing/Customer Service/ Call Centre Helpdesk) Voltaweg 20 6101 XK Echt Holland Tel: +31 475 371 666 Fax: +31 475 371 660 tfseu.service@tycoint.com
UK Distribution Centre (Warehousing/Distribution/Purchasing) Dunhams Lane Letchworth Hertfordshire SG6 1BE United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0) 1462 667 700 Fax: +44 (0) 1462 667 777 tfsuk.service@tycoint.com
The right is reserved to modify or withdraw any product or service without notice
a vital part of your world

2011 Tyco International
PMC022B Is 2.12 03/12
www.tycoemea.com

AccessCat Iss 2 12

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

AccessCat Iss 2 12

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Access Control Catalogue - Issue 2.

a vital part of your world

TECHNICAL SUPPORT & PRE-SALES CALL CENTRE

Access Catalogue Issue 2 - 2011

Access Catalogue Issue 2 - 2011

Access Control Catalogue

Morley Sentinel 2 Reader Standalone Access Controller

Battery Backup: Power: Current: Physical Specification Wall mount housing:

Chapter 1 - Standalone ioPassTM Stand Alone Door Controller

ioPass Stand Alone Door Controller

TYPICAL MOUNTING DIAGRAM

Access Control Catalogue

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 1.1 - Standalone

IOPASS TYPICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

Access Control Catalogue Secure Area

Unswitched Fuse Spur

Chapter 1.1 Page 5

Chapter 1.1 - Standalone

This page is left intentionally blank

Chapter 1.1 Page 6

Access Control Catalogue

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

Galaxy Dimension Door Control Module

Door Control Module Schematic

RS485 Bus 12Vd.c. Power In Touch Centre

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

Galaxy Dimension TouchCenter

TouchCenter Typical Solutions

DCM Image CO80 or C081

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

User Interface Modules

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

Preferred 37bit Tracked Format

26bit Format - Open Protocol

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 2 - Non PC Network Access Control Solution

This page is left intentionally blank

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software EntraPass Special Edition

Single Workstation Security Management Software

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 3.1 Page 1

Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software

Honeywell Galaxy Dimension Integration for G48 panel

User Manuals E-SPE-MAN-XX

EntraPass Special Edition user manual

Chapter 3.1 Page 2

Access Control Catalogue

Chapter 3.1 Kantech Software

Single Workstation System

KT-100, KT-200, KT-300, KT-400, and Kantech Telephone Entry System

DSC MAXSYS and PowerSeries Alarm Panels2 Honeywell Galaxy G48

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Access Control Catalogue